The World in 2030

RAY HAMMOND
The World in 2030
ISBN: 978-2-916209-18-0
Editions Yago 2007
[Link]
yago@[Link]
Printed by Itxaropena SA, 20800 Zarautz (Spain)
itxaropena@[Link]
Book design by Marc-Antoine Bombail
[Link]
Consulting referees:
Mike Childs, Head of Campaigns, Friends of the Earth
Professor Allison Druin, Director, Human-Computer Interaction
Laboratory, University of Maryland, USA
Professor I. M. Dharmadasa, Centre for Electronic Materials and
Devices, Shefeld Hallam University, UK.
About the author and the consulting referees:
Ray Hammond
Ray Hammond is a futurologist who, for over 25 years, has re-
searched, written, spoken and broadcast about how future trends will
affect society and business. He is the author of four futuristic novels,
ten non-ction books and various lm, TV and radio dramas. His
books have been bestsellers in the USA, UK, France, Spain, Czech
Republic and Slovakia, Poland, Japan and China. He is published
globally by Macmillan.
Professor Allison Druin
Allison Druin is Director of the Human-Computer Interaction
Laboratory at the University of Maryland, USA. She is also a US
Commissioner appointed by the White House to The United States
National Commission on Libraries and Information Science.

Mike Childs
Mike Childs is Head of Campaigns for Friends of the Earth. Found-
ed in 1971, Friends of the Earth exists to protect and improve the
conditions for life on Earth, now and for the future.
Professor I. M. Dharmadasa
I.M. (Dharme) Dharmadasa is Professor of Electronic Materials &
Devices at Shefeld Hallam University, UK. In addition to his re-
search into thin lm solar power technologies, Dharme is actively
involved in public awareness work on applications of renewable en-
ergy in the society. He has also designed a Village Power programme
using solar technologies to empower rural communities and to assist
in the reduction of poverty.
A Note For Readers
This report is being published in paper form with compan-
ion electronic editions in PDF format, on portable electronic
media and on the web. Most references are live hyperlinks,
although printouts of these links are provided in the printed
version. Readers who require index facilities are invited to
search the PDF editions electronically.
Authors Acknowledgements
I am indebted to my three consulting referees, Mike Childs,
Allison Druin and Dharme Dharmadasa. Their enthusiasm
and diligence in reading my drafts, suggesting amendments and
pointing me towards new sources of research were considerable
and I am very grateful for their advice and input.
Members of the PlasticsEurope management team also granted
me generous amounts of their time and I am grateful to
Wilfried Haensel, Jan-Erik Johansson, Hans van Doorn,
Wolfgang Siebourg and Peter Orth for their input. I am
particularly indebted to Phillip Davison who managed the
project for PlasticsEurope and to Debbie Parris and William
Andrews of Blueprint Partners who provided external com-
munications advice and design services.
The World in 2030 7
Contents
1. Introduction 9
2. The Backdrop to 2030 13
3. Section One: Accelerating, Exponential Technology
Development 43
4. Section Two: Climate Change and the Environment 97
5. Section Three: The Future of Energy 165
6. Section Four: Daily Life in 2030 239
7. Section Five: Human Health and Longevity 283
8. References 319
Introduction
This report has been commissioned by PlasticsEurope
1
the
trade association which represents the European plastics
manufacturing industry. In their original brief Plastics Europe
indicated that their aim was to commission a report that
would describe future lifestyles and trends in a way that
would appeal to the emotions, aspirations and ambitions of
the widest possible group of people and which would also
demonstrate the sustainable value of plastics as a material
for the 21st century.
As a condition of undertaking this task I asked for, and
was granted, complete independence and control over the
content. I was also delighted to learn that PlasticsEurope
wanted the issues of climate change, sustainability and en-
ergy efciency to be a main focus of this report.
My research has revealed that the plastics industry
is strongly carbon benecial and its products are of great
help in tackling climate change. Although mostly produced
from oil, the light weight and high strength of plastics (in
car components, plane construction, cargo pallets, building
insulation, etc.) means that far more energy and carbon is
saved through the use of plastics than is consumed in its
manufacture. However, if disposed of carelessly, waste plas-
tic can pose a serious environmental problem.
10 The World in 2030
In researching and writing this report, I have been aided
by a number of expert consulting referees but it is important
to point out that the conclusions that I reach here do not
represent their views, nor those of PlasticsEurope. I alone am
responsible for the content and the conclusions drawn.
It is sometimes said that as it is impossible to predict
the future accurately, any exercise of futurology is a point-
less task; indeed, the discipline itself is often viewed with
suspicion. However, the Oxford English Dictionarys deni-
tion of the term makes it clear that futurology is more about
studying trends in the present, and then extrapolating from
them, than it is about speculation or crystal ball-gazing:
Futurology: The forecasting of the future on a sys-
tematic basis, esp. by the study of present-day trends
in human affairs.
2
But even if we cannot predict specic events in the future,
it is denitely possible to identify trends and forthcoming
developments that are likely to act strongly on our future.
And long practice in thinking, speaking and writing about
the future the discipline of futurology produces results
demonstrably superior to projections made by those who do
not study routinely human progress and things to come.
To deny ourselves the exercise of visionary thought
would be to deny the human species its uniquely dening
characteristic to contemplate and plan for the future.
So, even if many of the specics in this visionary exercise
prove to be erroneous, I hope that my work here (and the
The World in 2030 11
input from my consulting referees) has identied a number
of trends and technologies that will have a strong inuence
on our lives over the next quarter of a century. Reecting
on these trends and, where appropriate, intervening in each
to ensure the best possible outcome, is the responsibility of
all of us. The past and the present cannot be altered. Only
the future remains plastic and open to our shaping. I hope
this report will make a small contribution to improving the
world in 2030.
Ray Hammond
October 2007, London
The Backdrop to the World
in 2030
There are six key drivers of change that will shape the world
of 2030. These are:
1. World Population Explosion and
Changing Societal Demographics
2. Climate Change and the Environment
3. The Looming Energy Crisis
4. Expanding Globalisation
5. Accelerating, Exponential Technology
Development
6. The Prevent-Extend Model in Medicine
(Disease Prevention and Longevity)
Many other factors will shape life and society in the developed
and the developing world a quarter of a century from now, but
these six are by far the most important drivers of change.
1. World Population Explosion and Changing Societal
Demographics
My rst inescapable conclusion is that there are already too
many people on the planet and, it is credibly forecast, the
14 The World in 2030
worlds population will increase by at least 50 per cent before
the rate of increase in population growth slows down.
Today there are almost seven billion people alive on Earth.
By 2030 there will be over eight billion and by the middle
of the century there will be at least nine billion.
3
This is the
ofcial median estimate of the United Nations Population
Division but many other agencies and organisations believe
that this estimate is far too conservative. The United Nations
itself acknowledges in its alternative high variant projection
that it is possible that world population could even double
between now and 2050 a projection that suggests that by
as early as 2030 (rather then 2050) there will be nine billion
people
4
on the planet.
Other factors that will swell the numbers of humans
consuming the resources of the planet include philanthropic
medical intervention that will begin to eradicate many large-
scale killer diseases on the African continent and much
extended life expectancies in the developed world.
I

This population explosion will present signicant problems
for every nation in the world. As Dr James Canton,
5
an American
futurist who has advised three White House administrations
on the future, writes in his 2006 book The Extreme Future:
The global management of nine billion people who
demand health, food, work, shelter and security will
I
In the poorest communities large families are an economic and social necessity (to provide cheap
labour and to insure against high rates of infant mortality). Despite widespread philanthropic efforts
to distribute plastic and latex condoms (to protect against disease) such provision is unlikely to slow
climbing birthrates in the foreseeable future.
The World in 2030 15
be the most daunting challenge any civilization has
ever faced
Feeding nine billion people in 2050 with an environ-
ment that cannot sustain six billion today is a chal-
lenge of great proportions. We most certainly need
to change our perspective about the environment
in order to best prepare for the changes in climate
that are coming. We probably cannot feed the planet
without advanced, accelerated agriculture to head off
mass starvation in the future.
6
According to the World Wildlife Fund,
7
1986 marked
the year that the number of humans alive reached Earths
natural carrying capacity. The organisation goes on to add
that by 2050, if world population reaches nine billion, we
will require nearly two planets worth of resources to support
ourselves. The inevitable results, they say, will be shed
out oceans, overgrazed pasture, destroyed forests, heavily
polluted oceans and an overheated atmosphere.
But such conclusions are arrived at by linear projections.
Modern futurologists know that such projections are unsafe.
In the early 1960s and 1970s it was gloomily forecast
8
that
the world would be starving by the year 2000.
II
A simple
calculation of projected population growth and the worlds
annual agricultural output led to this conclusion. But the
doomsayers hadnt considered the potential of the Green
II
A fear fuelled in particular by The Population Bomb, a book by Paul Ehrlich of Stanford University
which was published in 1968. This book suggested that overpopulation would soon result in the world
running out of food, oil and other resources. It proved spectacularly wrong, but it acted as a clarion
call for the modern environmental movement.
16 The World in 2030
Revolution
9
that was taking place even as they made their
prognostications. From the 1950s onwards improved
fertilisers, crop breeding programmes and factory methods
of farming boosted agricultural output by several hundred
per cent. There was no overall shortage of food produced
in the year 2000, even if many people in the world went
hungry.
By 2030 food production will have been revolutionised
yet again. The genetic modication of crops and livestock will
produce seeds that can grow in the harshest of conditions
10

(despite worries over the proprietorial commercialisation
of agriculture see the section Climate Change and the
Environment) and meat that can be grown on its own in
factories,
11
without a host animal. Plastic covering lms and
irrigation systems are already allowing European farmers
to produce multiple crops in a single season and these
techniques will be widely exported to the developing world
to boost food production.
Indeed, for reasons of climate change we cannot go on
deforesting our planet to grow more and more crops and
rear more and more cattle. We have already exceeded the
percentage of land that should be put to agriculture and the
planet can yield up no more. As Professor James Lovelock,
12

one of the rst scientists to raise the issue of climate
change and man who popularised the concept of the Gaia
Hypothesis
13
(the Earth as an organism),
III
writes in The
Revenge of Gaia:
III
The rst scientist to think of the Earth as a living organism was Russian-born Vladimir Vernadsky
who laid out the theory in his 1926 book, Biosfera.
The World in 2030 17
I like to speculate on the possibility that we could
synthesize all the food needed by eight billion peo-
ple, and thereby abandon agriculture
The chemicals for food synthesis would come direct-
ly from the air, or more conveniently from carbon
compounds sequestered from power station efuent,
and all that we would need in addition would be wa-
ter and trace elements.
14
Another factor that will have a major impact on food
production methods is climate change, but the impact
of this is harder to predict and will vary from region to
region. Sufce to say that technological advances in food
production methods will continue to have the potential to
feed the Earths enormously expanded population even if,
in some of the worlds poorest regions, poverty, corruption,
bad politics and conict (and, in some areas, acute climate
change) will continue to cause widespread famine. Drinking
water, on the other hand, is often forecast to be in very short
supply in some parts of the world (fresh water accounts for
only 2.5 per cent
15
of all the water in the world and most of
that is frozen). Today, over one billion people worldwide do
not have access to clean drinking water. Disease resulting
from contaminated water leads to 1.8 million deaths every
year and can account for 80 per cent of all illnesses in
developing countries.
16
The pressures on water are well illustrated by the
following report published by US Nation & World Report
in May 2007:
18 The World in 2030
Over the course of the past 40 years, north Africas
Lake Chad has shriveled to one tenth its earlier size,
beset by decades of drought and agricultural irriga-
tion that have sucked water from the rivers that feed it
even as the number of people whose lives depend on
its existence has grown. In 1990, the Lake Chad basin
supported about 26 million people; by 2004 the total
was 37.2 million. In the next 15 years, experts predict,
the incredible shrinking lake and its tapped rivers will
need to support 55 million.
The population growth has coincided with a
25 percent decrease in rainfall, with global warm-
ing very likely a factor. As oceans store more heat,
the temperature difference between water and land
dissipates, sapping power from rainmaking mon-
soons. At the same time, desperate people are
overusing wells.
Lake Chad, with its conuence of troubles, is emblem-
atic of a burgeoning water crisis around the world.
While the western United States faces serious water
problems, American money and know-how can at
least soften the blow. Not so elsewhere. Worldwide,
1.1 billion people lack clean water, 2.6 billion people
go without sanitation, and 1.8 million children die
every year because of one or the other, or both. By
2025, the United Nations predicts 3 billion people will
be scrambling for clean water.
17

The United Nations further predicts
18
that by the middle of
this century between two billion and seven billion people
The World in 2030 19
will be faced with water scarcity and this is likely to cause
serious political unrest and conict.
IV
In June 2007 Credit Suisse published a report called
Water. In the report the insurance rm pointed out:
- Water demand is doubling every 20 years more
than twice the rate of population growth.
- Water utilization rates have doubled in the past 45
years.
- Seventy per cent of global demand for water is
agriculture, 22 per cent industry and eight per cent
domestic.
- The absolute quantity of water supply is the same
now as it was 10,000 years ago.
- Asia is home to 700 million people who drink unsafe
water and two billion who do not have adequate
sanitation.
- American water consumption is 70 per cent greater
than European consumption.
- An estimated third of the worlds population currently
lives in water-stressed or water-scarce countries.
- In most countries, the price of water fails to reect
adequately the cost of supply.
- An estimated 85 per cent of domestic water usage
ends up wasted.
- By 2025, 18 countries will have water demand in
excess of supply and 58 countries (or 64 per cent of
the population) will be under signicant pressure.
19
IV
However, some serious long-term efforts are being mounted to address the problem of future water
shortage and hopes are high for a new nano-plastic membrane that is capable of converting saltwater
into freshwater.
20 The World in 2030
Needless to say, plastic piping and containers will have a
huge role to play in the conservation of increasingly precious
fresh water.
Societal Demography
The age make-up of the worlds population is changing dra-
matically and the effects of this will be very apparent by 2030.
In 2006, nearly 500 million people worldwide were
65 or older. By 2030, according to a US government report,
20

the total is projected to double to one billion one in every
eight people on the planet. The fastest increases in those 65
and older are occurring in developing countries, which will
see a jump in those populations of 140 per cent by 2030.
But although developing countries will see the greatest
percentage increase in their elderly populations it is the
European nations that are predicted to suffer most economic
pressures from low birthrates and ageing populations.
21
However, it is unsafe to assume that all the ageing
European societies of 2030 will have trouble supporting
their elderly populations. Three changes to our societies are
likely to prevent this. The rst is that people will work longer,
the second is that there will continue to be massive waves of
immigration of young people from the less developed world
into the most developed countries and the third is that
accelerating technological innovation will increase wealth
rapidly in the most highly developed societies (although
some of this new wealth is likely to be eaten up in efforts to
tackle and adapt to climate change).
The World in 2030 21
On the subject of working longer, most European
countries will have raised the ofcial retirement age
22
by at
least a year or two by 2030 and improved tness brought
about by preventive medicine and improved health care
will render the workforce capable of working (happily, even
eagerly) for longer. Indeed life expectancy will be so greatly
increased
23
by 2030 that retirement at 60 or 65 will seem
pointless. It may be the point at which people merely change
career.
On immigration, the latest gures from the UNs
population division
24
predict a global upheaval without
parallel in human history over the next four decades. At least
2.2 million migrants from poor nations will arrive in the rich
world every year from now until 2050, the United Nations
said in March 2007.
25
This means that a total of 55 million
new immigrants will have settled in developed nations over
the next twenty-ve years.
In Europe, the UN predicted that Britain, France and
Spain would receive the most new immigrants and the
Swiss population is expected to reach the eight million
26

mark by 2030, an increase of 9 per cent, mainly as a result
of immigration. On the other hand the UN predicts that
Germany, Italy, Poland and Russia will see their populations
drop because of low birth rates, lower immigration by
foreign nationals and increasing emigration by their own
citizens. Bulgarias population will fall by 35 per cent by
2050. Ukraines will plummet by 33 per cent, Russias by
one quarter and Polands by one fth. There will be 10 per
cent fewer Germans and 7 per cent fewer Italians by the
middle of the century.
22 The World in 2030
But the ow of migrants across borders will dramatically
increase the populations of most other developed countries,
even though Europes population will grow more slowly
than the USA.
In 2005, the population of Western Europe was larger
than that of the United States by nearly 100 million
people; by 2030, it is expected to be greater by just 35
million.
27
Whereas the US population is anticipated
to grow by over 65 million during that period (im-
plying a robust rate of increase of about 0.8 per cent
per year), western Europes population is expected to
remain virtually stagnant (growing by less than one
per cent over the entire 25-year period).
It is clear that by 2030 the majority of developed nations
with aging populations (including the United States) will
have long since ung open their borders and greeted with
enthusiasm young and ambitious immigrants. Those that
fail to do so will risk becoming economic also-rans.
The one exception may be Japan, a nation with a rapidly
ageing population, but one that has long cherished its cultural
isolation. Rather than open its borders to immigration,
Japan is investing heavily in developing robots that can take
care of its elderly
28
and produce new wealth within society. I
have no doubt that by 2030 robots will indeed be producing
massive wealth, and that they will be able to take care of the
elderly. But it remains to be seen what sort of future awaits
a nation made up of mainly old people being cared for by a
population of robots.
The World in 2030 23
2. Climate Change
Recently, public concern over climate change has become
so fashionable in Europe and some other parts of the world
that it may soon run the risk of suffering the contempt that
often follows over-familiarity. This would be a grave mistake
and must not be allowed to happen. I propose that we
should re-name this atmospheric malady Climate Disease
or Climate Catastrophe to underline the seriousness of the
problem.
The changes to our climate are palpable for all to feel and
increasingly easy for scientists to measure. The evidence
29

that such an abrupt change is anthropogenic (caused by
humankind) is overwhelming but a few die-hard sceptics
30

still insist it might be a natural phenomenon. However, the
argument about whether humankind is responsible for these
changes is irrelevant. It is clear that an abrupt alteration to
the planets normal weather patterns is occurring and this
poses a great danger for many of our societies.
If storms worsen, sea levels rise, ooding increases,
droughts lengthen and heat waves intensify, millions of
humans will be killed, millions will be displaced and society
will begin to break down. There will be refugees at all of our
doors. We may even become refugees ourselves.
We do know that so-called greenhouse gases
31
trap heat
in our atmosphere principally carbon dioxide, methane
and nitrous oxide and, leaving aside the debate as to the
root cause of climate change, it is our clear duty now to
24 The World in 2030
cut down sharply on the deliberate emission of any gases
which increase heat retention. Plastics have a major role
to play in combating climate change, both in reducing the
weight of components in cars and planes and reducing the
weight of cargo itself. Plastics will also make an increasing
contribution to insulation and energy efciency in building
construction and in the manufacture of energy generation
and distribution systems (see the later section The Future
of Energy).
Because there are so many variables in the science of
climate change, and because human response to the problem
is a matter of social and political will, it is impossible for any
futurologist to predict how the climate itself will be behaving
in 2030. However, it is possible to predict that climate
change will still be one of the most pressing problems facing
humankind (no matter how efcacious global political
response to the issue is over the next twenty-ve years)
because there is a time delay built into our atmospheres
responses to heating.
In his inuential 2006 book The Weather Makers,

environmentalist and zoologist Tim Flannery (Australian of
the Year 2007
32
) writes:
As our planet heats up it takes the surface layers of
the oceans about three decades to absorb heat from
the atmosphere, and a thousand years or more for
this heat to reach the ocean depths. This means that
our oceans are currently reacting to the gases we
pumped into the atmosphere in the 1970s.
33
The World in 2030 25
And that means that the heat-trapping gases were
pumping out now in the rst decade of the 21
st
century
will be the heat that is trapped in the oceans in the year
2030, heated water that will become the fuel for future
hurricanes and tornadoes. And that quantity of heat will be
considerable: since the industrial revolution began in 1751
roughly 305 billion tons of carbon have been released to
the atmosphere from the consumption of fossil fuels and
cement production. Half of these CO2 emissions have
occurred since the mid 1970s.
34
As a result of the oceans storing the heat trapped by our
present greenhouse gas emissions, in twenty-ve years time
hurricanes of similar or even greater strength to Hurricane
Katrina which devastated New Orleans in 2005 will have
become far more frequent events,
35
even if global efforts
over the next quarter of a century to reduce future carbon
emissions have been heroic. The weather in 2030 will be
extreme.
3. The Looming Energy Crisis
Its obvious if you think about it. Were running out of fossil
fuels. Even as I write these words new technologies are being
announced that can further improve extraction capabilities
36

to mine fossil fuels, pushing back the point at which fossil
fuels will be priced out of the energy market. But all such
announcements miss the point. It is clear, not least for the
very pressing reasons of climate change, that we have to nd
new and clean methods of providing our societies with the
26 The World in 2030
vital energy they need. And this must be done even as world
population balloons and energy demands soar.
Yet the clean energy we need is all around us, in the sun,
the wind, the waves and the rocks. Its just that we greedy,
lazy, avaricious humans havent had to go to the bother of
harnessing it: until now.
Mandatory reductions to our energy usage are not the
answer to the looming energy crisis (although conservation
and efciency must be vastly improved). Human evolution
spurs us to seek continual growth, both personally and
collectively, and any concerted legislative attempt to restrict
growth or economic activity would produce great social
unrest and alarming macro-economic consequences.
The solution to the energy crisis is complex because
the problem is complex. Humans have consumed external
energy since the rst camp re was lit and now that there
are to be up to twelve billion humans on the planet by mid-
century, all of them seeking better standards of living, theres
going to be a huge and rapidly growing desire for more and
more energy.
I stood in the blazing sunshine of a hot summers day
in Sydney recently contemplating the fact that, per capita,
Australians are responsible for releasing more carbon dioxide
into the worlds atmosphere
37
than any other nation (even the
Americans). The reason is simple to understand; Australia has
vast, easily mined coal reserves and this dirty fuel is used to
produce 85 per cent of the nations electricity.
38
Along with
its partner in shame, the United States, Australia isolated
The World in 2030 27
itself from the 1997 Kyoto Protocol
39
on climate change by
refusing to ratify the agreement. John Howard, Australias
Prime Minister has recently been forced into a U-turn on
climate change
40
(like his reluctant friend George W. Bush).
V

As I spent an hour in Sydneys beautiful botanical gardens
the solar energy beaming down on me was so erce that my
skin was burned, yet I saw not a single solar panel in use in
the city. And below my feet I knew that there was enough
accessible geothermal energy to provide all of Australias
power generation needs
41
for the rest of the 21
st
century.
The solution to the energy crisis (and to the ever
worsening effects of climate change) is literally all around
us, in the wind, in the waves, in hot rocks and in the suns
heat. It will be difcult and expensive to harness natural,
clean energy sources (although plastics have a great role to
play here) and it will be economically painful to wind down
our investments in fossil fuel energy extraction. But it must
be done, and quickly.
4. Globalisation
The term globalisation has many meanings and evokes
many different emotions. At one extreme the word is used to
mean global economic exploitation of the poor by the rich
and, at the other, a global movement to reduce poverty and
V
On May 8
th
2007 John Howards nance minister delivered a budget which offered a national A$8000-a-
house solar subsidy
6
to assist in installing solar panels in a program costing $150 million over ve years.
28 The World in 2030
promote peace. Both extreme forms of globalisation are being
pursued in 2007, along with many more moderate examples
and the massive trend towards the internationalisation of
trade will be a major driver of the changes we will experience
between now and 2030.
Globalisation
42
in essence means unfettered international
trade, although the world still has a long way to go before
all barriers to trade are removed. In principal, trade and
especially international trade is a good thing in which
all parties to the deal increase their wealth. Increasing
global wealth is a noble aim and little is more successful in
guaranteeing peace than improving prosperity. The nancial
benets of globalisation are explained in an economic theory
called comparative advantage.
43
European nations pioneered a colonial form of
globalisation in the 18
th
and 19
th
centuries as they expanded
their empires and traded goods all around the world, but
since then free trade has suffered many setbacks from
outbreaks of nationalism, protectionism, world wars (and
a complete retreat from globalisation between the world
wars) and over fty years of global ideological polarisation
between capitalism and communism.
Following the collapse of the Soviet Union and the end
of the Cold War the stage was ready once again for trade
on a truly global scale to resume. This time, however, long-
distance trade was facilitated by the arrival of the internet,
low-cost communications technology and (acknowledging
the legitimate concerns over aviations impact on climate
change) low-cost air travel.
The World in 2030 29
The most dramatic, and most obvious, example of the
impact of globalisation followed the admission of China
into the World Trade Organisation in 2001 when many
international trade tariffs were lifted. As a direct result tens of
millions of Chinese citizens have been lifted out of poverty
44

and in 2004 China overtook Japan to become the worlds
third-largest exporter, behind America and Germany.
The effect of WTO membership has been to bind China
more tightly into existing and highly sophisticated pan-
Asian production networks, a task greatly facilitated by the
internet. Everybody in the region has beneted,
45
even rich
Japan, which in 2002-03 was pulled out of a decade and a
half s slump by Chinese demand for top-notch components
and capital goods. South-East Asia has been given a further
boost: rich in resources, including rubber, crude oil, palm
oil and natural gas, it looks likely to prot from Chinas
appetite for raw materials and energy for a long time to come.
Now Chinas economy is growing by at least seven per cent
each year, a trend which is forecast to continue for the next
fteen years.
46
By 2030 Chinas economy is expected to be
the largest
47
or second largest
48
in the world.
But today globalisation seems to be regarded by
many people as the rape of poor ethnic cultures by the
rich countries of the developed world witness the mobs
of anti-globalisation protestors
49
who turn up at most G8
meetings.
To critics, globalisation is seen as the McDonaldsization
and Disneycation of nations that have been softened up to
welcome such a cultural and economic invasion by massive
30 The World in 2030
imports of American television shows and lms. But the
renowned veteran American futurist John Naisbitt
50
(author
of the best-selling 1982 book Megatrends
51
) rejects the idea
that globalisation is a form of American cultural colonialism.
In his 2006 book Mind Set! Reset Your Thinking And See
The Future he observes:
The question is: Does globalization mean Ameri-
canization? My short answer is no. In measuring
globalization, we can count telephone calls, currency
ows, trade sums, and so on, but the spread of cul-
ture and ideas cannot be so easily measured. Embed-
ded in the present is the unrecognized paradox that
culturally, America itself is changing more dramati-
cally than America is changing the world. Immigra-
tion is reshaping America more profoundly than
Americas inuence around the world. In the United
States there are more Chinese restaurants than there
are McDonalds.
52
However, another world-famous American futurist, Jeremy
Rifkin
53
author of the bestselling books The End of
Work,
54
The Biotech Century
55
and The Age of Access
56

sees both sides of the argument. He writes in his 2002 book
The Hydrogen Economy:
Globalization is the dening dynamic of our time.
Proponents look to it as the next great economic
advance for humanity and as a way to improve the
lives of people everywhere. Its critics view it as the
ultimate example of corporate dominance over the
affairs of society and as a means to deepen the gap
The World in 2030 31
between the haves and have-nots. Transnational cor-
porations, with the help of the G7 nations, are lob-
bying to change government regulations and statutes
that, they argue, restrict freedom of trade. Anti-glo-
balists are taking to the street in greater numbers to
protest what they contend is the systematic gutting
of environmental and labour standards designed to
protect the Earths ecological and human communi-
ties from corporate rapacity.
57
Globalisation is also seen as an excuse for multinational
corporations to use dirt-cheap labour in the developing world
to sell ever cheaper products (yet still protable products) to
greedy consumers in rich western societies.
But on the other hand, offshoring, outsourcing, free
capital ows and free international trade (which is a less
provocative way of describing the process) have the potential,
if pursued fairly and in a sustainable manner, to both reduce
poverty in the poorest nations and to bring benets to
consumers in the rich world.
The World Bank claims
58
that globalisation could spur
faster growth in average incomes in the next twenty-ve
years than occurred during the period 1980-2005, with
developing countries playing a central role. However,
the Bank warns, unless managed carefully, it could be
accompanied by growing income inequality and potentially
severe environmental pressures.
Driven by globalisation from 1974 onwards, exports have
doubled, as a proportion of world economic output, to over
32 The World in 2030
25 per cent, and, based on existing trends, will rise to 34 per
cent by 2030.
World income has itself doubled since 1980 because of
globalisation, and almost half-a-billion people have been
lifted out of poverty since 1990! According to current trends,
adds the World Bank, the number of people living on less
than the equivalent of $1 a day, will halve from todays
one billion to 500 million by 2030. This will take place as a
result of growth in Southeast Asia, whose share of the poor
will halve from 60 per cent to 30 per cent, while Africas
share of the worlds poor will rise from 30 per cent to 55 per
cent. This represents a continental inequality which carries
signicant dangers to world stability.
By 2030 the worlds richest nations will either be pursuing
ethical, sustainable globalisation by which I mean fair trade
with proper concern for those with whom we trade and the
environment in which we trade or we will be manning the
barricades against those who we have dispossessed.
As James Canton puts it in The Extreme Future:
In its crudest sense, globalization is either going to
be the most successful revolution to accelerate glo-
bal democracy, free trade, and open markets, or it
will victimize the poor nations of the world This is
perhaps the greatest challenge facing our civilization
today. People without a future are the most danger-
ous people in the world. They will do anything to get
a future or to destroy those who they believe are
robbing them of that future.
59
The World in 2030 33
But even as globalisation is starting to lift about ve billion
people out of abject poverty there are approximately one
billion people trapped in about fty-eight nations which are
experiencing only minute growth, no growth at all, or actual
economic shrinkage.
The people in these bottom states dont have access to
global markets (and even if they did get such access, they
would have little to sell except natural resources).
Most, but not all, of these countries are in sub-Saharan Africa
and, typically, their societies have reached a stage of development
that is the equivalent to where the societies of Europe were
between the 8
th
and 14
th
century A.D. These societies are so poor
that the people are constantly ghting amongst themselves for
what little wealth they possess (as European societies used to
do). These societies suffer from plagues and famine, are largely
illiterate, have only the most rudimentary healthcare and,
because of chronic instability, they attract no foreign investment
capital. Indeed, what little domestic capital exists or is generated
is almost immediately exported to overseas bank accounts in the
rich countries for fear of the same political instability.
60

Massive amounts of western aid, both nancial and in
kind, have been given to the countries which are home to
the bottom billion no less than $2.3 trillion, according
to William Easterly,
61
Professor of Economics at New York
University but it has made very little difference to the lives
of ordinary people in the bottom billion.
The reason our aid has helped so little is that the problem
is so great: many of the societies to which we gave our cash
34 The World in 2030
were so poor that it was immediately grabbed and embezzled
by all who had any power at all presidents, dictators,
ministers, bank managers, customs ofcials, diplomats,
contractors, even shippers.
62
Many such embezzlers may well
have had extended families living in poverty and to put the
general good of society above such personal considerations
would require the conscience of a saint.
Economist Professor Paul Collier,
63
Director for the
Study of African Economics at Oxford University writes in
his 2007 book The Bottom Billion:
All societies used to be poor. Most are now lifting
out of it; why are others stuck? The answer is traps.
Poverty is not intrinsically a trap, otherwise we would
all still be poor. Think, for a moment, of develop-
ment as chutes and ladders. In the modern world of
globalization there are some fabulous ladders; most
societies are using them. But there are also some
chutes, and some societies have hit them. The coun-
tries at the bottom are an unlucky minority, but they
are stuck.
64
In this survey of what the world may be like in the year
2030 why should it matter so much to us in the developed
world that a billion people (and, potentially, many more by
2030) will be stuck in abject poverty? There are two reasons;
the rst is the enormous nancial cost to the developed
world that failing and ghting nations inict, the second
is the almost certainty that such countries will increasingly
exact their revenge on us for their abject poverty through
international terrorism.
The World in 2030 35
Globalisation must now be extended to specically
include the bottom billion, otherwise their vengeance on
the rich world will become a seventh major factor that will
shape our future and for the worse.
5. Accelerating Technological Change
There will be more technological change in the next twenty-
ve years than occurred throughout the whole of the last
century. And that was the century that produced aeroplanes,
cars, plastics, nuclear power, television, the computer, the
internet and mobile phones.
The reason I forecast such extreme change ahead is that
the speed of technology development is itself accelerating.
The key to understanding why this is occurring lies in realising
that, a) technology development is itself an extension
of human evolution and, b) the speed of technological
development is the direct product of the rapidly increasing
speed and richness of information ows around the world.
The noted American futurist and inventor Ray Kurzweil
65

has pointed out that since humans rst began to extend their
biological powers by inventing technology, technological
innovation has itself been accelerating at an exponential
rate. He writes:
An analysis of the history of technology shows that
technological change is exponential, contrary to the
common-sense intuitive linear view. So we wont
36 The World in 2030
experience 100 years of progress in the 21st century
it will be more like 20,000 years of progress (at
todays rate). The returns, such as chip speed and
cost-effectiveness, also increase exponentially. Theres
even exponential growth in the rate of exponential
growth. Within a few decades, machine intelligence
will surpass human intelligence, leading to The Singu-
larity technological change so rapid and profound it
represents a rupture in the fabric of human history.
66
Ray Kurzweils reference to The Singularity
67
in the above
paragraph prompts me to explain the reason that I decided
to x the focus point of this report a quarter-century ahead
and not fty years hence or some other point further into
the distant future.
Like Ray Kurzweil, I too am convinced (and have been
so for decades) that we are rapidly approaching the point
at which machine intelligence will reach a point of equality
with human intelligence. Most futurists estimate that this
seemingly disturbing phenomenon will occur sometime
during the period between 2025 and 2035 and soon after
this milestone is reached human life and society will begin to
change in ways that are impossible to imagine using human
insight alone.
Within a year or two of machines achieving human-level
intelligence exponential technological development means
that machines will have the potential to become twice as smart
as humans. A year or so later they will be four times as capable.
Soon afterwards their capabilities will be beyond any human
form of measurement and beyond human understanding.
The World in 2030 37
As I shall discuss in my later section on Accelerating,
Exponential Technology Development, this is not
necessarily the alarming prospect that it might seem, but it is
the principal reason that current futurology is unable to peer
much further ahead than the fourth decade of the 21
st
century.
After that the future will become alien, unrecognisable and
indescribable to present-day human audiences.
I regard the phenomenon of accelerating technological
development as the joker in the pack when it comes to
considering future trends. During the next quarter of a
century it is possible that presently unforeseeable wild card
technologies will be developed that will solve the worlds
demand for clean energy and, perhaps, even provide some
degree of control over the worlds climate. It might even
solve the drinking water shortage. I shall return to these
speculations in the relevant sections.
6. The Prevent-Extend Revolution in Medicine
(Prevention and Longevity)
While machines may be on what appears to be the verge of
usurping our species on this planet, we humans will not be
standing still. In fact we will be altering what it means to be
human, and in some very dramatic ways.
Because humans often lack a language for the technologi-
cal future I have created a portmanteau phrase prevent-ex-
tend to describe a new form of medicine that will emerge
over the next twenty-ve years. Instead of attempting to
38 The World in 2030
provide cures for existing disease and ailments, the next medi-
cal revolution will produce a new discipline in the rich world
that will focus on personalised medicine that will prevent
illness and increase human longevity very dramatically.
The human genome was rst sequenced
68
in 2001 and
this provided pharmaceutical companies, medical researchers
and academics with a map of what computer scientists would
call human source code. In other words, the sequencing laid
bare all the component genes that go to make up a human
being. The problem is that we are only now beginning to
identify which genes do what in human biology and, as
researchers are discovering, how combinations of seemingly
separate genes work together to cause a particular effect.
Although a daunting task, considerable progress in gene
identication is being made. Biologists at Harvard recently
identied the gene responsible for triggering tanning
69
when
skin is exposed to ultraviolet light. It turns out to be a well-
known tumour suppressor called p53, often dubbed the
guardian of the genome.
Such knowledge may be put to use in both trivial and
critical applications. A tanning lotion may one day be
produced which turns on the p53 gene to produce a natural
tan within the skin without the user having to be exposed to
the harmful effects of ultra-violet radiation from the sun. A
more serious use might be to stimulate the bodys p53 genes
to attack skin cancer.
As New Scientist reported in July 2007:
The World in 2030 39
Its not quite the elixir of life, but researchers may have
found a way of keeping us younger for longer. In mice
at least, increasing the production of two proteins
called p53 and Arf enabled more of the animals to sur-
vive to old age while showing fewer signs of ageing.
Since its discovery in 1979, p53 has been a key thera-
peutic target for cancer research. When activated, it
encourages damaged cancer cells to commit suicide
a process called apoptosis.
70
News of new gene identication now seems to increase daily.
Key genes for ghting HIV-Aids
71
have been identied as
has a gene that causes a particularly severe form of catatonic
schizophrenia.
72
Researchers led by University of Cincinnati
scientists have located a narrow region of genes that can
sharply increase a persons risk of developing lung cancer
73

one of the worlds worst killers and researchers in
Montreal recently discovered a gene that seems to inhibit
memory retention
74
(which, one day, may lead to a treatment
for Alzheimers disease).
Other disease-related genes identied include those for
motor neuron disease, Type 2 diabetes, a gene that appears
to inhibit breast cancer, one that causes stomach cancer, a
gene that causes deafness and many more. We are starting to
understand the buildings blocks of human biology.
Over the next few years the master map of the human
gene pool will be completed to a large extent and, as
computer power rapidly increases, it will become possible
to sequence the genomic map of each individual patient
40 The World in 2030
(at least, of those patients lucky enough to be living in the
developed world).
In Extreme Future, James Canton describes the coming
medical revolution in the following way:
Speculation about disease and treatment will give way
to a more precise, predictive and health-enhancing
type of medicine: Longevity Medicine. Medicine that
has, at its core, an ability to peer into the genomic
map of a specic individual, from birth to death.
Doctors will have an unparalleled diagnostic tool: a
persons own DNA. The next stage will include engi-
neered disease prevention, health promotion and life
extension.
75
In addition to such a powerful approach to diagnostics,
gene therapy
76
will harness the power of gene identication
to produce new drugs and treatments many times more
effective than present therapies.
Stem cell research
77
is another exciting new development
that promises to revolutionise medicine. A stem cell is a
basic embryonic human cell which has the ability to grow
into almost any kind of cell. A number of stem cell therapies
already exist, particularly bone marrow transplants
78
that are
used to treat leukaemia.
79
In the future, medical researchers
anticipate being able to use technologies derived from stem
cell research to treat a wider variety of diseases including forms
of cancer,
80
Parkinsons disease,
81
spinal cord injuries,
82
and
muscle
83
damage, amongst a number of other impairments
and conditions.
The World in 2030 41
In the near future, stem cell medicine even promises to
grow new bone and tissue for human use that is based on
the patients own DNA. There is good reason to believe
that stem cells may allow us to repair and re-grow damaged
organs
84
and, eventually, to grow replacement organs which
would be at no risk of rejection from our immune systems.
Replacement human bladders
85
have already been grown
and transplanted into humans using stem cell techniques.
Recently heart tissue was grown from stem cells
86
suggesting
that within ve years whole replacement hearts could be
grown and scientists have recently succeeded in producing
pancreatic cells
87
from stem cells that produce insulin, holding
out the hope that diabetes might one day be curable by the
growth of a new pancreas. By 2030 such organ regeneration
will be routine and almost all other organs will also be grown
from stem cells. We will have our back-up parts.
From this discussion of personal DNA mapping, gene
therapy drugs and stem cell research you will begin to see
why I have contracted and combined the words preventive
and longevity to produce my new phrase, prevent-extend.
Writing in 2006, James Canton also observed:
In the decades to come, medicine will be revolution-
ized. The convergence of pharma, biotech, and na-
notech industries will form the biggest global mar-
ketplace with one underlying theme: life extension
for sale.
Botox today will lead to gene-replacement therapy
tomorrow. Face-lifts today, nano-engineering stem
42 The World in 2030
cells for babylike, wrinkle-free skin tomorrow. Even
memories will be for sale, with superagility and en-
hanced intelligence thrown in for good measure.
88
Well, leaving aside Dr. Cantons focus on the commercial
bonanza that may derive from the new medical revolution
(a perspective all too understandable given the USAs
ultra-capitalist approach to social healthcare), I agree with
his conclusions and I would add that plastics will play an
increasingly large part in healthcare provision over the next
twenty-ve years. It seems to me that within the period
covered by this report, those of us in the rich world will
be immeasurably healthier and will live far longer than we
currently anticipate.
It is even possible that a child born in the year 2030
may have the option of extending his or her healthy and
youthful life almost indenitely.
The World in 2030 43
Section One
Accelerating, Exponential
Technology Development
Consulting Referee:
Professor Allison Druin,
89

Director, Human-Computer Interaction Laboratory,
University of Maryland, USA
The wealth of the developed world has been generated
largely by the invention and application of increasingly
sophisticated technology. It is for this reason that I cover this
subject rst; technology development will have a signicant
impact on all of the other subjects discussed in this report.
In a paper called Technological Revolutions: Ethics
and Policy In The Dark, Dr Nick Bostrom
90
, Director of
the Future of Humanity Institute, the Faculty of Philosophy
at Oxford University, makes clear technologys role in our
modern society:
Technological change is in large part responsible for
the evolution of such basic parameters of the human
condition as the size of the world population, life
expectancy, education levels, material standards of
living, the nature of work, communication, health
care, war, and the effects of human activities on the
natural environment. Other aspects of society and
our individual lives are also inuenced by techno-
logy in many direct and indirect ways, including
governance, entertainment, human relationships,
and our views on morality, cosmology, and human
nature. One does not have to embrace any strong
form of technological determinism or be a historical
46 The World in 2030
materialist to acknowledge that technological capabi-
lity through its complex interactions with indivi-
duals, institutions, cultures, and the environment is
a key determinant of the ground rules within which
the game of human civilization is played out at any
given point in time.
91

In the previous section The Backdrop to 2030 I quoted the
American futurist Ray Kurzweils observation that the rate of
technological development is exponential and that even this
rate is itself speeding up exponentially. Other futurists agree
and some go so far as to suggest that accelerating technological
change produces accelerating change in society itself.
Rolf Jensen
92
of the Copenhagen Institute for Future
Studies
93
describes this in his 1999 book The Dream
Society:
The pace of development from one societal type to an-
other is accelerating. The agricultural society originated
10,000 years ago, the industrial society between 200
and 100 years ago, the information-based society 20
years ago. Who knows how many more years the logic
and economics of the Information Society will last?
94

And Alvin Tofer,
95
the world-famous American futurist whose
work initially inspired me to go into the eld, put it even more
bluntly in his best-selling 1970 book, Future Shock:
Western society for the past 300 years has been caught
up in a re storm of change. This storm, far from
abating, now appears to be gathering in force.
96
The World in 2030 47
I agree with these views about constant increase in the velocity
of development, both technological and social, and it is for
this reason that I have coupled such seemingly tautologous
terms as accelerating and exponential in my heading for
this section.
But exponential is an easy concept to understand in
theory (a doubling every so often usually over a set, regularly
recurring period) but it is hard to appreciate fully how powerful
exponential effects are. When a small number doubles the
change is almost unnoticeable; when a large number doubles
the effect is overwhelming. We are now moving into a period
when the effects of exponential technological development
will be very noticeable indeed.
Ray Kurzweil also makes the apparently astonishing claim
that such exponential development is a natural part of human
evolution. In his 2005 book The Singularity Is Near he writes:
The future is widely misunderstood. Our forebears
expected it to be pretty much like their present, which
had been pretty much like their past. Exponential
trends did exist one thousand years ago, but they
were at that very early stage in which they were so
at and so slow that they looked like no trend at all.
As a result, observers expectation of an unchanged
future was fullled. Today, we anticipate continuous
technological progress and the social repercussions
that follow. But the future will be far more surprising
than most people realise, because few observers have
truly internalised the implications of the fact that the
rate of change itself is accelerating.
48 The World in 2030
Most long-range forecasts of what is technically feasi-
ble in future time periods dramatically underestimate
the power of future developments because they are
based on what I call the intuitive linear view of his-
tory rather than the historical exponential view.
97
Kurzweil is a man whose views should be taken seriously.
As well as being a noted futurist
98
and best-selling author
he is an inventor and engineer, recipient of 12 honorary
doctorates, the Lemelson-MIT Prize and the US National
Medal of Technology. He was the principal developer of the
rst omni-font optical character recognition, the rst print-
to-speech reading machine for the blind, the rst CCD at-
bed scanner and the rst text-to-speech synthesiser.
His suggestion that exponential technology development
is a natural evolutionary trait that has, until recently, been
masked from view by slow progress during its early phase,
appears to be borne out by an examination of the history of
technological progress.
The agricultural revolution began about 12,000 years ago
but it took another 6,000 years before humans developed
the three virtual technologies that have shaped our modern
world; alphabetic writing, mathematics and the invention
of money. (When I describe these technologies as virtual I
use the word in its original meaning, not in the computing
sense of virtual reality. The English word virtual derives
its etymology from the Latin word virtualis, which implies
something which has an essence or an effect without
necessarily having a physical existence.)
The World in 2030 49
The development of physical technologies was even
slower in early history. Humankind didnt discover how to
produce iron for another 4,000 years (approximately 3,000
BCE, at about the same time as our species learned how to
harness wind power for sailing).
The (relatively) stable period of Greek and Roman
civilisation ushered in many new military and domestic
technologies but, following the collapse of Rome, there
followed the Dark Ages almost 800 years of conict,
pestilence and plague that created a stasis which prevented
the invention of any signicant new technologies (at least,
in Europe).
The ramping up of exponential technological
development which has led to todays (seemingly) frenetic
pace of innovation began in the 15th century with the
European invention of printing with moveable type. This
allowed the knowledge learned by each generation to be
stored, replicated inexpensively, distributed and forwarded
for the benet of future generations and it triggered the
Renaissance.
Now, as the young rst began to stand on the shoulders
of giants, the speed of technological development started
to gather pace and it is possible in hindsight to discern its
exponential nature (an acceleration fuelled by faster and
richer information ows the key driver of all accelerating
technological development).
In the 16
th
and 17
th
centuries the science of navigation
developed alongside the measurement of time and the
50 The World in 2030
shipbuilding technology necessary to build galleons and
warships. Telescopes were invented to gaze into the heavens,
anatomists peered inside the human body and natural
philosophers pondered the physical laws of the universe.
By the time civilisation reached the 18
th
century, scientic
discovery and technological development were proceeding at
such a pace that it triggered the industrial revolution that was
to change western society for ever. Workers left rural areas for
cities and began to create our modern way of life. Today cities
dominate our economies, our nations and our way of life.
(Eckard Foltin, resident futurist at Bayer Materials Science
in Germany, has postulated in a report called A Picture
Of Tomorrow
99
that by 2020 there may either be a strong
trend towards ever larger and more dominant megacities or
a technological elite will emerge which will polarise society
between the extremely wealthy and the rural poor.)
In the 19
th
century, technological invention in the sense
we understand the phrase today began to shape history
and drive progress. The harnessing of electricity and the
subsequent development of the telegraph, the telephone,
railroads, the automobile and radio laid the foundations for
the most recent century of technological innovation (and
technology-mediated war). Information and knowledge
ows within society became ever faster.
And here, considering the momentous developments of
the Victorian Age, we rst notice a difculty that inhibits
our ability to think meaningfully about the future: when
developments come thick and fast we lack a language with
which to describe our technological future. And, I suggest,
The World in 2030 51
where there is no language, there can be no meaningful
thought.
By denition the invention of new technologies produces
actions and capabilities for which we have not yet invented
words and for which we do not have concepts. We struggle to
describe the capabilities of new technology by shoe-horning
existing words and concepts together.
For example, when the projector was rst invented it was
called a magic lantern and the railway locomotive was an
iron horse. The automobile was a horseless carriage and
the radio was a wireless. A refrigerator was an ice box and
an aeroplane was a ying machine you get my point.
But even though society lacked the language with which
to think about and describe new capabilities, technological
development continued on its ever quickening exponential
curve through the 20
th
century delivering automobiles,
television, computers, jet travel, space exploration, plastics,
high performance polymers and composites, computer
networks, the internet and mobile phones to mention just a
few 20
th
century innovations.
The American futurist John Naisbitt explores the problems
that such accelerating development brings to society in his
2006 publication, Mind Set! Reset Your Thinking And See
The Future:
The advances of technology have always resulted in
social change. The discovery of re led to warmth,
better food, and the beginning of real community.
52 The World in 2030
The wheel, electricity, and the automobile all dra-
matically changed our social arrangements. The dif-
ference today is that the accelerated rate of techno-
logical change has been so great that the social ac-
commodation to new technology has lagged further
and further behind. The evolution of technology is
now running ahead of cultural evolution, and the
gap is increasing.
100
And in the gap between technological evolution and
cultural evolution that John Naisbitt describes is a no-
mans land in which we lack even the language to describe
the new technologies and the new concepts they bring to
our lives.
A good example of our paucity of language for describing
new technology is the term mobile phone. Nobody has a
mobile phone which is just a phone any more. All popular
models (made mostly of plastics) store information in a
database, many models have cameras built in, some are able
to play music, others offer GPS tracking systems and one
model is also a magic lantern.
101
The phrase mobile phone will probably come to seem
as quaint as horseless carriage once a new, more accurate
and all-embracing term for this universal network device
gains widespread acceptance.
But whether or not we have got the words with which to
describe new technologies and their potential (what they can
do and the social, economic and political repercussions they
will bring), new inventions, concepts and techniques are
The World in 2030 53
ooding out of the worlds laboratories and development
centres at an ever increasing pace.
And it is for this reason that I open the main part of
this report with a discussion about the type of technologies
that may emerge between now and 2030 (and because the
implications of this exponential technology development
are so extreme). As I mentioned in my Backdrop section,
new technology is the joker in the pack of cards that will
shape our future. It has the greatest potential to affect
dramatically all of the other key drivers of change that I
have identied except, alas, the continuing explosion in
the worlds birthrate.
New technologies likely to be developed between now
and the year 2030 may even have the potential to offer
partial solutions to problems such as climate change and the
looming energy decit. For example in May 2007 the San
Francisco Chronicle reported:
Scientists are eyeing the jet stream, an energy source
that rages night and day, 365 days a year, just a few
miles above our heads. If they can tap into its erce
winds, the worlds entire electrical needs could be
met, they say.
Dozens of researchers in California and around the
world believe huge kite-like wind-power generators
could be the solution. As bizarre as that might seem,
respected experts say the idea is sound enough to jus-
tify further investigation.
102

54 The World in 2030
And in July 2007 New Scientist reported on plans to
counteract the effect of global warming by blocking some of
the suns rays from reaching the planet:
Basically the idea is to apply sunscreen to the whole
planet. Its controversial, but recent studies suggest
there are ways to deect just enough of the sunlight
reaching the Earths surface to counteract the warm-
ing produced by the greenhouse effect. Global cli-
mate models show that blocking just 1.8 per cent of
the incident energy in the suns rays would cancel out
the warming effects produced by a doubling of green-
house gases in the atmosphere. That could be crucial,
because even the most stringent emissions-control
measures being proposed would leave us with a dou-
bling of carbon dioxide by the end of this century,
and that would last for at least a century more.
103
Whether or not new technologies will play a role in mitigating
climate change, new technologies and techniques seem almost
certain to radically enhance human health and longevity
and, setting aside potential, unpredictable catastrophes such
as global epidemics, natural disasters or massive nuclear war,
new technological developments (coupled with globalisation)
seem certain to drive robust economic growth all around the
world. To put it simply, machines are now generating value
and wealth for our societies and they will generate more and
more wealth as they become rapidly smarter.
Any dissertation on the potential benets of technological
progress always risks the author being accused of hubris,
techno-prolepticism and an overly optimistic attitude to the
The World in 2030 55
future. This is not my standpoint and while many analysts
study technologies in isolation, I believe that it is important
to see them in their social and human contexts. Technology
is no panacea, as we shall see in the later sections of this
report that deal with Climate Change and the Environment
and The Future of Energy.
However, I have been certain for some decades that in
creating intelligent machines the human race is in the early
stages of creating a successor to or companion species for
human beings. Many other commentators have reached the
same conclusion. Writing in the New Scientist magazine
Dr James Hughes,
104
Executive Director of The Institute
for Ethics and Emerging Technologies
105
in Connecticut,
observed:
It seems plausible that with technology we can, in
the fairly near future, create (or become) creatures
who surpass humans in every intellectual and crea-
tive dimension. Events beyond this eventcall it the
Technological Singularityare as unimaginable to us
as opera is to a atworm.
The preceding sentence, almost by denition, makes
long-term thinking an impractical thing in a Singu-
larity future.
106

We are, however, able to project a likely pathway towards
the point of disjuncture in human evolution that is being
called The Singularity, even though along the way the ever
increasing rate of technological development will produce
wrenching and continuous change in all of our lives.
56 The World in 2030
We dont have any option but to embrace change, and
very rapid change, in the 21
st
century and the only successful
antidote to the painful symptoms of change that I have
discovered is continuous, life-long learning. Keeping up to
date is vital to weather the storms produced by high-speed,
violent change. As Louis Pasteur remarked: Change favours
the prepared mind.
Rolf Jensen of the Copenhagen Institute for Future
Studies describes it very simply in The Dream Society:
The past is receding from us at a dizzying speed. The
future is heading toward us with increasing velocity.
You might say that the future is drawing closer it is
almost becoming part of the present.
107
At the root of almost all of this change is the computer
these days specically the microprocessor and its associated
architectures which until a few years ago was doubling in
power and speed every two years but which now appears to
be developing even faster.
Moores Law
The most important of all of mankinds inventions will
turn out to be the computer and, by extension, computer
networks, wired and, increasingly, wireless. As the computer
is a universal tool it is of crucial importance to the future of
science, medicine, security, business, education and industrial
activity. The most dramatic technological change in society is
The World in 2030 57
driven by advances in computer power and miniaturisation
for example in drug development, mobile phones and
cellular networks, the internet, nanotechnology and brain
scanners. In fact, almost all technological development is
now wholly dependent on the computer (which itself is
wholly dependent on plastic components).
In April 1965 Gordon Moore,
108
one of the two founders
of the chip maker Intel, saw an article of his published in the
American publication Electronics Magazine. He wrote:
The complexity for minimum component costs has
increased at a rate of roughly a factor of two per
year... Certainly over the short term this rate can be
expected to continue, if not to increase. Over the
longer term, the rate of increase is a bit more uncer-
tain, although there is no reason to believe it will
not remain nearly constant for at least 10 years. That
means by 1975, the number of components per in-
tegrated circuit for minimum cost will be 65,000. I
believe that such a large circuit can be built on a sin-
gle wafer.
109
This prediction was proved correct and the phenomenon
of computer power continuing to double every two years
became so startling that the visionary observation came to
be honoured as Moores Law.
110
Today, even though Moores Law is often evoked
(usually inaccurately) to describe the high speed of
microprocessor and computer development, the concept
has become something of a self-fullling prediction (more
58 The World in 2030
lore than law) and has become a bench-mark to which
the computer industry works.
Tellingly though, Moores law has contracted sharply and
microprocessor speeds and densities have for many years been
increasing much faster than Gordon Moore predicted in 1965.
Dr. Nick Bostrom observed in a 1997 paper on super-
intelligent machines:
Moores law states that processor speed doubles every
eighteen months. The doubling time used to be two
years, but that changed about fteen years ago. The
most recent data points indicate a doubling time as
short as twelve months. This would mean that there
will be a thousand-fold increase in computational
power in ten years. Moores law is what chip manu-
facturers rely on when they decide what sort of chip
to develop in order to remain competitive.
111
Also in 1997 noted American futurists Marvin Cetron
112
and
Owen Davis
113
wrote in their best-selling book Probable
Tomorrows:
If the most optimistic computer scientists are cor-
rect, tomorrows shirt pocket computer could hold
a billion bytes (a gigabyte) in its working memory
(RAM) and run at 50 million times the speed of
todays fastest personal computers.
114
Well, that ten year old prediction was heading in the right
direction; my shirt pocket iPod offers 80 gigabytes rather
The World in 2030 59
than a single gigabyte of storage but shirt-pocket processing
power has not yet multiplied by a factor of 50 million.
So where precisely are we ten years later, and where will
we be in terms of processor speed and power in the year
2030?
The answer is that this simplistic question about
microprocessor power is no longer adequate or appropriate
to judge computer performance.
Computer power no longer relies on the speed of a single
processor. Today, computing is a networked activity, both
within microprocessor architecture and between independent
computers. Microprocessors now have multiple cores (i.e.
processing engines) and many multi-core processors are
harnessed together in a cluster or grid of computer power
which can be local or truly global.
An idea of how powerful multi-core processors are
becoming may be gleaned from the following story which
appeared in the magazine MIT Technology Review in
February 2007:
Last week, Intel announced a research project that
made geeks jump with glee: the rst programmable
terascale supercomputer on a chip.
The company demonstrated a single chip with 80
cores, or processors, and showed that these cores
could be programmed to crunch numbers at the rate
of a trillion operations per second, a measure known
60 The World in 2030
as a teraop. The chip is about the size of a large
postage stamp, but it has the same calculation speed
as a supercomputer that, in 1996, took up about
2,000 square feet and drew about 1,000 times more
power.
115

This news from Intel, still an industry leader after many
decades, suggests that Dr. Nick Bostroms 1997 prediction
about the increase in computer power that would occur be-
tween the years 1997-2007 is at least accurate and has prob-
ably been exceeded. But the important point to note in the
extract from the MIT Technology Review story is that dra-
matic miniaturisation occurred in the chip design along with
a signicant reduction in energy used during operations.
In fact, the amount of energy now demanded by multi-
core microprocessors has become a signicant issue. The
Economist observed in March 2007:
The rst (energy conservation method) is new multi-
core processor chips, in which performance is im-
proved not by increasing clock speed, but by build-
ing several processing engines, or cores, into each
chipa far more energy-efcient approach. AMD,
Intel and Sun now boast of their chips performance
per watt (i.e. work done for each unit of energy),
rather than simply emphasising raw performance.
Dual-core chips are commonplace, and quad-core
chips are spreading too. The switch from dual-core
to quad-core over the past 18 months increased per-
formance per watt by a factor of 4.5, says Stephen
Smith of Intel.
116
The World in 2030 61
It is possible that chip developers may hit some sort of physi-
cal barrier in the next quarter of a century as they struggle to
make their processors ever faster and ever smaller. They are
already working at close to nano-scale
117
and making great use
of plastics for insulation, even for microprocessor manufac-
ture.
118
However, it is still possible that difculties of heat dissi-
pation, input and output connects, the barrier of the speed of
light itself or problems with the materials in use, may bring an
end to the super-charged Moores law speed of development.
For example, the following comes from a ComputerWorld
article published in March 2007:
Makers of memory chips are looking ahead to a day,
not too far off, when technology based on silicon
bumps up against the laws of physics and memory
cant be made any smaller. That development will
have implications for gadgets like MP3 players and
digital cameras.
These concerns have major memory makers pouring
hundreds of millions of dollars into perfecting the
next big technology.
The possible alternatives sound like science ction:
M-RAM, P-RAM, molecular memory and carbon
nanotubes.
119
Yet in 1982 I was writing similar qualications about future chip
development as I surveyed what then seemed the breathless
pace of microprocessor development. Back then scientists
were suggesting that a move to super-cooled computing
62 The World in 2030
would be required for development to continue at its present
pace (using Josephson Junctions
120
) and many were suggesting
that the chip substrate silicon would have to be replaced with
more exotic materials such as gallium arsenate.
121

Today chip designers are contemplating the move to
nano-scale design, new substrates (including plastics) and
even quantum-level computing. According to the academic
journal Nature, one new substrate with promise for future
processor designs is graphene:
The latest contender to succeed silicons throne is
graphene. It has been used to make a truly tiny tran-
sistor that works at room temperature, offering hope
for making faster, smaller electronics devices once
silicon reaches its limits (around 2020).
Graphene is a two-dimensional form of carbon, dis-
covered just three years ago. It is very thin just one
atom thick and highly conductive with minimal
resistance, which has sent physicists and materials
scientists into a frenzy to nd applications that ex-
ploit these properties.
122
Polymers (plastics) also play a role in allowing chip developers
to design and fabricate at nano-scale. In May 2007 Hewlett-
Packard made an important announcement:
Hewlett-Packard and Nanolithosolutions say they
have a machine that will let semiconductor manufac-
turers produce chips sporting wires measuring a few
atoms wide.
The World in 2030 63
And the device takes only a few minutes to install.
The machine is a system for imprint lithography. Im-
print lithography sounds like what it is: a mold with
an intricate pattern is pressed into a substrate, which
creates a pattern. The grooves and channels created in
the substrate are then lled with metal to make wires.
What makes imprint lithography different from a
wafe iron or a rubber stamp are the dimensions. The
HP-Nanolitho system is capable of creating grooves
that will measure as small as 15 nanometers, smaller
than the width of wires in todays chip. The mold, or
module, does not make grooves in silicon, but in a
thin layer of polymer on top of the silicon.
123

I am of the opinion that no insurmountable physical barrier
to ever accelerating microprocessor development lies ahead
in the foreseeable future. It is clear that a move to nano-
scale fabrication will be needed and new materials may very
well be required (and here plastics will play a signicant
role) but I have no doubt that in a quarter of a centurys
time commentators will still be wondering whether there
is any end in sight for the exponentially accelerating
development of microprocessors (or will they then be called
nanoprocessors?).
VI
VI
In August 2007 IBMs Zurich Research Lab demonstrated a molecular switch that could replace cur-
rent silicon-based chip technology with processors so small that a supercomputer could t on a chip
the size of a speck of dust. IBM also claims its atomic-scale demonstration promises to pack up to
1,000 times as much information on a hard disk than current technologies. Such hard disks could
store 30,000 full-length movies on a device the size of an iPod.
64 The World in 2030
In the end, because the exponential rate of technology
development is, itself, increasing exponentially it is almost
impossible to estimate precisely how much more powerful
and more capable the computers of 2030 will be.
There are, however, some well-qualied experts prepared
to stick their necks out and make rm predictions about the
likely speed and power of computers and their networks in
the year 2030. Dr. Paul D. Tinari,
124
Director of the Pacic
Institute for Advanced Study (and formerly a Professor of
Future Studies at San Francisco University) writes:
According to Moores Law, computer power doubles
every 18 months, meaning that computers will be
about 500,000 times more powerful by 2030. Fur-
thermore, according to Nielsens Law of Internet
bandwidth,
125
connectivity to the home grows by 50
per cent per year; therefore by 2030, people will have
about 100,000 times more bandwidth than today. By
that year, chances are you will own a computer that
runs at 2.5 PHz CPU speed, has half of a petabyte
(a thousand terabytes) of memory, one quarter of an
exabyte (a billion gigabytes) of hard disk-equivalent
storage, and will connect to the Internet with a band-
width of an eighth of a terabit (a trillion binary dig-
its) per second.
126
So, Dr. Tinari suggests that the computers of 2030 will be
half-a-million times more powerful than todays machines.
My view, however, is that he has underestimated. His
projections seem to ignore the evidence that the rate of
exponential change is itself speeding up exponentially and
The World in 2030 65
he also has done his calculations from a starting assumption
that Moores law is still holding at eighteen months when
there is considerable evidence that it is currently running at
twelve months or even less.
And, in an interview given to [Link] Ray
Kurzweil laid out his own prediction for computing speeds
in 2030:
By 2030, a thousand dollars of computation will be
about a thousand times more powerful than a hu-
man brain. Keep in mind also that computers will
not be organized as discrete objects as they are today.
There will be a web of computing deeply integrated
into the environment, our bodies and brains.
127
Given these two very different methods of predicting the
future speeds of computers let me conclude this section by
adding that my view is that the networked computers of
2030 will be at least several million times more powerful
than todays machines - a prediction, which if correct, will
carry vast implications for the future of humankind.
The Always On, Always Connected Society
I suggested earlier that we often lack a language with which to
describe a new technology or a concept. We are just entering
a startling period in which the internet, the Web, cellular
telephony, television, radio and wireless communication will
all merge to become a new global communications medium.
66 The World in 2030
This new medium (and what a poor, underpowered term
that word is) is one in which people and things will be always
on, always connected, everyone to everyone, everything to
everything, always and everywhere.
That last long-winded and very wordy sentence was
necessary because we dont yet have a word or a phrase to
describe such a pervasively connected electronic rmament.
But even though we are just starting to build this new
habitat for humankind, and we lack the language necessary
to describe it, the technology will be in place, fully mature
and available at very low cost in all countries of the world
(and in space and on at least one other planet) by the year
2030.
Everybody is familiar with the internet and its graphical
interface, the World Wide Web. Everybody is familiar with
cellular phones, television and radio. The new components
in this merged wireless super-web are minute intelligent
machines that will communicate with each other wirelessly.
At its simplest, these machines may be no more than plastic
Radio Frequency Identication Tags (RFID tags
128
) that send
out self-identifying signals and data when interrogated by a
nearby wireless scanner. On a more complex level, machine
sensors will be embedded in bridges and other vital structures
to transmit data about stress loading and construction
integrity. Machines transmitting wireless signals will travel
our bodies sending out information about our physical
condition and, to pick just one further example, remen
in burning buildings will all wear wireless sensors that send
back their position and details of the conditions they are
encountering.
The World in 2030 67
Soon, almost everything in the world will become
attached to this enlarged internet for which we do not yet
have a name. All sorts of technologies will be employed
from traditional internet protocol communications to
cellular radio signals, stand-alone wireless communications
and satellite transmissions. In the end all of these discrete
technologies will become one and the same thing: a global
communications mesh in which everything from local
street lights to a jet plane travelling at 30,000 feet will be
connected.
The signs of the emergence of this new medium are
already clear to be seen now. In April 2007 a contributor to
The Economist wrote:
Gizmos and gadgets will talk to other devices and
be serviced and upgraded from afar. Sensors on
buildings and bridges will run them efciently and
ensure they are safe. Wireless systems on farmland
will measure temperature and humidity and control
irrigation systems. Tags will certify the origins and
distribution of food and the authenticity of medi-
cines. Tiny chips on or in peoples bodies will send
vital signs to clinics to help keep them healthy.
Imagine how wireless communications could change
motoring. Carmakers are starting to monitor vehicles
so that they know when to replace parts before they
fail, based on changes in vibration or temperature.
If there is a crash, wireless chips could tell the emer-
gency services where to come, what has happened
and if anyone is hurt. Trafc information can be
68 The World in 2030
instantaneous and perfectly accurate. They adminis-
ter tolls based on precise routes. One American rm
leases cars to people with bad credit who cannot get
a loan, knowing that if payments are missed it can
block the ignition and nd the car to repossess it.
British insurers offer policies with premiums based
on precisely when and where a person drives.
129
Dr David Clark,
130
a computer scientist at the Massachusetts
Institute of Technology who helped develop the internet,
believes that in fteen or twenty years time the network
will need to accommodate a trillion devices, most of
them wireless.
Even though we are only at the beginning of the
development of what some people have called the
internet of things, novel and supremely useful ap-
plications are emerging. Companies like the giant
retailer Wal-Mart
131
are already tracking their in-
ventories with RFID tags and soon shoppers will no
longer need to unload their shopping carts at check-
out tills. The RFID tags on every item will simply
transmit their identities to a scanner and a bill will
be presented to customers (who will pay it by waving
their mobile devices over the scanner) and all of
these enabling devices will be made largely of plastic,
a material that is rapidly becoming smart.
Wireless sensors will make a huge contribution to en-
ergy conservation. If every light xture in a building
contained a small wireless node, people would not
only be able to control the lighting more effectively
The World in 2030 69
but put them to many other uses too. If the nodes
were programmed to serve as online smoke detectors,
they could signal a re as well as show its location.
They could also act as a security system or provide
internet connectivity to other things in the building.
In The Hydrogen Economy Jeremy Rifkin tells us:
In the very near future, sensors attached to every ap-
pliance or machine powered by electricity refrig-
erators, air conditioners, washing machines, security
alarms will provide up-to-the-minute information
on energy prices, as well as on temperature, light and
other environmental conditions, so that factories, of-
ces, homes, neighborhoods and whole communi-
ties can continuously and automatically adjust their
energy requirements to one anothers needs and to
the energy load owing through the system.
132
The Dutch electronics manufacturer Philips plans to introduce
wirelessly controlled lighting systems for commercial
buildings by 2012. And the companys researchers are working
on making networked light ttings capable of monitoring
the objects throughout a building, tracking equipment in
hospitals or preventing theft in ofces.
In the UK the building services rm Rentokil
133
has added
a small plastic sensor and a wireless module to its mousetraps
so that they notify the building staff when a rodent is caught.
This is a big improvement on traps that need to be inspected
regularly. A large building might contain hundreds of them,
and a few are bound to be forgotten.
70 The World in 2030
Since June 2006 thousands of digital mousetraps have
been put in big buildings and venues such as Londons new
Wembley Stadium. The traps communicate with central hubs
that connect to the internet via the mobile network to alert
staff if a creature is caught. The system provides a wealth of
information. The data it collects and analyses on when and
where rodents are caught enable building managers to place
traps more effectively and alert them to a new outbreak.
New examples of machine-to-machine (M2M)
communications applications are being announced almost
every day. In the USA some prisons have already placed
location and identication sensors
134
in plastic bracelets
worn by all of their inmates (and their guards) and
they report signicant reductions in violence as a result of
their use.
By 2030 we will all be tagged but it will be for our
protection, rather than to restrict out movements (and if
you dont like the idea of humans being tagged consider
the fact that your mobile phone negotiates with your
cellular wireless network 800 times every second and your
network always knows where your phone is whenever it is
switched on).
We will all transmit our locations constantly, data about
our bodies vital signs and physiology will be collected and
transmitted to ensure our well being and, if we are taken
ill, help will be summoned automatically. All soldiers on
battleelds will transmit their location, all passengers
on underground railways will transmit their location
(Londoners, remember the plastic Oyster card you carry
The World in 2030 71
is an RFID chip), shop doorways will recognise returning
customers and football fans will carry tickets which identify
which team they are supporting and whereabouts they are
in the stadium. Leaky taps in our buildings will call the
plumber themselves and energy-consuming devices will shut
themselves down when they sense they are not required.
There will be massive privacy issues when we are all
permanently connected, along with our possessions and
the environment around us. New laws will be required to
protect our rights and new ways of enforcing such legislation
will be necessary; but despite these concerns, we are
rushing headlong into a fully connected, always on, always
connected, always and everywhere future.
This permanently connected environment is stimulating
new ways of human interaction as the web itself becomes
more powerful. Recently a slew of new technologies known
under the umbrella term Web 2.0
135
brought signicantly
enhanced levels of functionality to web communication and
processing (and allowed software applications such as word
processing and spreadsheets to be used as an inherent part
of the web rather than as stand-alone software on individual
computers). And, as the web becomes ever more capable,
humans are nding new ways to exploit its potential and
collaborate in new ways.
One of the most interesting of these new developments
and one that will scale up easily as web capability increases
is the emergence of so-called Wiki communities.
136
Named
after the free, user-built online encyclopedia, Wikipedia,
137

Wiki communities use Wikipedia-style collaborative spaces
72 The World in 2030
to brain-storm particular problems, to manage projects and to
develop a pool of social community knowledge (and maybe
even wisdom). One good example of a Wiki community in
action is discussed on a website called Wikinomics:
A wiki is used in the Netherlands to plan wind tur-
bines, to realise a CO
2
cut of 20 to 30 per cent. On
the wiki, extended with a googlemaps plug-in, maps
with proposed wind turbine locations are designed.
The goal of the wikiprocess is to present locations
for 6,000 3MWatt turbines, enough to provide for all
electricity in the Netherlands.
138
This new, emerging wireless rmament (for want of a
better phrase) will be the place where we chat, play, conduct
business, earn money, administer government, learn, fall in
love, have sex, store our memories, remember and honour
the dead, and connect all of our loved ones and friends, our
inanimate objects and ourselves. It is humanitys future.
This is not a new idea to me. Twenty-ve years ago I
wrote The On-Line Handbook
139
in which I said:
The linking of computers around the world is going
to have far-reaching effects, and the spread of knowl-
edge, the interchange of ideas and the dissemination
of information are going to produce a revolution in
our society.
The moment you go on-line you feel as
though the revolution has sprung down the
telephone line and invaded your own room.
The World in 2030 73
You will know what the wired world is like and you
will begin to understand the implications! You be-
come a pioneer of the information age, experiencing
with awe the power of linked computers which the
next generation will take for granted.
140
And by 2030 the experience of using this super combined
web will also be far more rich and multi-sensory than it is
today, but it will be totally invisible and wholly pervasive.
Internet access, in the absence of future language, will be
provided by lamp posts, windows, in trains, on planes, by
buildings and by church steeples. It will be the internet
of the air in which we, our children, our pets and trillions
of inanimate objects (and some very intelligent machines)
commune every second of the day.
The high speed super-web of 2030 will deliver 3D
holographic images of sports events, dramas, games and sex
simulations. The super-web will be able to provide tactile
simulations, odours and tastes. The multi-sensory super-web
will create virtual experiences that will seem so real they
are almost indistinguishable from the real thing (and as we
sense the real thing solely though our own human sensory
apparatus, who is to argue which is the more real?).
In time, perhaps before 2030, our minds will be directly
attached to the super-web by a neural interface and, with a
thought, we will be able to access the worlds entire stock of
information, communication, learning, entertainment and
leisure activities in full sensory glory. It sounds like science
ction, but by 2030 some people will be enjoying such
astonishing access.
74 The World in 2030
Machine Super-Intelligence
(Strong Articial Intelligence)
If some of the above has left you breathless, I am afraid that
there are more breathtaking ideas to come in this survey of
likely (or almost certain) technological development in the
next twenty-ve years. The rst of these is super-intelligent
machines or, to use plain language, machines that are as
clever as you or me.
The science of trying to develop super-intelligent
machines used to be called Articial Intelligence (AI) and,
in the early 1980s, there was intense debate about how soon
AI could be developed and how soon really clever computers
would be helping surgeons, controlling trafc ows, running
air trafc control and generally making human life better
and safer.
But to the outside world the efforts of the AI community
appeared to fail and the quest to develop Articial Intelligence
seemed to dissipate and fade away. In reality, it did no such
thing; it just developed in a way that was unexpected. Our
anthropomorphic impulses led us to assume that a human-
like robot would spring from the articial laboratories of the
1980s ready to become our companion. But twenty years
ago we hadnt even begun to understand what a human was
either in terms of brain function or physiology. Our chances
of building a copy of ourselves at that time were zero.
However, sophisticated machine intelligence (albeit not
very human seeming) has been developed and deployed out
The World in 2030 75
of the continuing research into what was once called articial
intelligence. Software systems now run and control (with
human oversight) jets in ight, air trafc control systems,
human surgery and military weapons systems. These AI
systems are robust and extremely useful and our modern
world couldnt run without them.
Professor Marvin Minsky
141
of the Massachusetts
Institute of Technology in Boston, USA, is widely regarded
as the father of articial intelligence. Speaking to Discover
magazine in 2007 he explained:
The history of AI is sort of funny because the rst
real accomplishments were beautiful things, like a
machine that could do proofs in logic or do well
in a calculus course. But then we started to try to
make machines that could answer questions about
the simple kinds of stories that are in a rst-grade
reader book. Theres no machine today that can do
that. So AI researchers looked primarily at problems
that people called hard, like playing chess, but they
didnt get very far on problems people found easy.
Its a sort of backwards evolution. I expect with our
commonsense reasoning systems well start to make
progress pretty soon if we can get funding for it. One
problem is people are very skeptical about this kind
of work.
142
Asked about his latest 2007 book The Emotion Machine
Minsky went on to describe the sort of articial intelligence
machine he would like to build today:
76 The World in 2030
The book is actually a plan for how to build a machine.
Id like to be able to hire a team of programmers to cre-
ate the Emotion Machine architecture thats described
in the booka machine that can switch between all the
different kinds of thinking I discuss. Nobodys ever
built a system that either has or acquires knowledge
about thinking itself, so that it can get better at prob-
lem solving over time. If I could get ve good program-
mers, I think I could build it in three to ve years.
We humans are not the end of evolution, so if we can
make a machine thats as smart as a person, we can
probably also make one thats much smarter. Theres
no point in making just another person. You want to
make one that can do things we cant.
143
But because 1980s AI research was mistakenly considered to
be a failure, current research into developing computers with
human-like intelligence and characteristics and intelligence
is no longer called articial intelligence. The eld of study is
now called super-intelligence or strong AI.
Dr. Nick Bostrom again:
Given that superintelligence will one day be techno-
logically feasible, will people choose to develop it? This
question can pretty condently be answered in the af-
rmative. Associated with every step along the road to
superintelligence are enormous economic payoffs.
The computer industry invests huge sums in the
next generation of hardware and software, and it will
The World in 2030 77
continue doing so as long as there is a competitive
pressure and prots to be made. People want better
computers and smarter software, and they want the
benets these machines can help produce. Better
medical drugs; relief for humans from the need to per-
form boring or dangerous jobs; entertainment there
is no end to the list of consumer-benets. There is
also a strong military motive to develop articial intel-
ligence. And nowhere on our path is there any natural
stopping point where technophobics could plausibly
argue hither but not further.
144
But how will we know when computers of the future become
as intelligent as humans? At this stage it is necessary to explain
the Turing Test. Alan Turing
145
was a British mathematician
who, while studying at Cambridge, published a paper called
On Computable Numbers
146
in 1936. This paper laid the
foundations for modern computer science and explicitly
described a theoretical machine that we would today call a
computer.
During World War II, Alan Turing built the worlds rst
computer to enable the British government to decode Nazi
and Japanese encrypted communications and, in 1950,
he published a paper called Computing Machinery and
Intelligence
147
in which he described a test that could be
used to determine when a computers intelligence came to
equal human intelligence.
Now known as the Turing Test
148
the evaluation method
involves a human talking to a machine (via a keyboard in
Turings original vision) and holding a complex conversation.
78 The World in 2030
When the human in the test is unable to tell whether he or
she is talking to a machine or to another human being, the
machine is said to have passed the Turing Test.
Today we would add many other features to the test such
as emotional responsiveness and humour yet, in essence,
Turings idea remains an ideal evaluation.
So when are we likely to meet computers which approach
human levels of intelligence? This is Ray Kurzweils
prediction:
Once weve succeeded in creating a machine that can
pass the Turing test (around 2029), the succeeding
period will be an era of consolidation in which non-
biological intelligence will make rapid gains.
Once strong AI is achieved, it can readily be ad-
vanced and its powers multiplied, as that is the fun-
damental nature of machine abilities. As one strong
AI immediately begets many strong AIs, the latter
access their own design, understand and improve it,
and thereby very rapidly evolve into a yet more ca-
pable, more intelligent AI, with the cycle repeating
itself indenitely. Each cycle not only creates a more
intelligent AI but takes less time than the cycle be-
fore it, as is the nature of technological evolution (or
any evolutionary process). The premise is that once
strong AI is achieved, it will immediately become a
runaway phenomenon
149
of rapidly escalating super-
intelligence.
150
The World in 2030 79
Those of you who struggle daily with incalcitrant and mind-
numbingly stupid PCs may think Kurzweils prediction of
a machine that could pass the Turing Test by 2029 as ludi-
crous, but I ask you to examine the rapidly changing nature
of Google and other internet search engines. Have you no-
ticed that Google, in particular, seems to become smarter
every day? This is not an accident.
Larry Page,
151
one of the two founders of Google, told an
audience in New York in February 2007:
We have some people at Google who are really try-
ing to build articial intelligence and to do it on
a large scale. Its not as far off as people think.
152

(Theres a video of Larry Page talking further on this
subject here.
153
)
And in May of the same year Google CEO Eric Schmidt
told the Financial Times that the search engine hopes to
provide practical advice to its users about their major life
decisions:
Googles ambition to maximise the personal infor-
mation it holds on users is so great that the search en-
gine envisages a day when it can tell people what jobs
to take and how they might spend their days off.
Eric Schmidt, Googles chief executive, said gather-
ing more personal data was a key way for Google to
expand and the company believes that is the logical
extension of its stated mission to organise the worlds
information.
80 The World in 2030
The goal is to enable Google users to be able to ask
the question such as What shall I do tomorrow?
and What job shall I take?
154
I think Google is no less than an awakening global brain,
such as I imagined in my 2001 novel, Emergence
155
(the
title refers to the phenomenon of consciousness emerging
from within a dense global network). And I dont think
I am being fanciful. Google holds much of the worlds
information in its vast databases and it holds search histories
and the preferences of all the people who have ever used the
service. The knowledge of what the worlds internet-using
population wants, and in what territories of the world, is like
having the ultimate guide to the global Zeitgeist. Couple that
with rapidly developing computer intelligence and it is not
hard to see where the rst signs of human-like intelligence in
a computer system are likely to be encountered.
How will we cope with machines that are as intelligent
or more intelligent than ourselves? Bill Hibbard,
156
Emeritus
Senior Scientist at the Space Science and Engineering Center
in Wisconsin, and the author of Super-intelligent Machines
suggests:
A critical event in the progress of science is immi-
nent. This is the physical explanation of conscious-
ness and demonstration by building a conscious
machine.
We will know it is conscious based on our emotional
connection with it. Shortly after that, we will build
machines much more intelligent than humans,
The World in 2030 81
because intelligent machines will help with their own
science and engineering.
And the knowledge gap that has been shrinking over
the centuries will start to grow. Not in the sense that
scientic knowledge will shrink, but in the sense that
people will have less understanding of their world
because of their intimate relationship with a mind
beyond their comprehension. We will understand
the machines mind about as much as our pets
understand ours. We will ll this knowledge gap
with religion, giving the intelligent machine the role
of god.
157
In his 2007 book Beyond AI: Creating the Conscience
of the Machine, Dr J. Storrs Hall,
158
Research Fellow of
the Institute for Molecular Manufacturing in Palo Alto,
California, describes the abilities of an articial intelligence
of what he calls an epihuman (just above human level) of
intelligence:
My model for what an epihuman AI would be like
is to take the ten smartest people you know, remove
their egos, and duplicate them a hundred times, so
that you have a thousand really bright people willing
to apply themselves all to the same project. Alterna-
tively, simply imagine a very bright person given a
thousand times as long to do any given task. We can
straightforwardly predict, from Moores law, that ten
years after the advent of a learning but not radically
self-improving human-level AI, the same software
running on machinery of the same cost would do
82 The World in 2030
the same human-level tasks a thousand times as fast
as we. It could, for example:
read an average book in one second with full com-
prehension;
take a college course and do all the homework and
research in ten minutes;
write a book, again with ample research, in two or
three hours;
produce the equivalent of a humans lifetime in-
tellectual output, complete with all the learning,
growth, and experience involved, in a couple of
weeks.
159

Perhaps the last word on super-intelligent machines should
go to Irving John Good
160
(one of the British World War II
cryptographers who worked alongside Alan Turing), author
of the 1965 paper, Speculations Concerning the First
Ultraintelligent Machine:
Thus the rst ultraintelligent machine is the last in-
vention that man need ever make.
161
Nanotechnology
The term nanotechnology
162
is simple to dene (the control
of matter on a scale smaller than 1 micrometer, normally
between 1-100 nanometers) but the types of science and
technology being developed at this sub-microscopic level
vary greatly.
The World in 2030 83
This area of research was rst identied by the legendary
physicist Professor Richard P. Feynman
163
in his seminal 1959
lecture entitled Theres Plenty Of Room At the Bottom
164
in
which he proposed that much could be achieved by scientists
who chose to work at the atomic level. But the eld of
nanotechnology only began to develop properly in the mid-
1980s when a graduate PhD student called Eric Drexler
165
wrote
a thesis which went on to become a highly inuential book
called Nanosystems Molecular Machinery Manufacturing and
Computation.
166
Serious scientic research began at that point.
Simple nanotechnology is already being used today
with nano-scale additives being used to make plastics. As
Technology Research News reported in 2003:
Researchers from the University of Groningen in the
Netherlands and the University of Massachusetts at
Amherst have found ways to use electricity to coax
microscopic amounts of plastic to form patterns con-
taining columns and tubes.
The microscopic plastic features are as small as 100
nanometers, which is 50 times smaller than a red
blood cell, and could be used to make electronic and
mechanical devices at that scale. The structures can
be fairly complicated and we have a wide range of
different patterns, said Ullrich Steiner, a professor of
polymer physics at the University of Groningen.
The method could be used for plastic electronics,
light-emitting diodes, solar energy devices, and opti-
cal lters, according to Steiner.
167
84 The World in 2030
Nanotechnology can also be used to provide plastics and
other materials with special properties (e.g. antiseptic, anti-
UV, re-resistant, heat-absorbing, stain resistant and electrical
conducting functions) but the term also encompasses research
into engineering at a molecular level, experimentation that
is expected to lead to truly astonishing developments.
Molecular nanotechnology
168
(MNT) when fully
developed will, theoretically, allow us to construct almost
anything from the atomic level up, including food, water,
computers and even nano-scale robots which will carry
drugs to the precise site at which they are needed in the
human body.
Nano-optimists,
169
including many governments (and
futurists), see nanotechnology delivering environmentally
benign material abundance for the worlds population
by providing universal clean water supplies; atomically
engineered food and crops resulting in greater agricultural
productivity with less labour and land requirements;
nutritionally enhanced interactive smart foods; cheap
and powerful energy generation; clean and highly efcient
manufacturing; radically improved formulation of drugs,
diagnostics and human organ replacement; much greater
information storage and communication capacities;
interactive smart appliances; and increased human
performance through convergent technologies.
Critics of MNT development
170
suggest that
nanotechnology will simply exacerbate problems stemming
from existing socio-economic inequity and the unequal
distribution of power by creating greater inequities between
The World in 2030 85
rich and poor through an inevitable nano-divide (the gap
between those who control the new nanotechnologies
and those whose products, services or labour are displaced
by them); destabilising international relations through
a growing nano arms race and increased potential for
bio-weaponry; providing the tools for ubiquitous
surveillance, with signicant implications for civil liberty;
breaking down the barriers between life and non-life through
nanobiotechnology, and redening even what it means
to be human. Some suggest
171
that nano-scale molecules
could even escape into the environment and self-replicate,
taking over the world as a grey goo
172
which will
consume everything.
Whatever the potential benets and dangers of the
technology almost all futurists and futurologists agree that
nano-scale engineering will become possible in the next few
decades, but few of us can be sure when the products of this
science will begin to emerge.
Ray Kurzweil writes on his website:
Although most nanotech projects today focus on
structural nanotechnology, development of molecu-
lar nanotechnology will surely become a priority
within a few years. Full MNT capability may not be
developed for a decade or longer, but preparation for
it should probably start now.
The economic value and military signicance of
a nanofactory will be immense. Even a primitive
model will be able to convert CAD les to products
86 The World in 2030
in a few hours. Duplicate nanofactories will cost the
same as any other nano-built product. The capital
cost of manufacturing will be negligible by todays
standards, and manufacturing capacity can be dou-
bled in a matter of hours.
173

In The Extreme Future Dr. James Canton sees
nanotechnology potentially offering a similar bonanza:
Nanoscience represents a radical change in material
science, drugs, devices, and manufacturing. Nano-
based products could change everything, reducing
functions down to 100,000 times smaller than a
human hair. Total nanotech investments worldwide
were more than $10 billion in 2005. By 2008, the
nanomarket may grow to more than $32 billion
worldwide. Nanomaterials will drive the near-term
market growth, while nano-devices will dominate fu-
ture growth.
174
The implications of the coming nanotech revolutions are
extreme and by 2030 we will be in the thick of it with
astonishing new applications enriching (and, perhaps,
potentially endangering) our physical world. Nanotech
is one of the more extreme wild cards in the technology
pack and it is possible that some of the problems examined
elsewhere in this report could be completely or partially
solved by the science (e.g. nanotech might provide new
sources of clean energy). In 2003 the late Professor Richard
Smalley
175
of Rice University in Texas a Nobel Laureate
prize winner for his chemistry research delivered a lecture
called Nanotechnology, the S & T Workforce, Energy &
The World in 2030 87
Prosperity. In the lecture he described fourteen ways in
which he thought nanotech will affect society (n.b. most
of these technological developments will rely on plastic for
their construction):
14 Enabling Nanotech Revolutions
1. Photovoltaics a revolution to drop cost by
10 to 100 fold.
2. H
2
(hydrogen) storage a revolution in light-
weight materials for pressure tanks, and/or a
new light weight, easily reversible hydrogen
chemisorption system.
3. Fuel cells a revolution to drop the cost by
nearly 10 to 100 fold.
4. Batteries and super capacitors revolution to
improve by 10-100x for automotive and distrib-
uted generation applications.
5. Photo catalytic reduction of CO
2
to produce a
liquid fuel such as methanol.
6. Direct photo conversion of light + water to
produce H
2
(hydrogen).
7. Super-strong, lightweight materials to drop cost
to LEO, GEO (space orbit paths), and later the
moon by > 100 x, to enable huge but low cost
light harvesting structures in space; and to im-
prove efciency of cars, planes, etc.
8. Nanoelectronics to revolutionize computers,
sensors and devices.
9. High current cables (superconductors, or quan-
tum conductors) with which to rewire the elec-
trical transmission grid, and enable continental,
and even worldwide electrical energy transport;
88 The World in 2030
and also to replace aluminum and copper wires
essentially everywhere particularly in the
windings of electric motors (especially good if
we can eliminate eddy current losses).
10. Thermo chemical catalysts to generate H
2
from
water that works efciently at temperatures
lower than 900 C.
11. CO
2
mineralization schemes that can work on
a vast scale, hopefully starting from basalt and
having no waste streams.
12. Nanoelectronics-based Robotics with AI to
enable construction maintenance of solar
structures in space and on the moon; and to
enable nuclear reactor maintenance and fuel
reprocessing.
13. Nanomaterials/coatings that will vastly lower
the cost of deep drilling, to enable HDR (hot
dry rock) geothermal heat mining.
14. Nanotech lighting to replace incandescent and
uorescent lights.
176
Clearly molecular-level nano-engineering will have the
most profound impact on our future. But however weird
and futuristic molecular nanotech manufacturing may
sound today as we approach 2030 almost everything will be
overshadowed by a rapidly approaching rupture in human
evolution.
The World in 2030 89
The Singularity
In the summer term of 1965, I persuaded my sixth form
school colleagues (16-18 year olds) that we should hold
a debate on the topic, Man Will Transfer His Mind To
Machines. I was the main proposer and supporter of the
motion which I duly lost comprehensively.
Now, over forty years later, we can contemplate a time
when it will be necessary for us not only to consider the moral
and ethical issues of transferring a human mind to a machine
but to consider how we should respond when machine
intelligence becomes more capable than human intelligence.
This section of my report on the likely shape of the
world in 2030 is likely to be the most controversial and, for
many readers, will seem the most far-fetched, as it describes
a period in which machines become as clever as humans and
in which humans will enhance their own biology to rival the
machines they are building. The period immediately after
the point at which machine intelligence exceeds human
capabilities is becoming known as The Singularity.
The Singularity
177
is a phrase adopted by futurists,
futurologists and computer scientists to describe the time
when human intelligence is no longer the dominant form of
intelligence on Earth. Usually we lack appropriate language
for the technological future but, in this instance, I think
the term singularity is appropriate, even if it is somewhat
opaque. In astronomy a singularity is an event horizon
beyond which nothing can be seen. The coming singularity
90 The World in 2030
in human evolution is similar; once machines are cleverer
than humans they will create a world which is impossible for
unenhanced humans to imagine. The development will be,
indeed, a singularity in human affairs.
The term singularity was rst applied in the context of
human-machine evolution by Vernor Vinge,
178
a Professor
of Mathematics at San Diego State University. In a paper
written in 1993 he began as follows:
Within thirty years, we will have the technological
means to create superhuman intelligence. Shortly af-
ter, the human era will be ended.
Is such progress avoidable? If not to be avoided, can
events be guided so that we may survive? These ques-
tions are investigated. Some possible answers (and
some further dangers) are presented.
The acceleration of technological progress has been
the central feature of this century. I argue in this paper
that we are on the edge of change comparable to the
rise of human life on Earth. The precise cause of this
change is the imminent creation by technology of
entities with greater than human intelligence. There
are several means by which science may achieve this
breakthrough (and this is another reason for having
condence that the event will occur).
179
Much work on the subject has been done since 1993 and
writing in 1994 researcher Dani Eder of the Boeing AI
Center
180
speculated:
The World in 2030 91
When will the Singularity Occur?
The short answer is that the near edge of the Singu-
larity is due about the year 2035 AD. Several lines of
reasoning point to this date. One is simple projec-
tion from human population trends. Human popu-
lation over the past 10,000 years has been following
a hyperbolic growth trend.
Since about 1600 AD the trend has been very steadi-
ly accelerating with the asymptote located in the year
2035 AD. Now, either the human population really
will become innite at that time, or a trend that has
persisted over all of human history will be broken.
Either way it is a pretty special time.
Since computer capacity doubles every two years or
so, we expect that in about 40 years, the computers
will be as powerful as human brains. And two years
after that, they will be twice as powerful, etc. And
computer production is not limited by the rate of
human reproduction. So the total amount of brain-
power available, counting humans plus computers,
takes a rapid jump upward in 40 years or so. 40 years
from now is 2035 AD.
181
In 1995 biologist and writer Dr Steve Alan Edwards
182
wrote
an article for the Australian 21C website (21
st
Century
magazine) in which he described the growing army of
singularitists and tranhumanists and discussed their
goals:
92 The World in 2030
Wouldnt it be really great if we, by packaging our-
selves into a machine (or a machine into ourselves)
could somehow achieve that greater-than-human
intelligence, and become our own evolutionary suc-
cessors?
Wouldnt it be great if we could survive the
Singularity?
Meet the Transhumanists an Internet-connected
virtual community of futurists whose stated goal is
self-transcendence through technology. Internation-
al in scope, though few in number, transhumanists
tend to be young, intelligent, and technologically
literate often graduate students in neuro- or infor-
mation science.
Along with (Vernor) Vinge, their intellectual heroes
include roboticist Hans Moravec, articial intelli-
gence pioneer Marvin Minsky, nanotechnology guru
K. Eric Drexler, and physicist/cosmologist Frank
Tipler.
Moravec and Minsky have argued for the theoreti-
cal feasibility of mind-uploading wherein a persons
mind and personality could be emulated by a com-
puter. Drexler has argued that the Singularity is even
closer than we think, driven by you guessed it na-
notechnology, the science of creating objects by con-
trolling matter on a molecular scale. Tipplers cos-
mological scheme holds that the universe is evolving
into a giant supercomputer which he chooses to call
The World in 2030 93
the Omega Point but is, perhaps, indistinguishable
from God.
183
There are many different routes to The Singularity. I
wrote earlier that the worlds networks and the billions of
computers which will be attached to it may prove to have
emergent qualities of consciousness and super-intelligence
on their own. As Professor Marvin Minsky wrote in one of
his most famous books, Society of Mind (1988):
This book tries to explain how minds work. How
can intelligence emerge from nonintelligence? To an-
swer that, well show that you can build a mind from
many little parts, each mindless by itself.
Ill call Society of Mind this scheme in which each
mind is made of many smaller processes. These well
call agents. Each mental agent by itself can only do
some simple thing that needs no mind or thought at
all. Yet when we join these agents in societies in cer-
tain very special ways this leads to intelligence.
184

But perhaps the most remarkable 21
st
century work on
the subject is Ray Kurzweils previously quoted book The
Singularity is Near. In it, Kurzweil suggests:
Once weve succeeded in creating a machine that
can pass the Turing test (around 2029), the succeed-
ing period will be an era of consolidation in which
nonbiological intelligence will make rapid gains.
However, the extraordinary expansion contemplated
for the Singularity, in which human intelligence is
94 The World in 2030
multiplied by billions, wont take place until the mid
2040s.
185
Clearly, it is impossible to be precise about when The
Singularity will occur, but it will be the most momentous
development in human evolution since our species
discovered language and began using tools (the earliest form
of technology).
There are many who will be sceptical about the notion
of machines ever becoming more capable than humans
but, after forty years of observing technological progress, I
personally have little doubt that this will be achieved, and
probably by this reports time line of 2030. And, despite my
robust defeat in the debate I sponsored in 1965, I have little
doubt that later this century humans will begin to upload
their minds and their memories to machines.
Of course, the idea of super-intelligent machines becoming
our successors (with or without our brains uploaded into
them) is not new, or even a product of

20
th
century thinking.
In 1864, Samuel Butler,
186
a writer, philosopher and New
Zealand sheep farmer, wrote to Charles Darwin, the man
who rst developed the theory of evolution, suggesting a new
chapter to end Darwins famous Origin Of The Species:
Who will be mans successor? To which the answer is:
We are ourselves creating our own successors. Man
will become to the machine what the horse and dog
are to man; the conclusion being that machines are,
or are becoming, animate.
187

The World in 2030 95
But even as machines (made partly of plastic) are developed
to become a new form of life by human efforts, we humans
will be changing ourselves into a more capable, more dura-
ble and longer-lived species (as I discuss in my later section
on Human Health and Longevity).
What will happen after The Singularity? As I mentioned
above, post-singularity events cannot be predicted or even
imagined with any degree of certainty by the unaided human
minds of the early 21
st
century. But I have long been of the
opinion that human evolutionary destiny is to merge human
biology with machine intelligence to create a successor
species, a semi-plastic species which, freed of biological
time constraints, will be free to leave this planet and begin
to colonise the universe with a form of intelligence that,
because of our lack of language for the future, can only be
described as post-human.
Section Two
Climate Change and the
Environment
Consulting Referee:
Mike Childs,
Head of Campaigns,
Friends of the Earth
CNN Online News:
Europe, 18 October, 2030
Winter Ice Grips Europe Again
Harbours around Ireland and the United Kingdom
are already being closed by autumnal ice oes and
the whole of Western Europe is bracing itself to face
yet another frozen winter.
Since climate change reached a tipping point ten
years ago and the Atlantic conveyor stopped working
(the conveyor was a system of underwater currents
which brought the warm waters of the Gulf Stream
up to Europe) millions have ed their homes in Ire-
land, the UK, Holland, Scandinavia, the Benelux,
Germany and Northern France to nd better living
conditions in Southern Europe and even in North
Africa.
The economic impact of failing agriculture and
forced migration over the last decade has been
devastating, with national GDPs falling by up to 50
per cent across the affected regions. Food aid and
100 The World in 2030
economic assistance has been provided in large
measure by Russia, Asia and Canada to help the
plight of millions of European refuges eeing Sibe-
rian conditions.
Evidence of past climate patterns found buried in
rocks and sediments (paleoclimatic evidence) sug-
gests that these abruptly altered climatic patterns in
Europe could last for as much as a century, as they
did when the ocean conveyor last collapsed 8,200
years ago, or, at the extreme, could last as long as
1,000 years as they did during the Younger Dryas pe-
riod, which began about 12,700 years ago.
The above paragraphs are not a prediction of the results
of climate change produced for this report. They are an
extrapolation from a worst case prediction made by US
defence advisors in a 2003 report entitled An Abrupt
Climate Change Scenario and Its Implications for United
States National Security.
188

The reports authors, Peter Schwartz,
189
a CIA consultant
and former Head of Planning at Royal Dutch/Shell Group,
and Doug Randall
190
of the California-based Global Business
Network,
191
are two highly respected future scenario
planners.
Schwartz and Randall went on to add that in the worst
case scenario, annual average temperatures would drop by up
to ve degrees Fahrenheit over Asia and North America and
six degrees Fahrenheit in northern Europe. They suggested
that annual average temperatures would increase by up to
The World in 2030 101
four degrees Fahrenheit in key areas throughout Australia,
South America, and southern Africa and, they predicted,
drought would persist for most of the decade (the 2020s) in
critical agricultural regions and in the scarce water resource
regions for major population centres in Europe and eastern
North America.
In addition they postulated that winter storms
and winds would intensify, amplifying the impacts of
the changes. Western Europe and the North Pacic,
in particular, would experience enhanced winds. The
document concludes by predicting that abrupt climate
change could bring the planet to the edge of anarchy as
unstable countries develop a nuclear threat to defend and
secure dwindling food, water and energy supplies. The
authors added that climate change as a threat to global
stability vastly eclipses that of terrorism.
The George W. Bush White House administration
suppressed the report,
192
but concerned individuals leaked it
to the press and it is now in the public domain.
OK, so that report painted a worst case scenario. Whats
the best predicted outcome of climate change, and whats
the middle ground? And, more importantly how real and
urgent is the threat?
In August 2001 I travelled to the South Pacic Ocean
to discover for myself the effects of climate change on sea
levels. As a former science journalist I knew the importance
of evaluating evidence at rst hand (even if I hadnt then fully
appreciated the seriously damaging effect of air travel).
102 The World in 2030
Like many others, I had been exposed for some years
to arguments for and against the phenomenon that is
commonly called global warming and although Id read
a lot of the original scientic evidence for myself, nothing
beats a personal inspection.
I visited Samoa, Tuvalu and several other islands in the
South Pacic. On each island I went into the coastal villages,
sought out the older men and asked if they would be kind
enough to show me their beaches.
Without exception, these village elders pointed out to
sea, sometimes dozens of metres out to sea, and indicated
where the sea level had been when they had been young,
fty or sixty years before. One of the men on Samoa asked
me to wade out into the surf with him to nd a rock, now
submerged, on which he had stood to sh when he was a
child. The transparent, turquoise water was almost up to my
chest before he found the rock and, after he had helped me
clamber up beside him, we turned to look back at the new
shore line. It was at least twenty metres further inland.
Today, most of the beaches on the smaller South Pacic
islands are no more than a metre or two wide and in many
places the sea has encroached onto what were once village
greens. Villagers have had to cut down rain forest to move
their communities further into the interior.
Ocean levels rise for many reasons. Over long cyclic
periods the Earths sea levels rise and fall naturally, but there
is no previous record of oceans levels rising at such a rapid
rate
193
as they have in the past half century, and particularly
The World in 2030 103
over the last fteen years. Not all the extra water comes from
the melting of the ice caps,
194
although this has surely been
occurring. There is also run off from thousands of land-
locked glaciers
195
and, of course, water itself expands
196
when
it is heated.
Responsible scientists suggest that all three causes
have contributed to the sudden rise in global ocean levels
but, whatever the reason, the effect was clear to see. I
incorporated my research into a novel that was published in
2005 in which the main action takes place in the year 2055.
In my ctional story climate change has run out of control
and humankind is attempting to use advanced technology
to bring the climate back under control. The book is called
Extinction
197
(the clue to the outcome is in the title).
Some highly qualied and distinguished scientists who
approach the issue of climate change from a far more rigorous
scientic standpoint than me, draw a similar conclusion as to
the possible outcome. Only what they are describing is non-
ction and may become all too real. This is what Professor
James Lovelock wrote in The Independent in May 2004:
Unless we stop now, we will really doom the lives
of our descendants. If we just go on for another 40
or 50 years fafng around, theyll have no chance at
all, itll be back to the Stone Age. Therell be people
around still. But civilisation will go.
198
James Lovelock is, of course, the scientist who invented the
means of measuring chlorouorocarbons
199
(CFCs) in the
atmosphere. These molecules were widely used in aerosols
104 The World in 2030
and fridges and they were destroying the protective ozone
layer around the planet. As a result of his demonstrations
the international Montreal Protocol
200
to outlaw CFCs was
signed in 1987. Since 1995 the developed nations have ceased
producing these propellants and coolants for aerosols and
fridges. Now the ozone holes have started to shrink again.
201

Had the ozone layer continued to deplete, millions of us
would have died prematurely of skin cancers resulting from
excess ultraviolet radiation reaching the planets surface.
James Lovelock is also the man who produced the Gaia
theory
202
of the Earth, suggesting that this planet is like a
super-organism in which every part is dependent on every
other part. Whether you choose to believe in the more
mystical and spiritual interpretations of Gaia is up to you,
but it is clear that many parts of this planets environment
are indeed closely interlinked.
Lovelock is not alone in forecasting an apocalypse caused
by climate change. James Canton, a futurist who has advised
former White House administrations, writes:
I am not an alarmist, but there is abundant evidence
that climate change and environmental threats
present a real and present danger to life as we know
it on the planet. If we do not x this problem, the
safety, health and survival of the worlds population
is at stake.
203
And Australian writer and zoologist Professor Tim Flannery
agrees. As he puts it in his acclaimed book The Weather
Makers:
The World in 2030 105
When we consider the fate of the planet as a whole,
we must be under no illusions as to what is at stake.
Earths average temperature is around 15C and
whether we allow it to rise by a single degree, or 3C,
will decide the fate of hundreds of thousands of spe-
cies and most probably billions of people. Never in
the history of humanity has there been a cost-benet
analysis that demands greater scrutiny
If humans pursue a business-as-usual course for the
rst half of this century, I believe the collapse of civi-
lisation due to climate change becomes inevitable.
204
Even politicians have been bold enough to cast the future
in similar terms. Tony Blair, one of the worlds politicians
who was engaged most with the problems of climate change
while in ofce, said in 2004:
The emission of greenhouse gasesis causing glo-
bal warming at a rate that began as signicant, has
become alarming and is simply unsustainable in the
long term. And by long term I do not mean centu-
ries ahead. I mean within the lifetime of my children
certainly; and possibly within my own. And by un-
sustainable, I do not mean a phenomenon causing
problems of adjustment. I mean a challenge so far-
reaching in its impact and irreversible in its destruc-
tive power, that it alters radically human existence
There is no doubt that the time to act is now.
205

A year later Britains then Chancellor of the Exchequer,
Gordon Brown, commissioned Sir Nicholas Stern to
106 The World in 2030
research and to write a report on climate Change. When
the Stern Review
206
was published in October 2006 it caused
a sensation. Addressing the United Nations Sir Nicholass
views were reported as follows:
Mr. Stern warned that even if we are sensible about
climate change and get the emissions down, the cli-
mate is going to change still more than it has. While
the world was currently experiencing the effects of an
increase in global temperatures of 0.7 degrees Celsius,
he said that even if we act strongly to decrease emis-
sions, weve got another 1.5 to 2.0 degrees centigrade
to come. So weve seen maybe a quarter or a third
of temperature increase were going to have to cope
with. St. Petersburg, New York, London, Cairo, Cape
Town, Shanghai, Bombay, Calcutta, Dhaka - theyre
all under threat from sea-level rise, and many parts
of the world will be under threat from hurricanes,
typhoons, droughts and oods.
Mr. Stern also warned that the heatwaves that
killed thousands of people in Europe in 2003 will
probably be standard by the time we get to 2050,
and the Nile river, which ten countries depend on,
could drop to one half of current water levels in the
second half of this century. However, the business as
usual scenario - where no action is taken to reduce
emissions - would lead to changes in the earths cli-
mate, he said, that we dont really understand, abso-
lutely unprecedented and earth-transforming the
difference between where we are now and the last
ice age.
207
The World in 2030 107
And in 2007, Angela Merkel, Chancellor of Germany and
then President of the European Union told the Financial
Times why she had pushed for EU agreement
208
on signicant
carbon reductions by 2020:
We made a choice: We could have muddled through
and looked away because it was not clear what the
cost (of climate change) was going to be. Instead, we
decided to act under the assumption that, whatever
happens, the cost of inaction will be higher. This, as
made clear by the Stern report, is the main paradigm
change.
209
The Fuzz on the Skin of a Peach
If you want to picture Earths atmosphere, think of the white
fuzz on the skin of a peach. In relative terms, that fuzz is the
same thickness as our planets atmosphere. To use another
simile, it is as thick as an onions outmost layer.
Yet, despite being so thin, this clinging strata of gases
is what makes Earth unique among all of the other planets
known to humankind. This thin coating of atmosphere
210

has brought life to Earth and all of our teaming, swarming
diversity of biology relies totally on this invisible, fragile and
threatened halo.
It is impossible to know for sure how much more heated
the planets atmosphere will have become in twenty-ve
years, partly because so much depends on our actions over
108 The World in 2030
the next quarter of a century. What is clear is that mankinds
activities are almost certainly causing the climate to warm
up in an unnatural and dangerous way. The United Nations
Intergovernmental Panel On Climate Change
211
(the IPCC)
produced a report
212
as this document was being written
which stated that it is 90 per cent likely that human activity
is responsible for global warming. They said the evidence
was unequivocal.
Here are just three of the IPCCs conclusions (with links
to the data sources):
1). World sea levels are rising 50 per cent faster
213

today than predicted in the last IPCC report in
2001.
2). The Gulf Stream has slowed by about 30 per
cent
214
between 1957 and 2004.
3). The IPCC itself says theres a dangerous lag
with atmospheric warming. Eighty per cent of
the extra heat currently being trapped by green-
house gases is being drawn into the oceans. As
the oceans warm, more of that heat will remain
in the air. Even if emissions were sharply re-
duced, the world would continue to warm by
0.1 C per decade for some time.
Over 2,000 scientists specialising in studying climate
change and related disciplines contributed to the IPCC
report and all had to agree unanimously with the reports
ndings. For all reasonable people the debate about whether
or not climate change is a real and worrying phenomenon is
over. Perhaps the Australian environmentalist Tim Flannery
The World in 2030 109
should be allowed the last word on the IPCCs global
consensus position on climate change: If the IPCC says
something, you had better believe it and then allow for the
likelihood that things are far worse than it says they are.
James Lovelock managed to prod the international
community into action over the dangers of CFCs causing
ozone depletion. Now there is urgent need for another
accord, one far more powerful than the Kyoto Protocol. If
we are to stabilise our climate, Kyotos target needs to be
strengthened twelve times over
215
says Tim Flannery: cuts of
70 per cent by 2050 are required to keep CO
2
at double the
pre-industrial level.
If we do nothing there will be a doubling of CO
2
in our
atmosphere from three parts per 10,000 that existed in the
early 20
th
century to six. That has the potential to heat our
planet by around 3C and perhaps by as much as 6C.
If, magically, we were able to stop all greenhouse gas
emissions today Earth would continue to heat up from the
effect of emissions already generated until the year 2050.
CO
2
persists a long time in the atmosphere. Much of the
CO
2
released as the world started to recover from the First
World War is still warming our planet today.
As Tim Flannery puts it:
Since the beginning of the Industrial Revolution a
global warming of 0.63C has occurred on our planet,
and its principal cause is an increase in atmospheric
CO
2
from a round three parts per 10,000 to just
110 The World in 2030
under four. Most of the increase in the burning of
fossil fuels has occurred over the last few decades and
nine out of the ten warmest years ever recorded have
occurred since 1990.
216
In other words, its the Baby Boomer (or war baby) generation
thats really to blame because half of the energy generated
since the Industrial Revolution has been consumed in the
last twenty years.
Only its not any single generations fault its all of our
faults in the developed world and, in the future, the culprit
responsible for any further man-made climate change will be
the looming and inescapable global population explosion.
The 20
th
century opened to a world population of a little
more than one billion people and closed on a world of six
billion. Every one of those six billion is using on average
four times as much energy
217
as people did 100 years ago.
As I said in my introduction to this section, we are now
confronted with the physical proof of climate change and
Europe is a good place to go looking for extreme weather.
Such extremes are caused by the atmosphere heating up. For
every single degree the atmosphere is warmed, world rainfall
increases by 1 per cent.
218
This does not sound like much,
but the increase is very unevenly distributed.
The 1990s were the warmest decade in Britain since
records began in the 1660s, with 2006 the hottest year ever,
2005 the second warmest year ever, 1998 the third warmest
ever and 2001 the fourth warmest
The World in 2030 111
In January 2007 The British Meteorological Ofce warned
that 2007 will be the warmest year on record.
219
(although
it looks as if it will turn out to be the wettest). The trend
towards extreme weather is starkly obvious and it is being
repeated across much of mainland Europe.
And in October 2007 The New York Times reported
alarming news under a headline Arctic Melt Unnerves The
Experts:
The Arctic ice cap shrank so much this summer that
waves briey lapped along two long-imagined Arctic
shipping routes, the Northwest Passage over Canada
and the Northern Sea Route over Russia.
Overall, the oating ice dwindled to an extent unpar-
alleled in a century or more, by several estimates.
Now the six-month dark season has returned to the
North Pole. In the deepening chill, new ice is already
spreading over vast stretches of the Arctic Ocean. As-
tonished by the summers changes, scientists are stud-
ying the forces that exposed one million square miles
of open water six Californias beyond the average
since satellites started measurements in 1979.
220

The IPCC specically identied human activity over the
last 250 years as the culprit for the atmospheric warming
but new evidence now suggests that the problem started way
before that. Emeritus Professor William F. Ruddiman
221
of
the University of Virginia is a paleo-climatologist with over
sixty years experience. In his recent book Plows, Plagues and
112 The World in 2030
Petroleum
222
he presents evidence from fossil records and
ice/soil core samples that unnatural global warming began
12,000 years ago when Man rst started growing crops and
husbanding animals the agricultural revolution.
Trees felled to make way for agriculture could no longer
absorb CO
2
from the atmosphere and as landscapes were
burned to create crop growing areas, more carbon dioxide
was released. Then, as soil was turned over for planting and
rice paddies were ooded, methane gas a powerful climatic
warming gas was also released into the atmosphere. Growing
herds of husbanded animals bred for food and clothing also
contributed by releasing methane gas produced by their
own diets.
Of course, 12,000 years ago the number of humans on
the planet was still very small a few million at most
and the unnatural warming effect of their activities on the
atmosphere was very slight indeed. But Professor Ruddiman
and his colleagues were able to measure those subtle changes,
changes that contradicted the expected cyclical change to
which our planets atmosphere is subject. So sensitive is
our climate and so accurate are the fossil records that
Ruddimans team was also able to specically plot the
reduction in the output of man-made CO
2
and methane
during the periods when plagues swept through Europe and
Asia reducing human activity by as much as 50 per cent for
a period of years.
VII
VII
William Ruddiman pointedly states in the introduction to his book that he has received no fund-
ing from any individual, body or organisation which has an interest in proving the case about climate
change either way.
The World in 2030 113
In the year 2030 historians may look back on the rst
decade of the 21
st
century and identify it as the period in
which humans rst became serious about tackling climate
change. A clear and almost palpable change in the Western
Zeitgeist is occurring even as this report is being written
and it now seems as if hardly a day can pass without a
major public gure, a supermarket chain or a government
leader pledging new-found allegiance to the battle against
global warming.
VIII
One former political leader who can claim to have been
involved in tackling climate change longer than most is
former US Vice President Al Gore. As well as starring in a
feature lm about climate change called An Inconvenient
Truth
223
(which won an Oscar for Best Documentary), Mr
Gore also remains active politically. Called to testify to the
US Congressional Committee on Energy and Air Quality in
March 2007 he said:
I want to testify today about what I believe is a plan-
etary emergency, a crisis that threatens the survival of
our civilization and the habitability of the Earth.
The planet has a fever. If your baby has a fever, you
go to the doctor. If the doctor says you need to inter-
vene here, you dont say I read a science ction nov-
el that says its not a problem. You take action.
224
VIII
Indeed, in commissioning this report (and encouraging a focus on climate change and energy con-
servation) PlasticsEurope has acted on behalf of the European plastics manufacturing industry to
raise public awareness about this serious problem.
114 The World in 2030
Touching on some Less Well-Known Causes
of Climate Change
Much has been written on the causes of climate change and
I do not intend to describe in this section details about the
number of new power stations being built in China every
year, nor the USAs growing appetite for coal as a power-
generation resource. Sufce to say that the majority of
human-produced carbon dioxide that enters the atmosphere
is produced by electricity power generation and transport
(road, rail, shipping and aviation).
Before examining some lesser known sectors that emit
carbon in particular aviation and shipping, two forms of
transport that because of their international nature makes it
convenient for domestic politicians to overlook it is worth
noting that China, in particular, is a rapidly emerging economy
which clearly understands how critical it is to reduce carbon
output even as it ramps up its power generation capacity. The
following article was published by the Ethical Corp think
tank in February 2007:
One recently completed supercritical coal-red plant
in Shanghai shows the way forward. Phase two of the
Waigaoqiao plant, which has two 900 MW generating
units and uses turbines made by Siemens, is one of the
most advanced coal-red plants operating in China.
With a net efciency of more than 42 per cent sig-
nicantly higher than the worldwide average of 31 per
cent for hard coal-red units it will save an annual
one million tonnes of coal and cut carbon dioxide
The World in 2030 115
emissions by 2.1 million tonnes in comparison with a
typical Chinese power station of the same size.
225
And in September 2007 Chinas National Development and
Reform Commission announced a $133.3 billion project to
develop renewable energy sources:
China has released an ambitious plan to develop
renewable energy to cut its surging carbon dioxide
emissions.
The Middle and Long-term Development Plan of
Renewable Energies promises to derive ten per cent
of Chinas energy supply from renewables by 2010
and 15 per cent by 2020.
226
Cleaning up power stations, nding renewable and sustainable
sources of energy (see the following section on energy),
conserving energy and sharply reducing our emissions from
transport are all necessary and urgent actions. But there are
also other factors to be considered.
As the paleo-climatologist Professor William Ruddiman
points out, climate change began the moment humans started
deforesting the planet and growing our food plants and
husbanding our meat, instead of hunting and gathering. And
deforestation is, itself, a major but under-appreciated source
of global warming. The Independent reported in May 2007:
In the next 24 hours, deforestation will release as
much CO
2
into the atmosphere as 8 million people
ying from London to New York.
116 The World in 2030
Stopping the loggers is the fastest and cheapest so-
lution to climate change. So why are global leaders
turning a blind eye to this crisis?
The rampant slashing and burning of tropical forests is
second only to the energy sector as a source of green-
house gases according to a report published today by
the Oxford-based Global Canopy Programme,
227
an
alliance of leading rainforest scientists.
Figures from the GCP, summarising the latest nd-
ings from the United Nations, and building on
estimates contained in the Stern Report, show de-
forestation accounts for up to 25 per cent of global
emissions of heat-trapping gases, while transport and
industry account for 14 per cent each; and aviation
makes up only 3 per cent of the total.
228
And, what is done with the land once it has been deforested?
Most is used for cattle husbandry. You may be surprised to
learn that cattle themselves are responsible for producing
18 per cent of greenhouse gases, their noted atulence
leading pugnacious Ryanair boss Michael OLeary to remark
famously that governments should do something about
cows farting
229
rather than pick on his airline (although he
has no reason to be smug; see the section on aviation below).
According to the Christian Science Monitor:
Its not just the well-known and frequently joked-
about atulence and manure of grass-chewing cat-
tle thats the problem, according to a recent report
by the Food and Agriculture Organization of the
The World in 2030 117
United Nations (FAO). Land-use changes, especially
deforestation to expand pastures and to create arable
land for feed crops, is a big part. So is the use of en-
ergy to produce fertilizers, to run the slaughterhouses
and meat-processing plants, and to pump water.
Livestock are responsible for 18 per cent of green-
house-gas emissions as measured in carbon dioxide
equivalent, reports the FAO. This includes 9 per cent
of all CO
2
emissions, 37 per cent of methane, and
65 per cent of nitrous oxide. Altogether, thats more
than the emissions caused by transportation.
230
And we are not about to cut back on our cattle rearing, it
seems. Despite my earlier reference to meat of the future
being grown in factories (without a atulent host animal) it
seems that cattle-producing countries are condent about
their future markets for beef. Under the headline Greater
demand for cattle beef to come from developing nations
the Arab-Brazillian Chamber of Commerce reported:
According to a sector study, by 2030 emerging coun-
tries will consume 350 million tonnes of cattle beef,
against 100 million in developed countries. Brazil,
which is already the greatest exporter in the sector,
should occupy a special position in this market. The
world needs Brazil to eat, stated Abiec president,
Marcus Vincius Pratini de Moraes.
231
Even the United Nations blames the cow. Under a headline
that read, Cow emissions more damaging to planet than
CO
2
from cars, The Independent reported:
118 The World in 2030
Meet the worlds top destroyer of the environment.
It is not the car, or the plane, or even George Bush:
it is the cow.
A United Nations report has identied the worlds
rapidly growing herds of cattle as the greatest threat
to the climate, forests and wildlife. And they are
blamed for a host of other environmental crimes,
from acid rain to the introduction of alien species,
from producing deserts to creating dead zones in the
oceans, from poisoning rivers and drinking water to
destroying coral reefs.
232
What can be done? Well, some California dairy farmers are
turning manure into electricity.
233
Also, Australian scientists
are working on isolating bacteria in Kangaroos
234
which allow
them to eat grass and release no methane and British scientists
claim to have already made a breakthrough in developing
a low-methane diet for cattle.
235
The magic bacteria could
hopefully be introduced into sheep, pigs, and cattle feed to
reduce or eliminate methane release. And since more methane
comes from garbage than from any other source, maybe we
could nd a way to harness that gas as a form of energy.
One good piece of news is that although methane is
a potent greenhouse gas, it lingers in our atmosphere for
only ten years (compared with 100 years or more for carbon
dioxide) and thus any attempt to reduce methane emissions
would produce effects that would be noticeable rapidly.
But even though cattle emissions has a comical quality,
the notion of clearing more and more land on which to
The World in 2030 119
raise promiscuously atulent cattle is not sustainable. There
is no easy answer as the world must eat, but synthetic food
(produced from chemicals), factory-grown meat and even
thoroughly tested and closely controlled genetically modied
food plants (genetically modied organisms or GMOs) will
have a role to play in some parts of the world.
This last observation is a matter of fact rather than
prediction as the trend is very clear. Between 1996 and 2005,
the total surface area of land cultivated with GMOs had
increased by a factor of 50,
236
from 17,000 km (4.2 million
acres) to 900,000 km (222 million acres), of which 55 per
cent were in the United States.
Friends of the Earth points out that even if the
environmental and human safety issues of GM crops could
be satisfactorily answered (and that, they say, is a very big
if ) the switch from natural seeds and crops to GM seeds and
crops would make the production of food the intellectual
property of the large corporations which own the relevant
patents. Food, which since the beginning of human existence
has been a natural resource would, if the GM model were
to prevail, become yet another product of big business.
Such proprietorial development does not chime with the
ambition for sustainable development and the effort to help
the worlds poorest people to help themselves to improve
their lives. Friends of the Earth states:
GM crops are not cheaper, are not better in quality
and do not present any benets for consumers. This
is now even recognised by some parts of the biotech
industry. After 30 years of research and public money,
120 The World in 2030
only two modications are grown commercially to any
extent: herbicide tolerance and insect resistance.
237
On the other hand, the temptations of future GM bounty,
especially the so-called third generation genetically-
modied pharma-crops, will seem very hard to resist. As
[Link] explained in June 2007:
Growing pharmaceuticals and industrial products in
plants through genetic engineering presents an im-
portant opportunity that Africa should grasp now.
Such crops include plants engineered to produce bi-
odegradable plastics, brous proteins, adhesives and
synthetic proteins. For example, tobacco and potato
plants have been engineered to produce spider silks.
Pharmacrops are plants genetically modied to
produce pharmaceuticals, for example vaccines, anti-
bodies and proteins to treat human or animal diseas-
es. Maize engineered to express human gastric lipase,
used to treat cystic brosis, is already in advanced
clinical trials.
238

What is unarguable, however, is that given the problem of
continuing deforestation, the worlds populations must be
educated to reduce the amount of meat in their diets. Meat
is about the least land-efcient and energy-efcient way of
transferring protein/energy from our environment into our
bodies (although the fastest method of energy ingestion at
the point of consumption). And a reduced meat diet would
improve the health of most citizens.
The World in 2030 121
As Jeremy Rifkin explains in The Hydrogen Economy:
One third of the worlds agricultural land has been
converted from growing food grains for human con-
sumption to growing feed grain for cattle and other
livestock. Cattle production is now the most energy-
consuming agricultural activity in the world. It takes
the equivalent of a gallon of gasoline to produce a
pound of grain-fed beef in the US. To sustain the
yearly beef requirements of an average family of four
people requires the consumption of more than 260
gallons of fossil fuel. When that fuel is burned, it
releases 2.5 tons of additional CO
2
into the atmos-
phere as much CO
2
as the average car emits in six
months of normal operation.
Shipping
Shipping is a transport sector producing signicant carbon
emissions but one which is rarely discussed (and one which
is often omitted from domestic climate change recommen-
dations and legislation). But, although relatively small, ship-
ping is the fastest growing of all transport sectors, according
to The Economist:
World merchandise trade (shipping) is growing at 15
per cent a year. Trade between China, India, America
and Europe accounts for 65 per cent of the 250m-
plus containers moved around the world each year.
Freight rates rose by nearly one-third in the four
122 The World in 2030
years to the peak of the cycle in the third quarter of
2005. That led to a splurge in orders for new, larger
ships.
239

Perhaps one of the best places in the world to witness for
yourself the impact of ships greenhouse gas emissions
is Istanbul. The beautiful old city sits either side of the
narrowest shipping lane in the world, the Bosphorus, a strait
which links the almost completely enclosed Black sea to the
Aegean Sea and the Mediterranean beyond.
For all of the rapidly developing countries around the
Black Sea Bulgaria, Romania, the Ukraine, Georgia, and
Northern Turkey itself the Bosphorus (which at places is
only 700 metres wide) offers the only access channel for
tankers and container ships. Every ten minutes huge cargo
vessels pass in each direction, piloted by local watermen and
controlled by a marine equivalent of an air trafc control
system. All of them belch out large quantities of CO
2
, SOx
240

and NOx
241
.
Istanbul already has a serious pollution crisis as its twelve
million inhabitants attempt to get around their vast city.
The transport infrastructure is poor because of a difcult
topography, earthquake risk and chronic long-term under-
investment. There is almost no metro system and the ancient
ferry boats which criss-cross the Bosphorus add their noxious
outpourings to those of millions of cars and the giant cargo
vessels and cruise liners which sail through the strait.
As a result of all this shipping and heavily-jammed road
transportation beautiful Istanbul is choking to death inside
The World in 2030 123
a foul brown miasma which contributes heavily to the
regions high carbon output and to appalling public health
and Turkish mortality gures.
242
However, some technological breakthroughs are
occurring which are allowing new ships to run far more
cleanly. Interestingly, these developments are being made
in the region responsible for most of the growth in global
shipping. A news story published in China makes the
following claims:
China has made substantial breakthroughs in ship-
building as the rst liqueed natural gas (LNG) ship
made in China, one of the most advanced in the
world, will be delivered in September.
The boat with a capacity of 47,200 cubic meters is
under construction by the Hudong-Zhonghua Ship-
building, a subsidiary of the China State Shipbuild-
ing Corporation (CSSC), Chinas top and the worlds
third largest shipping group.
Another four such LNG vessels also under construc-
tion would be delivered in the end of this year while
the research and development for LNG ships with a
capacity of 200,000 cubic meters is underway.
243

And sail power may even make a come-back both to save
shipping fuel and to reduce carbon emissions. The German
company Sky Sails
244
is now marketing giant kite-style
plastics-based sails for large ships to use during their long
ocean crossings. The company claims:
124 The World in 2030
By using the SkySails-System, a ships fuel costs can
be reduced by 10- 35 per cent on annual average,
depending on wind conditions. Under optimal wind
conditions, fuel consumption can temporarily be
reduced by up to 50 per cent. Even on a small, 87
metre cargo ship, savings of up to 280,000 euros can
be made annually.
In 2007 the rst SkySails-Systems with towing-kite
areas of up to 320 m for cargo vessels, superyachts
and sh trawlers will be available. Series production
will start in 2008.
245
And nally, to end this very incomplete survey of shipping
emissions, dont even consider thinking about using
passenger liners for travel, or even of taking a luxury cruise.
In his inuential 2006 book Heat, How To Stop The
Planet Burning, British environmental campaigner George
Monbiot publishes his calculation about how much carbon
is produced by the cruise liner Queen Elizabeth 2 on behalf
of each of its passengers.
Cunard says the ship burns 433 tonnes of fuel a day,
and takes six days to travel from Southampton to
New York. If the ship is full, every passenger with a
return ticket consumes 2.9 tonnes. A tonne of ship-
ping fuel contains 0.85 tonnes of carbon, which pro-
duces 3.1 tonnes of carbon dioxide when it is burnt.
Every passenger is responsible for 9.1 tonnes of emis-
sions. Travelling to New York and back on the QE2,
in other words, uses almost 7.6 times as much carbon
as making the same journey by plane.
246
The World in 2030 125
But there is one way in which you can cross the Atlantic by
sea without being responsible for emitting a single atom of
carbon ask for a ride on a solar-powered motorised bre-
glass catamaran called Sun21. As [Link] reported in
May 2007:
In a giant leap towards unfuelled travel, a full-sized
motorised catamaran, the Sun21, has just completed
a leisurely crossing of the Atlantic ocean without con-
suming a drop of fuel. Stored solar energy powered
the 5-man crew from Spain to the USA at a constant
rate of 5-6 knots around the clock via electric engines.
This is a major achievement a reliable, long-distance,
powered vehicle with zero fuel costs and its success-
ful journey hints at a cleaner, greener, cheaper future
of transport.
247
Aviation
And now we come to a very difcult topic; aviation. Jet travel
is a mode of transport that has such serious potential as a
contributor to climate change that it deserves its own section
especially because international aviation, like shipping, is
often conveniently excluded from domestic thinking and
policy-making on climate change.
Although carbon emissions from jet aircraft currently
amount to only 2-3 per cent of global CO
2
emissions, aviation
is a transport sector that is growing very rapidly (in China, at
40 per cent a year) and emissions from aircraft seem to have
126 The World in 2030
a greater detrimental impact on the atmosphere than other
forms of carbon emission.
In Heat, George Monbiot has a great deal to say about
jet travel:
Aviation has been growing faster than any other
source of greenhouse gases. Between 1990 and 2004,
the number of people using airports in the United
Kingdom rose by 120 per cent, and the energy the
planes consumed increased by 79 per cent.
248
Their
carbon dioxide emissions almost doubled in that pe-
riod from 20.1 to 39.5 million tones, or 5.5 per
cent of all the emission this country produces.
Unless something is done to stop this growth, avia-
tion will overwhelm all the cuts we manage to make
elsewhere. The government predicts that, if sufcient
capacity were provided, the number of passengers
passing through airports in the United Kingdom will
rise from roughly 200 million today to between 400
million and 600 million in 2030. It intends to ensure
that this prophecy comes to pass. The new runways
it is planning would permit around 470 million pas-
sengers by 2030.
249
In 2006 Friends of the Earth
250
and the Co-operative Bank
commissioned the Tyndall Centre For Climate Change
Research
251
in Manchester, UK to produce a report called
Living Within A Carbon Budget, which made an excellent
attempt to lay out a road map for how Britain could achieve
sufcient cuts in carbon emissions to meet the targets
The World in 2030 127
necessary to escape the worst effects of climate change. On
the topic of aviation the report was particularly erce:
The scale of carbon emissions from aviation allied with
very high annual growth in the industry and the limited
opportunity for efciency improvements should place
aviation at the forefront of the climate change agenda.
Despite this, Government is reluctant to actively cur-
tail the rise in aviation emissions, when self evidently
the associated emissions prole cannot be reconciled
with the Governments existing 60 per cent emission
reduction target, and completely undermines any
chance of achieving the more stringent targets that in-
creasingly scientists connect with the 2C threshold.
The long-term repercussions of such an approach are
difcult to overstate.
In relation to propulsion, jet engines are a mature
technology, and consequently the efciency of the
current eet is not set to change substantially within
the foreseeable future. Exacerbating this absence of a
step-change in fuel efciency is the long design life
of aircraft, effectively locking society into current
technology for at least the next 30-50 years.
252
And carbon emissions from aircraft do seem to be
particularly harmful to our atmosphere. In Heat George
Monbiot explains:
The climate impact of aeroplanes is not conned to
the carbon they produce. They release several differ-
128 The World in 2030
ent kinds of gases and particles. Some of them cool
the planet, others warm it.
The overall impact, according to the Intergovern-
mental Panel on Climate Change, is a warming ef-
fect 2.7 times that of the carbon dioxide alone. This
is mostly the result of the mixing of hot wet air from
the jet engine exhaust with the cold air in the up-
per troposphere, where most large planes y. As the
moisture condenses it can form condensation trails
which in turn appear to give rise to cirrus clouds
those high wispy formations of ice crystals known
as horsetails.
While they reect some of the suns heat back into
space, they also trap heat in the atmosphere, espe-
cially at night. The heat trapping seems to be the
stronger effect.
253 254
The fact that jet contrails reect some of the sun up does
cause confusion within the community of concerned
environmental writers. In The Weather Makers Tim
Flannery writes:
Air travel is currently growing at between 3 and 5 per
cent per year and cargo transportation by air is in-
creasing by 7 per cent per year. The researchers at Im-
perial College London
255
are combining predictions
from climate change models with air trafc simula-
tions to predict contrail formation and identify ways
of reducing it.
The World in 2030 129
But the above researchers assumption about clouds
formed by contrails heating up the atmosphere may
be wrong. Some climate scientists have theorised
that aircraft contrails
256
(also called vapour trails) are
implicated in global dimming,
257
but the constant
ow of air trafc previously meant that this could
not be tested.
The near-total shutdown of civil air trafc during the
three days following the September 11, 2001 attacks
afforded a rare opportunity in which to observe the
climate of the United States absent from the effect of
contrails. During this period, an increase in diurnal
temperature variation of over 1C was observed in
some parts of the US, i.e. aircraft contrails may have
been raising nighttime temperatures and/or lowering
daytime temperatures by much more than previously
thought.
In other words, global dimming may be masking the
effect of global warming but, in doing so, is slowing
down its worst effects. Scientists are not agreed on
this subject.
258
In the end, most environmentalists come to the conclusion
that the growing world population must reduce its use of air
transport, rather than allowing it to grow vigorously as is
predicted. However, I fear that unless high carbon taxes or
even legislation limiting air travel is introduced (something
that would be very difcult to achieve on international
routes) the business community and the general public will
continue to increase its demand for aviation.
130 The World in 2030
However, relatively little media attention is being paid to
possible alternative fuels for jet engines. It has been received
wisdom that jet engines require from their fuels such a high
density of energy to their weight (and the ability to remain
liquid at the very low temperatures of stratospheric travel) that
there is no practical alternative to carbon-dense kerosene.
Even the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change is
certain that there is no alternative to kerosene for jet fuel. In its
report Aviation and the Global Atmosphere, the panel says:
There would not appear to be any practical alterna-
tives to kerosene-based fuels for commercial jet air-
craft for the next several decades. Reducing sulfur
content of kerosene will reduce SO
x
emissions and
sulfate particle formation.
Jet aircraft require fuel with a high energy density,
especially for long-haul ights. Other fuel options,
such as hydrogen, may be viable in the long term,
but would require new aircraft designs and new in-
frastructure for supply.
259

Despite such apparent authoritative certainty about the
bleak future for aviation emissions, Time Magazine reported
in 1988 that the Soviet Union had successfully converted a
Tupolev Tu-154 passenger jet modied to burn a mixture of
liquid hydrogen and natural gas.
260

To be fair to the Tyndall Centre, the authors of Living
Within A Carbon Budget did recognise that bio-fuels must
play an important role in aviation:
The World in 2030 131
In addition to the demand management and fuel
efciency improvements therefore, a third of avia-
tion fuel must come from low-carbon, technologi-
cally compatible sources such as bio-diesel and bio-
kerosene to ensure that the industry meets its carbon
obligations.
261
British transport mogul (and self-interested airline boss) Sir
Richard Branson also thinks there is a future for cleaner
biofuels in jet aviation. Writing about Virgin Atlantic, the
airline Sir Richard heads, The Independent newspaper
reported in April 2007:
Virgin Atlantic will also announce today that it is
to become the rst carrier in the world to use green
aviation fuel. Virgin Atlantic is planning to launch
trials next year with Boeing and the US engine
manufacturer General Electric, ying a 747 aircraft
using a mixture of bio-fuel and conventional avia-
tion fuel.
262
Virgin Atlantic is also upgrading its eet of aircraft to include
15 Boeing 787 Dreamliners,
263
which are claimed to burn 27
per cent less fuel than other comparably sized twin-engine
jets. Boeing claims that the 787 uses less fuel, largely because
it is made with composite plastics and metals and weighs
less than standard aluminium-frame airplanes, another
role in which plastics is making a positive contribution
towards reducing carbon emissions. (And as well as playing
an important role in the construction of new, more fuel
efcient aircraft, plastics also has a role to play in making
existing eets more efcient. Retrotting plastic winglets
132 The World in 2030
the upturned ends of wings increases fuel economy by up
to 6 per cent.
264
)
Of the semi-plastic Boeing 787, The Economist reported
in June 2007 under the headline Travelling green tonight:
With half its primary structure, including the fuselage
and wings, made from composites, the 787 is much
lighter than any metal aircraft of similar size. That
not only saves fuel but allows other improvements.
For example, the air is nicer to breathe. Airliners have
to be pressurised when ying above 10,000 feet be-
cause oxygen levels drop dangerously low. At cruising
height, usually around 35,000 feet, cabin pressure in
most aircraft is kept at the equivalent of around 8,200
feet (about the same as Mexico City) because main-
taining a higher pressure in a conventional aircraft
might accelerate metal fatigue. To add to passengers
discomfort, the air is kept as dry as possible because
moisture causes metal to corrode. But the 787 is pres-
surised at the equivalent of 6,000 feet and the air can
be kept less dry because the composites are stronger
than metal and unaffected by moisture.
265
Producing biofuel for jet engines would not have the vast and
potentially disastrous environmental impact that switching to
biofuels such as ethanol for road transport would have (see
my later section The Future of Energy). Even the enlarged
jet eets of the future would use only a tiny fraction of the
fuel consumed by the worlds millions of road vehicles and
aviations potential for harmful carbon emissions is so great
that a good case for switching to biofuels can be made easily.
The World in 2030 133
But even though the development of green biofuels
points to a future in which jet travel is no longer a signicant
polluter (certainly by 2030) it will be years before biofuels
can be thoroughly tested and production ramped up to the
necessary levels. In the meantime, what can we do?
Airlines themselves have understood that unless
they somehow reduce their greenhouse gas emissions
they will either lose business as customers become more
environmentally conscious or as governments become more
interested in regulation or a combination of both. The
rapidly-growing European low-cost airline Easyjet itself
launched a design for a low-emissions airliner in June 2007
called the EcoJet
266
an aircraft that would have a high-
performance plastics composite fuselage and wings and
open-rotor jet engines.
As a large customer of both Boeing and Airbus (Easyjet is
currently adding a new plane to its eet every twelve days
267
)
the company insisted that the technology exists for such a
super-clean aircraft to be operational by the year 2015. By
super clean the airline said that the new aircraft should be
25 per cent quieter and emit 50 per cent less carbon dioxide
than current aircraft. The new planes should also emit 75 per
cent less oxides of nitrogen than the present A320 and 737
families of aircraft.
268
But how do we offset aircraft emissions
between now and 2015?
Carbon offsetting schemes
269
vary in quality and
efciency and even the best of such schemes cannot be
safely regarded as true mitigators of the damage caused by
aviation. In essence, carbon offset schemes enable us to
134 The World in 2030
make a payment to an organisation which then undertakes
to plant trees or to invest in energy saving projects in
order to reduce CO
2
emissions elsewhere in the world, at
some time in the future, to a degree that roughly equals
the carbon that you as an airline passenger have been
responsible for emitting.
In The Guardian environmentalist George Monbiot
made his position regarding carbon offsets clear:
Any scheme that persuades us we can carry on pol-
luting delays the point at which we grasp the nettle
of climate change and accept that our lives have to
change. But we cannot afford to delay. The big cuts
have to be made now, and the longer we leave it, the
harder it will be to prevent runaway climate change
from taking place. By selling us a clean conscience,
the offset companies are undermining the necessary
political battle to tackle climate change at home.
They are telling us we dont need to be citizens; we
need only to be better consumers.
Yet aviation emissions, to give one example, are rising
so fast in the UK that before 2020 they will account
for the countrys entire sustainable carbon alloca-
tion. A couple of decades after that, global aircraft
emissions will match the sustainable carbon level for
all economic sectors, across the entire planet.
270

Tony Juniper, director of Friends of the Earth, said in January
2007:
The World in 2030 135
Carbon offsetting schemes are being used as a
smokescreen to avoid real measures to tackle climate
change. We urgently need to cut our emissions, but
offsetting schemes encourage individuals, businesses
and governments to avoid action and carry on pol-
luting. There is still time to act, but we cannot afford
to be distracted by measures that at best only have a
small role to play in providing the solutions to global
warming.
271
So, if biofuels are years away and carbon offsetting schemes
offer no solution what else must we do about aviation?
Completely redesigning aircraft is one possible answer. In
August 2007 [Link] reported:
The standard aircraft design with which we have all
become so familiar throughout the 20th century is
headed for the scrap heap. Despite its ubiquitous
nature, the traditional shape is set to be superseded
in the push towards cleaner, greener aircraft that can
transport people around the globe using less and less
fuel.
Now a new research group at a Netherlands university
has been formed with the explicit goal of consigning
the current shape of passenger airliners to the history
books. The CleanEra project will investigate BWB
(blended-wing-body), high-tech propeller engines
and even UFO-style body shapes in their efforts to
produce a light, efcient airliner model that produc-
es less noise and cuts carbon dioxide emissions by at
least 50% over current designs.
272
136 The World in 2030
But completely new aircraft will take many years to
design, test and build and, in the meantime, something
must be done urgently to reduce emissions produced
by aviation.
The simple fact is that if we are to meet the IPCCs
emissions reductions targets, carbon has to be taxed at the
point where it is emitted (i.e. taxing the airlines as they y).
The money raised must be used to undertake very large-
scale tree planting (an excellent low-tech way of combating
climate change especially as young, rapidly growing
forests absorb far more CO
2
than mature forests) and to
hasten the development of biofuels (where appropriate)
and the development of renewable and sustainable clean
energy sources.
Strong carbon taxation will slow aviations growth (as a
recent tax hike on UK aviation
273
is proving) and those of us
who bought second homes abroad (not me) because of cheap
airline fares will, unfortunately, feel some pain. Business
travel may be reduced (or at least, not grow so quickly) and
some cargo may transfer to the shipping lanes. There is no
alternative.
What we must do about Climate Change
There are as many prescriptions for saving the planet as
there are concerned environmentalists and the challenge is
so vast, so important, that political agendas invariably shape
many of the proposals.
The World in 2030 137
Given that we face a serious and very dangerous global
crisis in the early part of the 21
st
century, it is clear that
something has to be done. Business as usual simply isnt
an option.
As mentioned earlier, climate change is already so
advanced that it is impossible to head off its early symptoms.
A February 2007 report by Lehman Brothers called The
Business of Climate Change provides more details:
Even if global emissions completely ceased today,
Earths mean temperature would continue to rise,
by around 1C, as a result of past emissions and
oceanic thermal inertia the so-called climate
change commitment.
Given that emissions will not cease today, Earths
mean temperature stands to rise by more than 1C
over the coming century. Projections of temperature
increase depend on postulated future carbon emis-
sions. If the growth of emissions remains at around
the business as usual rate, the concentration of CO
2

in the atmosphere will reach around 500ppm by
2050. According to the Intergovernmental Panel on
Climate Changes Third Assessment Report (IPCC
TAR), and recent research by the Hadley Centre,
such a continued increase in greenhouse gas emis-
sions through the rest of the 21st century would lead
to global warming of between 2C and 5.8C.
274
The California Progress Report, also published in early
2007, came to a similar conclusion:
138 The World in 2030
In effect, the battle is already lost. The globe will
continue the warming trend that began in the mid-
dle of the last century. More frequent heat waves,
stronger storms, more devastating droughts, rapidly
melting glaciers, and rising sea levels are coming our
way no matter what we do. The question the report
asks is whether we have the will to change our behav-
ior quickly enough to prevent this bad news from
becoming horric. Even if we somehow stopped all
greenhouse gas emissions immediately, global tem-
peratures would still rise 1.1F by centurys end. That
would mean shutting down every plant, automobile,
or device that runs on oil, coal, or natural gas today,
while also stopping all rainforest destruction an
impossibility surely. The IPCC report says we can
only afford another 2.5F rise before the weather
changes would become catastrophic. To decarbon-
ize our economies quickly enough to slip below that
threshold, scientists say we would need to cut emis-
sions by 80 per cent by 2050.
275
How difcult will it be to cut emissions by 80 per cent by
the year 2050? Well, given the right mindset, I think we can
achieve this target without causing major damage to the
global economy and the expectations of the millions in the
worlds rapidly emerging territories such as China, India and
parts of Latin America.
The World in 2030 139
The Right Mindset
Even though some symptoms of climate change cannot,
now, be avoided our principal task in the 21
st
century must
be to work to mitigate the worst effects that climate change
could bring and to avoid the human deaths, the misery and
the huge costs that would follow in their wake.
To do this, we need to change minds and lifestyles
around the planet. If this sounds like a tall order, I
would disagree. I have been speaking and writing about
the effects of climate change since the early 1990s (very
recently by some standards) and I have seen a shift in
public attitudes in Europe which can only be described
as extremely heartening. According to a 2006 Financial
Times opinion poll:
Europeans are overwhelmingly convinced that hu-
man activity is contributing to global warming, and
a majority would be prepared to accept restrictions
on their lifestyle to combat it, according to a poll for
the Financial Times.
Research carried out this month by Harris Interac-
tive in Germany, France, the UK, Italy and Spain
found that 86 per cent of people believed humans
were contributing to climate change, and 45 per cent
thought it would be a threat to them and their fami-
lies within their lifetimes.
276
Then, in late June 2007, The Independent reported:
140 The World in 2030
There has been a double-digit increase in the propor-
tion of Americans who say environmental problems
are a major global threat from 23 per cent to 37 per
cent, according to a comprehensive survey published
this week by the Pew Centre in Washington.
The environment is increasingly in the news in the
US, thanks to violent and unusual weather patterns
mainly oods and severe drought combined with
the rising cost of petrol. The past few days have seen
dramatic rainfall across the southern states. More
than a foot of rain fell across central Texas and Okla-
homa yesterday, with more storms predicted.
The survey found that the Chinese are far more likely
than Americans to cite environmental problems as a
major global danger (70 per cent against 37 per cent).
Worldwide, most people in the surveyed countries
agree that the environment is in trouble and most
blame the US and, to a much more limited degree,
China.
277
Given such clear public alarm, we now need effective and
closely policed legislation from our politicians, legislation
that doesnt only set targets for the reduction of our carbon
emissions, but which offers incentives and inducements for
businesses and individuals to help meet them.
But the change that matters must occur within our
businesses and within our daily lives. And the one thing that
causes change in a personal lifestyle is EDUCATION.
The World in 2030 141
By education I dont mean a series of television ads
exhorting the populace to save energy (although that might
help), I mean continuing education by the media, by
governments, by businesses and NGOs and by industry to
make the public more and more aware of its responsibility
to our planet.
One ideal place to start this process is in schools and
the FuturEnergia campaign
278
being run by PlasticsEurope is
an excellent example of an initiative to encourage young
people to learn about energy conservation.
In essence, we all have to develop a conscience (and a
consciousness) about the cost of our lifestyles.
Energy (by which I mean transport fuel, electricity and
gas) has been so relatively cheap in the developed world
that most of us have used it with an uncaring, rapacious
proigacy that will seem shocking to future generations.
A visitor to the United States who witnesses that nations
absolute reliance on automobiles might conclude that
nothing can be changed in US domestic policy without
completely dismantling a society that has become wholly
addicted to cheap energy (which is why, perhaps, so many
American citizens are pig-headed about refusing to accept
that climate change is a serious problem). And I understand
that in societies and communities that were designed
after the automobile was invented a legislative prescription
to restrict citizens using such transport would be doomed
to fail.
142 The World in 2030
The answer has to be to redesign vehicles to be far more
frugal with energy, to change the nature of the fuels they use
and to develop rapidly renewable and sustainable sources of
energy (I cover this aspect in more detail in the following
section, The Future of Energy).
The right mindset means that we each have to become
conscious of the cost of our actions in our daily lives. If,
magically, all of us in the developed world lived our lives
in a way that acknowledged the environmental cost of our
lifestyle, the targets for emissions cuts would be far more
easily met.
Do you ensure that the electrical devices in your home
do not waste energy idling in standby mode (7 per cent
of electricity consumed in the UK goes to feed devices on
standby
279
)? Do you walk, cycle or take public transport as
often as possible and eschew the use of a car unless absolutely
necessary? When you are forced to use a car do you ensure
that it has the lowest carbon emissions possible (or do you
drive a 4X4 in a city)? This is what the May 2007 IPCC
report on what we must do about climate change had to say
on transport:
Unless there is a major shift away from current pat-
terns of energy use, projections foresee a continued
growth in world transportation energy use by 2 per
cent per year, with energy use and carbon emissions
about 80 per cent above 2002 levels by 2030.
280
Do you take the time to separate your waste and recycle
items which have energy stored within them (like plastic)
The World in 2030 143
or which can be recycled to save the use of virgin resources?
Have you replaced your wasteful incandescent electric
light bulbs with energy-saving bulbs? You should heres
what the magazine New Scientist wrote on the subject in
March 2007:
Western governments are gunning for the humble
light bulb because it wastes huge amounts of energy.
First to propose calling time was the state of Califor-
nia: on 31 January it unveiled the How Many Leg-
islators Does it Take to Change a Light Bulb Act,
which, if passed, will ban the bulbs by 2012. Three
weeks later, Australia announced a plan to do like-
wise. This month the UK government promised to
phase them out by 2011.
281
Of course many people have aesthetic objections to
todays energy-efcient light bulbs. But new LED-based
lights (mostly made from plastics) are arriving to widen
the range of alternatives to the standard 100-year-old
incandescent bulb.
Have you honestly worked to make your home as energy-
efcient as possible? In Heat, George Monbiot makes
the following observation about British energy efciency
compared with other countries in Europe:
Houses which meet the building codes in Norway
and Sweden use around one quarter of the energy of
houses meeting the standards in England and Wales.
In fact, the building regulations in Sweden were
tougher in 1978 than they are in Britain today. In
144 The World in 2030
Germany the air tightness standard which deter-
mines how leaky a house is allowed to be is three
times as stringent as the standard in Britain. The Pas-
sivhaus (passive house with zero carbon emissions)
was rst developed in Germany in the late 1980s.
There is nothing magical about these constructions,
and they rely on little in the way of innovative tech-
nology. The builders need only ensure that the enve-
lope of the house the bit that keeps weather out is
as airtight as possible and contains no thermal bridg-
es. A thermal bridge is a material that conducts heat
easily from the inside of the house to the outside. At
every point even where the wall meets the ground
or the roof contact with outside temperatures must
be interrupted with insulating materials.
282
Governments are, of course, moving rapidly to introduce
legislation which lays down energy efciency standards
for new home construction and in Germany legislators are
preparing to introduce an Energy Passport
283
which will
guarantee the energy efciency of private homes. In the UK
the government has introduced Home Information Packs
284

which force property sellers to include an energy efciency
audit of their homes for the benet of prospective buyers.
But legislation and good intentions on their own are
not enough. In Heat, George Monbiot cites the Energy
Savings Trust and Energy Efciency Partnership for
Homes who say that a large percentage of new buildings
constructed in the UK do not meet the energy efciency
ratings required by law:
The World in 2030 145
A study by the Buildings Research Establishment
found that 43 per cent of the new buildings it tested,
which had received certicates saying that they com-
plied with the regulations, should have been failed.
Professor David Strong, the head of the Establish-
ment, observes that plenty of new homes have the
requisite amount of insulation in their lofts, but
quite often it is still tied up in bales, as the builders,
knowing that no one would be checking, couldnt be
bothered to roll it out.
285

One of the reasons for this is that the government
has allowed builders to turn to the private sector to
get their certicates.
286

Independently, The New Scientist reported on ndings that
seem to bear out these allegations:
Last year, when the UKs Building Research Estab-
lishment inspected 99 new homes to see how well
they complied with building regulations, one-third
failed the standards for airtightness. A common
shortcoming was holes round pipes where they went
through walls. Property owners that want to ensure
that insulation has been properly tted can use ther-
mal-imaging cameras to spot areas where heat is be-
ing lost.
287
Plastics have a huge role to play in improving energy efciency
in new building (and in retro-tting old buildings). Plastic
insulation materials (and thermal bridges and barriers),
146 The World in 2030
construction materials and even glass replacement materials
offer massive opportunities for energy saving.
And what else should we do if we want to avoid the
worst case climate change scenario in 2030 with which I
opened this section? Lord Robert May, Fellow of Merton
College, Oxford, and formerly Chief Scientic Adviser to
the Government (and, perhaps, Britains most distinguished
scientist), spelled it out very well in The Times Literary
Supplement, April 4, 2007. After noting that there has been
a collapse in the market for 4X4 sports utility vehicles in
the UK he provided the following advice, most of which I
agree with:
But what actions should we be taking? One thing
is clear: the magnitude of the problem is such that
there is no single answer. Our possible actions can be
usefully divided into four categories.
First, we can adapt to change: stop building on ood
plains; start thinking more deliberately about coastal
defences and ood protection, recognizing that some
areas should, in effect, be given up.
Second, we can reduce wasteful consumption, in
the home, marketplace and workplace: we can now
design houses which consume roughly half current
energy levels without signicantly reducing living
standards.
Third, and necessary in the medium term while we
continue to burn fossil fuels, we could capture as
The World in 2030 147
much as possible of the carbon dioxide emitted at
source, and sequester it (burying it on land or under
the seabed).
Fourth, we could move more rapidly towards renew-
able sources of energy, which do not put greenhouse
gases into the atmosphere: these include geothermal,
wind, wave and water energy; solar energy (from phys-
ics-based or biology-based devices); ssion (currently
generating 7 per cent of all the worlds energy, and
despite its problems surely playing a necessary
role in the medium term); fusion (a realistic long-
term possibility); biomass (assuming that the carbon
dioxide you put into the atmosphere was carbon di-
oxide you took out when you grew the fuel). Some
of these renewables are already being used, others are
more futuristic.
Ultimately, we need a shift in cultural norms, in the
mores that shape everyday behaviour. In this sense,
the current collapse of sales of SUVs in the UK is
perhaps encouraging.
288
Even though the United Kingdom emits only 2 per cent of
the worlds carbon dioxide, British politicians are leading the
way in legislating to prevent climate change from becoming
too severe. Following a two-year campaign called The Big
Ask
289
by Friends of the Earth the British government
announced a new Climate Change Bill in November 2006
and in March 2007 published a rst draft of what the
legislation will cover. The announcement reads:
148 The World in 2030
The Governments blueprint for tackling climate
change is published today (13 March 2007).
The draft Climate Change Bill, the rst of its kind
in any country, and accompanying strategy, set out a
framework for moving the UK to a low-carbon econ-
omy. It demonstrates the UKs leadership as progress
continues towards establishing a post-Kyoto global
emissions agreement.
290
The Tyndall Centre produced a thoughtful response not
long after the draft bill was published. The analysts working
at the Centre criticised the bill for not covering aviation or
shipping and warned that instead of reducing the likelihood
of us suffering the worst effects of climate change, the
mistaken logic behind the proposals in the bill would
actually cause global warming to increase considerably more
than the target set by the IPCC.
Two months after the bills publication, Mike Childs,
Head of Campaigns for Friends of the Earth (and a consulting
referee on this section of this report) referred to the criticism
made of the bill by three parliamentary committees when
he said:
The Climate Change Bill must be strengthened.
This is the clear conclusion from this joint report by
members of the House of Commons and House of
Lords. Gordon Brown now has a golden opportunity
to demonstrate his green credentials. The Government
must listen; it must include international aviation
in the emissions reductions targets and it must set
The World in 2030 149
a higher target to cut emissions based on the latest
scientic evidence.
291
On May 4, 2007 the IPCC published its fourth report (and
for the present, nal report the next IPCC assessment
is due in six years) on climate change, The Mitigation Of
Climate Change.
292
This document spelled out how the
global community can tackle climate change.
The Economist commented:
Some greenhouse-gas emissions, as the IPCC points
out, can be cut at no cost at allthrough straight-
forward measures such as improving insulation and
binning wasteful incandescent light bulbs. Such
measures could both save people and companies
money, and save the planet from a chunk of carbon
emissions. At present, they dont bother to do much,
because electricity bills are not threatening enough;
but governments might take a hand. The European
Commission, for instance, is planning to ban incan-
descent light bulbs in two years time. Such measures
could make a difference, given that lighting accounts
for 17 per cent of global power consumption.
In other areas, low-carbon technologies would be more
expensive than conventional onesbut not necessar-
ily exorbitant. In power generation, for instance, the
biggest single source of carbon, the cost of wind and
solar power has fallen sharply over the past couple of
decades to the point where, in favourable locations,
wind power can compete, in price terms, with more
150 The World in 2030
conventional forms of energy. Better still, the cost is
likely to fall further. Wind turbines are going to go
on getting bigger and thin-lm technology is likely to
bring down the price of producing solar panels.
293
Plastics and the Environment
Plastics bring many benets to the world e.g., increased
carbon efciency for cars and planes, energy conservation
through the use of plastic insulation materials and food
preservation through the use of anti-contaminant plastic
packaging which can double or even triple the amount of
time food stays fresh. However, the consumer image of plastic
products is harmed by thoughtless and careless disposal.
The biggest problem of waste plastics is that the material
is extremely durable and although this is a benet during a
products life cycle, consumer carelessness sometimes thwarts
the plastics industrys attempts to educate the public about
re-use and recycling. The low unit cost of most common
forms of plastic also tricks consumers into considering the
material to have little intrinsic value and thus thoughtless
disposal is a widespread problem.
The world is littered with carelessly dumped plastic bags,
bottles and packaging. This is a behavourial problem and the
responsibility might seem to lie with the careless consumer,
but the plastics industry takes its responsibilities seriously
and is anxious to nd ways to reduce such environmental
pollution.
The World in 2030 151
Plastics material going into landll is a major concern
for some environmentalists. Most plastics take a very long
time to degrade in such conditions (typically hundreds
of years) and even plastics which some producers class as
biodegradeable (or oxo-degradable) may not break down
when denied the effects of sunlight and/or water. The plastics
industry believes that wherever possible plastics should be
re-used or recycled and, when this is not possible, should
be burned to release the energy trapped within plastic to
produce heat.
Another major problem caused by the careless disposal
of plastics is seen in the pollution of the worlds oceans
and beaches. Past carelessness (and, in some cases, criminal
neglect) has led to microscopic shards of plastics becoming
widespread in the marine environment. In 2004, researchers
from the British Universities of Plymouth and Southampton
reported:
A team of experts has carried out research which
proves for the rst time that oceans and shores
are now contaminated with microscopic plastics and
bres.
Eight scientists from the Universities of Plymouth
and Southampton and the Plymouth-based Sir Al-
ister Hardy Foundation for Ocean Science has today
published a paper detailing their research in the pres-
tigious international journal Science.
The results of the project, which was funded by the
Leverhulme Trust, show that oceans and shorelines
152 The World in 2030
are now contaminated with microscopic plastic frag-
ments. In addition, large items of plastic debris are
known to be accumulating in the oceans and on
beaches, harming marine life including turtles, sh,
seabirds and mammals.
294
Around the world efforts are being made by both the
plastics industry and by legislators to reduce the scale of this
problem. The Pacic Ocean is particularly polluted and in
California action is being taken. The Record, a newspaper
published in Orange County, Southern California ran the
following story in February 2007:
Wildlife experts, state ofcials and plastics manu-
facturers this month are putting more emphasis on
keeping nurdles out of the environment. The Cali-
fornia Ocean Protection Council passed a resolution
calling for manufacturers to keep closer tabs on the
pellets; and a bill proposed in the Legislature would
require increased monitoring of businesses that use
nurdles improperly.
Nurdles, of course, are only one piece of the plastic
problem. Worldwide, plastic makes up 60 per cent
to 80 per cent of ocean trash. In parts of the Pacic
Ocean, researchers have documented up to six times
more oating plastic than plankton, the microorgan-
isms that feed nearly all aquatic creatures.
295
These problems must be greatly reduced or, even better,
completely eliminated by 2030. The global plastics industry
is, itself, working to counter these problems. Operation
The World in 2030 153
Clean Sweep
296
is an American-led initiative to clean up the
oceans. Endorsed by environmentalists such as Jean-Michel
Cousteau, Operation Clean Sweep provides information
and tools to help plastics companies eliminate any transfer
of plastic feedstock pellets to the outside environment.
The larger-scale solutions to the problems of waste plastic
include wider plastics re-use, recycling and energy recovery,
the use of new forms of fully biodegradable plastics, re-
education about the benets and the disposal of packaging
(both within the retail industry and to the consumer) and
the encouragement of new patterns of consumer behaviour.
By 2030 we must be able to live a lifestyle that is close to
zero waste; it will help if we start to see waste as simply a
design aw.
Recycling of plastics is an excellent place to start on our
way towards a cleaned up environment. Recycling plastics
produces new products which, in some cases, require 70 per
cent less energy than making them from scratch (the gure
for aluminium is 95 per cent, for glass 30 per cent and paper
re-making requires 40 per cent less energy).
297
Recycling also
reduces emissions of pollutants than can cause smog, acid
rain and the contamination of waterways.
One of the unique things about plastic is that the energy
in the fuel source from which polymers are derived (usually
a fossil fuel) still remains present to a large extent in the
nished product. Thus a plastic chair, electronic casing or
carrier bag will still retain much of the component energy that
belonged to the original source material. The considerable
value added by the plastics industry to the price of crude
154 The World in 2030
oil is revealed by a comparison of the US market sectors for
transport fuel and petrochemicals (which include plastics).
Although petrochemical processes consume only 3.4 per
cent of the oil consumed in the USA, the value of that sector
is $375 billion, whilst the value of the 70.6 per cent of the
oil that is burned for transport fuel is only slightly larger, at
$385 billion.
298
Professionals in the plastics industry say that the energy
contained in plastic is merely borrowed for the life-time
of the product and most of it can be recovered. Plastics
products can be burned to produce heat (and thus electrical
power) and if plastics products were to be burned in an
incinerator in which carbon emissions were sequestered
(trapped) waste plastics products could potentially produce
heat which could be used to generate almost carbon-free
power. Only pilot projects for carbon-trapping during
plastics incineration are currently in use and it is still unclear
whether or not such a procedure would be a net producer
of energy. Friends of the Earth supports landll for waste
plastics to ensure CO
2
sequestration (although landll itself
is highly controversial and frowned on by the European
Commission) and in preference the organisation argues
that re-use and recycle is the best model of all. Certainly,
if recycled, some waste plastics products can produce new
plastics products without using much more additional fuel
as a component.
In theory, most plastics can be recycled but todays mar-
ket forces mean that it is often cheaper to throw away some
forms of waste plastic than it is to recycle them. Unfortu-
nately, there is widespread recycling for only two types of
The World in 2030 155
plastics
299
polyethylene terephthalate and high-density
polyethylene.
IX
This is one reason for the selectiveness of
recycling programmes used in most countries.
As the Economist reported in June 2007:
Plastics, which are made from fossil fuels, are some-
what different. Although they have many useful
properties they are exible, lightweight and can
be shaped into any form there are many different
types, most of which need to be processed separately.
In 2005 less than 6% of the plastic from Americas
municipal waste stream was recovered. And of that
small fraction, the only two types recycled in sig-
nicant quantities were PET and HDPE. For PET,
food-grade bottle-to-bottle recycling exists. But plas-
tic is often down-cycled into other products such as
plastic lumber (used in place of wood), drain pipes
and carpet bres, which tend to end up in landlls or
incinerators at the end of their useful lives.
Even so, plastics are being used more and more, not
just for packaging, but also in consumer goods such
as cars, televisions and personal computers. Because
such products are made of a variety of materials and
can contain multiple types of plastic, metals (some
of them toxic), and glass, they are especially difcult
and expensive to dismantle and recycle.
300
IX
It is also possible to recycle other forms of plastics, e.g. PVC and EPS, but the cherry picking ap-
proach of the recycling industry currently offers fewer options for these materials.
156 The World in 2030
This situation will change as energy prices rise (assuming no
wild card new technology emerges which can produce very
cheap energy), as legislators get tougher about protecting
the environment and as consumers become much better
educated about the costs that their existence places on the
worlds environment.
Germany, the Scandinavian countries, Austria and
Belgium have long been leading the way on recycling as
a whole and on plastics recycling and energy recovery in
particular. A combination of strict legislation and public
education has pushed recovery rates in these countries over
80 per cent. On the other hand, citizens of countries such
as Greece and the United Kingdom have been behaving as
irresponsible proigate consumers, historically recycling less
than 10 per cent of their potentially recyclable waste. This is
changing rapidly, however.
In March 2007 the International Herald Tribune published
a report on recycling activity around Europe and, although
not an exhaustive survey, the trends are encouraging. In
Paris, plastic not suitable for economic recycling is burned
to produce heat for apartment buildings and plastic suitable
for recycling is processed locally.
301

In London, there is a heartening trend towards increasing
the amount of recycling (which was at a very low level)
302

while in Sweden, recycling is mandatory and is paid for by
industry and the consumer.
303
Italy has also legislated to enforce recycling and in
Milan many plastics are recycled to make parts for the local
The World in 2030 157
automobile industry.
304
And in Germany, where deposits are
paid on plastic bottles, and return is a legal requirement,
recycling is undertaken very conscientiously by citizens:
Germans separate their trash with an earnestness and
conviction that often confounds newcomers. There
are bins for paper, compost and general trash. There
are three bins for glass clear, green and amber and
a yellow bin for plastics, metals and packaging. As
many as seven bins can crowd the back courtyards
and side alleyways of German homes.
Berlin residents, who pay a deposit on plastic bottles,
may also take them back to the store where they were
purchased and claim a refund - the most popular so-
lution.
305
In Ireland citizens have been so responsible about recy-
cling that the nation has hit a recycling target well ahead
of schedule. In 2005 Ireland recycled 60 per cent of its
packaging waste,
306
meeting its EU proscribed target for
2011 six years early.
One of the problems with the economics of plastics
recycling has been that plastics recovered from foodstuff
packaging and bottling hasnt been considered clean
enough to be re-used to make food containers or bottles.
The plastic recovered has been used for products such as
plastic garments (see the Marks and Spencer recycled-plastics
eece
307
) and plastic insulation materials. The problem is
that these types of plastic yield far less income for recyclers
than plastic which can be re-used to contain foodstuffs.
158 The World in 2030
But, as New Scientist magazine explained in May 2007:
A new generation of plastics recycling plants promis-
es to change all that. The plants will use technologies
that reduce or even eliminate the need for water and
produce plastics clean enough for food packaging, at
a lower cost than existing techniques. If successful,
such plants could signicantly increase the number
of plastic bottles that are recycled in the US and Eu-
rope each year.
308
And the magazine article goes on to point out that the
economic prospects for recycled plastic have never been
better:
The high price of oil is boosting demand for recy-
cled plastics, which is outstripping supply, so the new
plants cannot be built quickly enough, says Patty
Moore of Moore Recycling Associates in Sonoma,
California. Right now we have economics that are
pretty favourable for expanding recycling. The en-
vironment has changed from barely scraping by to
people saying, hey, we can make some money at
this.
309
In Britain the process of recycling plastic food containers
to make new plastic food containers has already begun. In
March 2007 Recycling Today reported.
The rst successful commercial trial of plastic milk
bottles containing recycled HDPE, using world rst
technology has been completed this month.
The World in 2030 159
The trial, which involved the production of 60,000
recycled content milk bottles for commercial sale, is
the culmination of a three-year project. The project
was initiated and funded by WRAP, and is aimed at
developing a recycling process capable of producing
food grade polythene from milk bottles. The project
was delivered by Nampak Plastics, Dairy Crest, the
Fraunhofer Institute, Sorema, Erema and Nextek.
310
Packaging of all sorts (much of it plastic) is a highly emotive
issue for environmentalists. But it is hard to live in the
developed world without buying packaged products and it is
clear that much packaging is highly worthwhile (that which
protects foodstuffs, medicines, etc. from contamination and
increases shelf life).
X
In the less developed world up to 50
per cent of food is spoiled on its way from production to the
shelf because of a lack of packaging.
311
Meanwhile other forms of packaging (perfume,
cosmetics, etc.) have in a few cases become a perverted end
in themselves and require regulation. Certainly some forms
of packaging are simply plain daft (shrink-wrapped coconuts)
but such examples form only a small minority of the market.
As packaging production accounts for 40 per cent of the
overall plastics industry in Europe, attention must be paid
to its responsible use.
Writing in New Scientist in April 2007, Jessica Marshall
opened up the packaging industry to scrutiny.
X
The UK Cucumber Growers Association has produced research indicating that a shrink-wrapped cu-
cumber loses only 1.5 per cent of its water content after two weeks storage compared with 15 per
cent in an unwrapped cucumber.
160 The World in 2030
One factor behind the packaging explosion is the way
goods are mass-produced in one part of the world
and shipped to another to be sold. Products need to
be boxed, wrapped or bagged in a way that gets them
from the farm or factory and into the consumers
home in one piece. If the environmental impact of
producing the items that might get damaged on the
way is greater than that of the packaging needed to
keep them safe, then the wrapping makes environ-
mental sense.
312
And, as Ms. Marshall uncovers, there is no simple answer to
what type of packaging is most suitable for a specic purpose
(although plastics comes out overall best):
Plastic is light and uses relatively little energy, but it
is non-renewable, non-biodegradable, and only some
types can easily be recycled. Glass is energy-hungry to
make, and even to recycle. Glass containers are also
heavier than plastic ones, so shipping them consumes
more fuel, but on the plus side they are easier to reuse
and rell. Paper is renewable and degradable, but it is
bulky to ship, can be energy intensive to produce, and
uses environmentally damaging chemicals in its man-
ufacture. Aluminiums environmental performance
depends heavily on recycling: it takes a lot of energy
to produce in the rst place, but recycled aluminium
has signicantly lower environmental impact. Steel
takes less energy to produce, but its heavier.
313
The plastic shopping bag is another topic which ignites
environmentalists, and it is easy to see why. Although they
The World in 2030 161
are cheap, light and durable, these same qualities become
distinct drawbacks when they are disposed of thoughtlessly.
Some countries have banned plastic shopping bags, others
have taxed them and some retail companies have taken
matters into their own hands and produced durable, re-
usable bags.
But it is by no means clear that plastic bags per se are bad
(although careless disposal certainly is). In 1990 the American
Institute for Lifecycle Environmental Protection produced a
report which examined the environmental impact of both
plastic and paper shopping bags. The report stated:
Plastic bags, having less mass than paper, produce less
solid waste. At current recycling rates two plastic bags
produces 14 g of solid waste while one paper creates
50 g. Two plastic bags produce 72 per cent less solid
waste than their paper bag equivalent. As the recy-
cling rate increases, postconsumer waste decreases ac-
cordingly, so if 25 per cent more bags are recycled, the
solid waste decreases by 25 per cent. Every recycled
bag avoids contributing to postconsumer solid waste.
However when recycling rates increase, pre-consumer
solid waste increases for plastic though it decreases for
paper. Still because paper creates substantially greater
quantities of solid waste, two plastic bags never sur-
pass a third of the solid waste from one paper bag.
314
Using biodegradable plastics to make shopping bags may
provide a useful alternative and the American plastics services
and sales website [Link] makes the following
observation:
162 The World in 2030
From a Life Cycle perspective, biodegradable poly-
mers offer the potential for gains by enabling the
diversion of waste from landlls, where some 80 per
cent of plastic waste now end up, to a fully recover-
able resource in the form of either energy or compost
products that can be further recycled through soil
and plants, thereby closing out the carbon cycle.
European research indicates starch based polymers
offer energy and emission savings of 12-40 GJ/ton
of plastic, and 0.8-3.2 tons of CO
2
emissions/ton of
plastic compared to one ton of fossil derived poly-
ethylene. For oil seed based plastic alternatives, green
house gases emissions savings in CO
2
equivalents
has been estimated to be 1.5 ton per ton of polyol
made from rapeseed oil.
315
Despite this optimism, biological fuels cannot be produced
on sufcient scale to supply anything but a minority share
of the market (because of environmental considerations) and
we must, therefore, focus on re-use, recycling and recovery
of energy to conserve our resources.
It seems clear that given improvements in recycling
options which will occur over the next twenty-ve years
we must all work towards creating a zero waste society.
As is often the case with really good ideas, the concept of
zero waste is not new. It was rst developed in 1971 by the
American biologist and former US Presidential candidate
Barry Commoner
316
in his far-seeing book The Closing
Circle. He writes:
The World in 2030 163
Suddenly we have discovered what we should have
known long before: that the ecosphere sustains peo-
ple and everything that they do; that anything that
fails to t into the ecosphere is a threat to its nely
balanced cycles; that wastes are not only unpleasant,
not only toxic, but, more meaningfully, evidence that
the ecosphere is being driven towards collapse.
317
Thirty-six years later cities and corporations are trying to
make the aptly named Commoners vision come true. As
CNN reported in January 2007:
Wal-Mart and the city of San Francisco do not have
much in common, but there is this both are work-
ing to achieve zero waste.
They arent alone. The Australian territory of Can-
berra, a third of local governments in New Zealand,
the cities of Oakland and Berkeley, a bunch of small
towns in California, and Carrboro, N.C., (Paris of
the Piedmont) all have embraced a goal of zero
waste.
But what is zero waste? Its just what it sounds like
the idea that we can design, produce, consume and
recycle products without throwing anything away.
Its the idea that industry should mimic nature, so
that, as the writer Joel Makower put it, one species
detritus is anothers pantry.
318
By the year 2030 we will all have learnt to conserve, recycle
and re-use. We dont have a choice. With over eight billion
164 The World in 2030
of us on the planet our resources, natural or human-made,
will be stretched almost to the limit. Of course we will learn
to make more of everything that is the wondrous ability
of humanity and its technologies but the irresponsible
proigacy that is todays dening characteristic of the
developed world will have disappeared for ever. In its place
will be a new form of consumerism; we will still have our
goods and services but we will all know how they arrived
and where they go once we have nished with them. Not to
be responsible for the resources we consume will, by 2030,
have become a moral crime. It may even have become a
legal crime.
The World in 2030 165
Section Three
The Future of Energy
Consulting Referee:
Professor I. M. Dharmadasa,
Centre for Electronic Materials and Devices,
Materials and Engineering Research Institute
Shefeld Hallam University, UK
Little in our world is as politically charged as energy generation
and energy supply. Perhaps only national defence is regarded
by governments as having more strategic importance. Just
as individual humans must consume energy each day to
survive, so must our modern high-tech societies. Politicians
know that if there is a sustained failure in energy supply, or
a long-term shortage of gasoline, citizens will take to the
streets.
In The Hydrogen Economy Jeremy Rifkin describes the
social and political role of energy in stark terms:
Societies collapse when the energy ow is suddenly
impeded. Energy is no longer available in sufcient
volume to sustain the increased populations, defend
the state against intruders, and maintain the internal
infrastructure. Collapse is characterised by a reduc-
tion in food surpluses; a winnowing of government
inventories; a reduction of energy consumed per
capita; disrepair of critical infrastructures like irriga-
tion systems, road, and aqueducts; increasing popu-
lar deance towards the state; growing lawlessness;
a breakdown in central authority; a depopulation of
urban areas; and increasing invasions and pillaging
by marauding groups or armies.
319
168 The World in 2030
Nations go to war to secure their long-term supplies of
energy and in 2007 alarm bells have started to sound in
many countries because projections suggest that the world
is going to demand much more energy between now and
2030. And in that timeframe global oil reserves will start to
run out.
Estimates for future energy consumption vary widely, but
at a minimum it is suggested that world energy consumption
will increase by 50 per cent
320
by 2030 and the maximum
projected increase is put at 100 per cent.
321
These nice round
gures indicate just how approximate some of the future
projections necessarily are but they also illustrate a grave
problem; in an era in which we have to cut our carbon
emissions by at least 40 per cent by 2030 (and at the very
least 60 per cent by 2050), how are we going to nd sufcient
energy of the right kind to meet our enlarged needs?
Ray Kurzweil, ever the optimist, sees a radical solution to
the looming energy crisis coming from technology:
By 2030 the price-performance of computation and
communication will increase by a factor of ten to
one hundred million compared to today. Other
technologies will also undergo enormous increases
in capacity and efciency. Energy requirements will
grow far more slowly than the capacity of technolo-
gies, however, because of greatly increased efcien-
cies in the use of energy. A primary implication
of the nanotechnology revolution is that physical
technologies, such as manufacturing and energy,
will become governed by the law of accelerating
The World in 2030 169
returns. All technologies will essentially become in-
formation technologies, including energy.
Worldwide energy requirements have been estimated
to double by 2030, far less than anticipated economic
growth, let alone the expected growth in the capabil-
ity of technology. The bulk of the additional energy
needed is likely to come from new nanoscale solar,
wind and geothermal technologies. Its important to
recognize that most energy sources today represent
solar power in one form or another.
322
Could Kurzweil be right? I think it possible that new
technology development may signicantly reduce energy
consumption and provide new sources and forms of energy,
but this cannot be relied upon.
For the present, therefore, we are faced with a world
divided by competing claims for fossil fuel energy, a
global economy that is vulnerable to shocks from the
energy market and a world in which nation states use
energy supply (or denial of supply) as a political, power-
broking weapon.
Under the headline US Ponders Move To Counter
Aggressive Russian Maneuvers, [Link] reported in
March 2007:
Washington policymakers are scrambling to develop
tactics that can counter Russias aggressive action
aimed at cementing Kremlin control over Caspian
Basin energy and export routes.
170 The World in 2030
Four major Eurasian energy developments during
March have set off alarm bells inside the Beltway.
First, Hungarian Prime Minister Ferenc Gyurcsany,
the leader of that countrys former Communist Par-
ty, revealed March 12 that his country would throw
its support behind a plan to pump Russian gas via
Turkey to Europe, instead of joining fellow European
Union states in backing the much-delayed Nabucco
gas pipeline project.
The Russian route would utilize an already existing
pipeline, known as Blue Stream, which transports gas
between Russia and Turkey under the Black Sea.
323

Because energy is such a deeply political issue in most
countries, governments control the generation, importation
and supply of energy to industry, business and consumers.
The two notable exceptions to national and semi-national
energy monopolies are Britain and, to a lesser extent, the
United States. Britain began privatising energy utilities in
the 1980s. As economist Professor Dieter Helm
324
of Oxford
University explains in his 2004 book, Energy, the State, and
the Market: British Energy Policy Since 1979:
The transformation of Britains energy policy in the
last two decades has been more radical than any such
change in developed economies. Since 1979 the great
state energy monopolies created after the Second
World War have been privatised and made subject
to competition.
The World in 2030 171
Since 1979 the National Coal Board, British Gas
and the Central Electricity Generating Board have
all been broken up. Energy trading, electricity pools,
auctions and futures markets rst developed, but
they failed to solve the old energy policy problems
of security of supply and network integrity, and the
new ones of the environment and reliance on gas.
The government introduced a new regulatory regime
as a temporary necessity but regulation did not wither
away, rather it grew to be more pervasive. Changing
the ownership of the industries did not reduce the gov-
ernments involvement, it simply changed its form.
325
And as Mike Childs, Head of Campaigns for Friends of the
Earth told me bluntly, Energy policy is the single biggest
failure of market forces in our economy.
This is a continuing problem. According to Dieter Helm,
in 2007 the current British government is in danger of failing
to develop an adequate energy policy for the future, so much
so that by 2010 there is a danger that Britain will face a
severe shortage of energy.
326
The USA followed Britains lead and from 1996 onwards
began deregulating and, to some extent, privatising energy
generation and supply. But the international energy industry
remains wholly under the control of politicians who have
their own national interests as their top priorities. Less than
4 per cent of the electricity generated in Europe is exported
between EU nations.
327
This inexibility in the European
energy market has grave consequences for the future security
172 The World in 2030
of European energy supplies as only a exible and open
internal market ready both to import and export power
at a moments notice can weather the vagaries of the
international energy market.
Yet despite the apparently obvious benets of an open
and deregulated energy market across the European Union,
the Commission is struggling against real opposition from
the governments of its member states. As The Economist
reported in April 2007:
The European Commission has been urging EU
members to break up their vertically integrated ener-
gy companies, but France and Germany are resisting.
The problem, says the commission, is that national
governments do not understand the link between lib-
eralisation and greater energy security. New member
states equate security with nationalism. But the only
alternative to integration is isolation, says one senior
EU ofcial.
328
The EU Commission also plans to meet the need for a hugely
increased energy demand whilst aiming to reduce overall
carbon emission by 30 per cent by 2030. Energy ofcials in
the Commission are certain that this can be done.
We have to educate the public about energy conservation
and we have to reorganise the distribution system for
electricity within Europe, a senior energy ofcial in the
Commission told me. Power generation must move closer
to the point of consumption to reduce waste. We also have
to make the consumers aware of the real cost of energy.
The World in 2030 173
The development of renewable energy - particularly
energy from wind, water, solar power and biomass - is another
central aim of the European Commissions energy policy.
Renewable energy has an important role
to play in reducing Carbon Dioxide (CO
2
)
emissions a major Community objective.
In creasing the share of renewable energy in the en-
ergy balance enhances sustainability. It also helps to
improve the security of energy supply by reducing
the Communitys growing dependence on imported
energy sources.
Renewable energy sources are expected to be eco-
nomically competitive with conventional energy
sources in the medium to long term.
329
Consumer education, political thinking and cultural attitudes
play a large part in shaping how we consume energy and
how much energy we consume. The United States has a
population equal to only 5 per cent of the global total but the
nation consumes 25 per cent of the worlds energy. Europe
has a far lower consumption of energy but the standard of
living is just as high as in the USA
In The Extreme Future James Canton sums up the
American cultural attitude to energy use as follows:
The American public, unlike the Europeans, has
been spoiled by cheap oil, which has created the
illusion of plenty while the reality of diminished re-
serves has escaped public scrutiny. The Europeans
174 The World in 2030
accelerated this public awareness by taxing gas, mak-
ing it routinely two to three times as expensive as
gas in the US. More than 85 per cent of new auto
buyers in Europe are concerned with fuel efciency.
Fewer than 15 per cent of Americans care about fuel
efciency, because in a world of cheap oil, they dont
have to.
330
It is fair to say that America now nds itself in a truly lousy
position regarding the future security of its energy supplies.
The country has an extreme dependence on imported oil and
a cultural and political dependence on low energy prices. It
also has poor security over its future oil supplies which may
make the heavily-armed nation even more dangerous to the
rest of the world in the decades to come.
In the light of the need for urgent action on climate
change, a looming shortage of oil and predictions that suggest
that the world will consume up to double the amount of
energy by 2030, governments around the world are rising
to the challenge in various ways and with varying degrees of
commitment.
In cloudy, temperate Ireland the government has
announced ambitious targets
331
for new energy generation
from renewable sources; meanwhile, sun-drenched Greece
is being criticised
332
for falling far short of EU goals on
renewable energy. Portugal, on the other hand, is making
major investments in renewable energy sources and is
building one of Europes largest wind farms.
333
In Africa,
Kenya has taken the lead
334
in planning for a future energy
budget based on more sustainable energy sources and it
The World in 2030 175
is claimed that China is far more aware of the need for
a switch to renewable energy sources than most people
in the West believe. Writing in The Birmingham Post
two analysts of Chinas energy policy reported in
September 2006:
The Chinese Government has devised a comprehen-
sive renewable energy strategy designed to make pow-
er generation from renewable energy sources as eco-
nomically competitive as coal-red power generation.
In 2003, renewable energy consumption accounted
for only 3 per cent of Chinas total energy con-
sumption. The Renewables Law seeks to increase
the proportion to 10 per cent by 2020, repre sen -
ting a signicant rise particularly given the rapid
and continuing increase in Chinas overall power
consumption.
335

And The Economist reported
336
in June 2007 that solar
power already heats about 80 per cent of Chinas hot water
supply an astonishing statistic.
In Eastern Europe there is plenty of potential renewable
energy available but, as the International Herald Tribune
reported in March 2007 there is, at present, a reluctance to
begin the shift away from fossil fuels:
Sun-baked Bulgaria, windy Poland and farm-rich
Hungary have thousands of megawatts in untapped
renewable energy that the European Union wants
used to ght global warming.
176 The World in 2030
But eastern Europe remains heavily dependent on
fossil fuels, causing friction between older and newer
EU members as the bloc pushes an ambitious plan to
boost its reliance on green energy.
About 94 per cent of the electricity for coal-rich Poland
comes from coal-red plants, a major source of the car-
bon emissions that contribute to global warming.
But in Poland, for example, leaders are disinclined to
cut coal use, which helps limit dependence on Rus-
sian oil and gas. And with a 15 per cent unemploy-
ment rate the EUs highest cutting jobs in an
industry that employs roughly 200,000 people could
be political suicide.
337
And in this incomplete and somewhat eclectic glance at
attitudes and energy policies around the world it is worth
noting that Denmark produces more than 20 per cent of its
energy from wind sources today. By 2025 that gure will be
more than 50 per cent. The UK produces 3 per cent of its
power from wind today and the governments announced
targets stipulate that will be 10 per cent by 2010 and 15 per
cent by 2015.
338
In Germany renewable energies made up 4.6 per cent
of total primary energy supply in 2005, and the share of
renewable energies in the total gross electricity consumption
rose to 10.2 per cent. And in July 2007 German environment
minister Sigmar Gabriel announced that by 2030 Germany
intends to source 45 per cent of its energy requirements from
renewable sources.
339
The World in 2030 177
France, on the other hand, produces 80 per cent of its
energy in nuclear power stations. As The Guardian reported
in March 2007 this is causing difculties for EU policy
makers:
Divisions over nuclear power and renewable energy
threatened to derail the EUs campaign to assume
a global leadership role in the ght against climate
change at the blocs spring summit which began last
night.
Warning that it is closer to ve past midnight than
ve to midnight for international measures to combat
global warming, Germanys chancellor Angela Mer-
kel, chairing the meeting, urged EU leaders to deliver
results for our grandchildren by making Europe the
worlds rst low-carbon economy via a unilateral 20
per cent cut in its greenhouse gas emissions by 2020.
But France, backed by several east European coun-
tries, insisted carbon-free nuclear power be included
within the EU energy mix and rejected Ms. Merkels
proposal to make a 20 per cent target for renewable
energy binding on all 27 members.
340
Nuclear Power
Nuclear power generation is a topic that is extremely divisive
within environmental groups and within governments. Many
environmentalists have strong emotional attachments to anti-
178 The World in 2030
nuclear campaigns whilst some individual environmentalists,
most notably James Lovelock, are now urging fellow greens
to break with tradition and endorse carbon-lite nuclear power
generation for the sake of the planet. At present the Zeitgeist
seems to be favouring nuclear power generation once again
and 31 new reactors are currently under construction around
the world.
341
As must have already become apparent in this section,
energy generation and supply is wholly politicised and
it is very difcult to get at the truth about something as
important to nation states as nuclear reactors.
Whilst it is true that nuclear power generation produces
electricity without carbon emissions, it is not true to say
that there is no environmental impact from the process.
The biggest problems are the risk of catastrophic accidents
and nding safe ways to dispose of nuclear waste. This latter
problem remains largely unresolved. Most of todays nuclear
waste is simply stored in what is believed to be a safe manner
until a satisfactory method of disposal has been developed.
And it is also true to say that reserves of uranium on our
planet may be limited. Although no serious exploration for
new uranium deposits have been undertaken for twenty years
(because nuclear power has been so much out of favour),
current estimates suggest that if a new nuclear age were to
dawn there would only be enough uranium available for 60-
70 years of power production.
There are three other reasons why I am wary of advocating
additional nuclear power generation to help reduce the
problems of climate change. The rst is that consumers dont
The World in 2030 179
know the true cost of the energy generated by nuclear power
stations. Just as consumers arent (at present) told the cost of
the damage that fossil fuels do the environment as energy is
produced (and that cost is not yet levied on the consumer),
so the unit of power generated by a nuclear power station is
not priced in a way that reects the huge cost of mining and
rening nuclear fuel, building the nuclear power station,
the huge cost of decommissioning the plant after use and
the ongoing cost of storing the radioactive waste. All of
these costs are borne by the general taxpayer over a long
period (during which politicians, governments and civil
servants change, thus evading individual and even collective
responsibility) and there is no transparency in the process.
We therefore have no idea how economic or uneconomic
nuclear power is when compared with other forms of power
generation.
This objection holds for governments all around the
world and the nuclear industry has a vested interest in
keeping such information opaque. Professor Dan Kammen
of the University of California (Berkley) co-authored a
report entitled Weighing the nancial risks of nuclear power
(unknown):
For energy security and carbon emission concerns,
nuclear power is very much back on the national
and international agenda, said study co-author Dan
Kammen, UC Berkeley professor of energy and re-
sources and of public policy. To evaluate nuclear
powers future, it is critical that we understand what
the costs and the risks of this technology have been.
To this point, it has been very difcult to obtain an
180 The World in 2030
accurate set of costs from the US eet of nuclear
power plants.
342
My second additional reason for believing that we should
pursue the development of renewable or sustainable energy
sources rather than nuclear power is the problem of nuclear
proliferation. If the present nuclear powers continue to
increase their nuclear power generation resources there
are no moral grounds to suggest that other, less developed
countries should not do the same thing. And as the number
of nuclear reactors in the world proliferates, so does the
opportunity for the building of nuclear weapons.
My third additional reason for believing that nuclear
energy production should be scaled down rather than
ramped up is that the more nuclear power stations there are,
the more targets for international and domestic terrorists
exist. We know that we currently live in an age of extreme
danger from international terrorist ideologies and the cost
and difculty of protecting nuclear installations from
terrorist attacks must be enormous as would be the risk
to the public if a major attack on a nuclear plant were ever
to succeed. It is also pertinent to add that nuclear power
stations in some regions of the world are also vulnerable to
earthquakes and tsunamis.
However, disagreement on the subject of nuclear power is
widespread. In the UK even the liberal and environmentally
conscious The Observer newspaper (a sister publication to
The Guardian) looked hard at the realities of securing British
future energy supplies and in May 2007 ran an editorial
entitled Nuclear Power Is The Only Realistic Option.
343

The World in 2030 181
But I still disagree about further development of nuclear
power, for the reasons given above and because our current
generation has the responsibility for creating a safe and
peaceful world for the future. Despite the plans announced
by both the US and UK governments to extend their nuclear
power generating capacity, the world of 2030 would be a
much safer place if the vast sums being allocated to develop
additional nuclear power generation were, instead, diverted
to develop renewable and sustainable forms of power
generation and improve energy efciency. As Friends of the
Earth points out:
Unfortunately (UK) energy efciency initiatives have
so far been neglected in favour of hugely expensive
proposals for a new nuclear programme; despite the
fact Governments own advisors have said that cut-
ting emissions from other sources will be more cost
effective and quicker.
344
In the end, opting for nuclear power (with unknown cost
implications) is a short-term, potentially dangerous and
socially selsh means of solving the looming energy crisis.
The Future for Fossil Fuels
Except for nuclear-generated power all forms of energy in
the world come directly, or indirectly, from the sun. The
most concentrated form of energy available is that which was
trapped millions of years ago as small sunlight-consuming
cellular animals and plants were crushed and buried beneath
182 The World in 2030
the surface of the Earth and its oceans (producing oil, coal
and gas, in the main). The compressed remains of these
energy-rich organisms are called fossil fuels and, because
a) they have been relatively easy to mine and, b) we havent
realised until recently the effects of releasing the carbon they
contain into the atmosphere as we consume them, we have
burnt them indiscriminately.
Today, fossil fuels provide about 80 per cent of the
worlds energy
345
and most commentators believe that by
the year 2030 the world will still be obtaining the majority
of its energy from such fuels.
In ascending order of dirtyness (in carbon terms),
these fossil fuels are, natural gas, oil and coal. Oil and gas
reserves are spread very unevenly in the world which, for the
moment, gives those nations with the largest reserves great
economic and political power. Coal on the other hand is
widely distributed around the planet and is the much-used
and easy antidote to the power wielded by the oil and gas
nations, currently supplying (by one estimate) 24 per cent
346

of the worlds energy needs. For political reasons coal is a
favourite of many governments, even if it is often the most
polluting form of fuel.
The United States is planning to build many more coal-
red power stations in an attempt to reduce its dependence
on energy imports. As The Christian Science Monitor
reported in February 2004:
After 25 years on the blacklist of Americas energy
sources, coal is poised to make a comeback, stoked
The World in 2030 183
by the demand for affordable electricity and the ris-
ing price of other fuels.
At least 94 coal-red electric power plants with the
capacity to power 62 million American homes are
now planned across 36 states.
347
Coal is also one of the main energy sources for the developing
world. Almost 70 per cent
348
of Indias electricity is generated
from coal and the gure in China is 80 per cent.
349

And, as this report was being written, environmentalists
were dismayed to learn that China has unexpectedly shot to
the top of the list of the worlds largest emitters of greenhouse
gases, years before such a promotion was anticipated. Under
the headline China overtakes US as worlds biggest CO
2

emitter, The Guardian commented in June 2007:
According to the Netherlands Environmental Assess-
ment Agency, soaring demand for coal to generate
electricity and a surge in cement production have
helped to push Chinas recorded emissions for 2006
beyond those from the US already. It says China
produced 6,200m tonnes of CO
2
last year, compared
with 5,800m tonnes from the US. Britain produced
about 600m tonnes.
350
The World Coal Institute
351
asserts that coal supplies 40 per
cent of the worlds electricity, but this gure is at odds with
the US governments claim that coals current share globally
is 24 per cent and this highlights just how difcult it is to
nd reliable information about something as politically
184 The World in 2030
important as energy. But whatever the true gure, it is clear
that coal will continue to play a major role in generating
electricity.
But does coal-fuelled power generation have to be the
lthy source of carbon emissions it is today? In April 2007
The Massachusetts Institute of Technology produced a report
called The Future of Coal. The reports authors came to the
following conclusion:
There are many opportunities for enhancing the
performance of coal plants in a carbon-constrained
world higher efciency generation, perhaps through
new materials; novel approaches to gasication, CO
2

capture, and oxygen separation; and advanced sys-
tem concepts, perhaps guided by a new generation
of simulation tools. An aggressive R&D effort in the
near term will yield signicant dividends down the
road, and should be undertaken immediately to help
meet this urgent scientic challenge.
352
Capturing and sequestering the carbon (storing the CO
2

in an environmentally benign way) will be big business by
2030. The German industrial giant Siemens intends to play
a large role in applying this technology to coal-red power
generation. In March 2007 it issued a press release headed
Coal Gets Cleaner:
If all coal-red power plants were upgraded today
with the latest technology, then the amount of car-
bon dioxide emissions would be reduced by about
two billion tons annually.
The World in 2030 185
Siemens and EON are working together on a new
power plant project in Irsching, Bavaria, that will
set the new standards for performance capacity,
economy and environmental compatibility. With a
targeted efciency of 60 per cent in a combined cy-
cle operation (gas and steam), Siemens seeks to set
the world record for combined cycle power plants.
Siemens is also working on innovative power plant
designs for the environmentally compatible use of
coal. One example is the so-called IGCC technol-
ogy, or integrated gasication combined cycle.
An IGCC power plant is a combined cycle generat-
ing facility with an upstream coal gasication plant
that produces synthetic gas. The IGCC plants pro-
duce between 60 and 80 per cent less sulfur dioxide
and nitrogen oxide than the most advanced conven-
tional coal-red power plants.
353
And getting rid of CO
2
by pumping carbon into rocks also
has great potential for producing clean energy. According to
New Scientist:
Pumping carbon dioxide through hot rocks could si-
multaneously generate power and mop up the green-
house gases produced by fossil fuel power stations,
according to a new study.
Harnessing geothermal power involves extracting
heat from beneath the surface of the Earth. Normally,
this means pumping water down through hot rocks
and extracting it again. But the new analysis suggests
186 The World in 2030
carbon dioxide could extract heat from rocks more
efciently than water.
354

Oil is the second most polluting form of fossil fuel but,
as it is the worlds most widely used source of energy (40
per cent
355
), it is the biggest overall contributor to carbon
emissions. But of all three fossil fuels, oil looks as if it will
be the rst one to come close to running out. Oil will not
run out completely for a very long time, but as it becomes
more scarce prices will rise to the point that it cannot be
used as fuel for personal and mass transportation. Oil will
then be reserved for high-value processes and products such
as plastics manufacturing.
Over the decades much has been written about the
future of oil supplies and in July 2007 The Financial Times
reported gloomily:
The world is facing an oil supply crunch within ve
years that will force up prices to record levels and
increase the wests dependence on oil cartel Opec,
the industrialised countries energy watchdog has
warned.
In its starkest warning yet on the worlds fuel out-
look, the International Energy Agency said oil looks
extremely tight in ve years time and there are pros-
pects of even tighter natural gas markets at the turn
of the decade.
356
However, as soon as one authority suggests reserves will soon
be running out it seems that new reserves are discovered
The World in 2030 187
or new methods of more efcient extraction are found.
For example, The New York Times reported bullishly in
March 2007:
Will we seek a peak production year (2010?) and
will supplies after that become erratic and uncer-
tain? No.
More oil available than thought new steam pres-
sure method raises extraction rates from existing
eld. Some of the gas pumped back is CO
2
.
Chevron
357
engineers here started injecting high-
pressured steam to pump out more oil. The eld,
whose production had slumped to 10,000 barrels a
day in the 1960s, now has a daily output of 85,000
barrels.
However, the beginning of the end of the global oil supply
(peak production year) will almost certainly have occurred
by the time we reach 2030. In the meantime, world demand
for oil continues to soar, especially in the developing
countries.
The problem with oil is that most of it is used for
transportation and no practical means of extracting (or
sequestering) CO
2
at the point of vehicular emission exists,
nor is thought to be practical in the future. The future for
the oil industry may remain bright, but way before 2030
governments, businesses and consumers must have reduced
sharply their reliance on this energy source.
188 The World in 2030
Oil is, of course, the principal raw material for plastic
(about 4 per cent of global oil production is used for this
purpose) but because much of the energy (and the carbon)
remains trapped within plastic products during their
lifetimes the carbon emissions from the oil used as raw
material do not occur during production. As mentioned
earlier, the light weight and durability of plastics products
such as car parts, aeroplane fuselages, cargo pallets, building
insulation and packaging materials also serve to lessen the
carbon that would otherwise be emitted in a heavier, less
durable non-plastics world (e.g. a plastic wine bottle now
on trial in Sainsburys supermarkets weighs one eighth the
weight
358
of an equivalent glass bottle
359
)
XI
. And the energy
trapped within plastics can (and, increasingly, will be) either
recycled or, in the future, recovered and used for heat
generation within carbon-trapping power/heat-generating
incinerators.
Natural gas is the cleanest of all fossil fuels and its
availability and popularity over the last few decades has
already had a mitigating impact on climate change. The Living
Carbon Budget report prepared for Friends of the Earth by
the Tyndall Centre illustrated how natural gas has helped the
UK constrain its carbon emissions from power generation:
One key progression however, is the change in car-
bon intensity of the UKs electricity grid. Over the
long-term, the grid has gradually become less carbon
XI
UK consumers buy around one billion bottles of wine every year, using around half-a-million tonnes
of glass. Reducing the weight of wine packaging to 54g (2oz) by using plastic bottles could reduce
carbon emissions by around 90,000 tonnes, according to the UK government-funded Waste and Re-
sources Action Programme (Wrap).
The World in 2030 189
intensive, with a step change during the 1980s and
1990s with the move from coal-red power to gas.
Therefore, despite the near doubling of electricity
demand over the long-term, the carbon emissions
associated with electricity generation have shown a
very moderate increase of around 8 per cent (4MtC)
over the same period.
360
Natural gas trails coal as the most popular fuel for the future
(presumably for political reasons) but it is predicted to
increase slightly its current share of the global energy mix.
However, in March 2007 Gulf Times reported that natural
gas is currently the fastest growing component of the world
energy mix and its share will rise to 25 per cent by 2025, and
the US governments Energy Information Administration
predicted:
Natural gas trails coal as the fastest growing primary
energy source in 2006. The natural gas share of to-
tal world energy consumption increases from 24 per
cent in 2003 to 26 per cent in 2030.
361

Energy Efciency and Conservation
With such a large increase in energy consumption predicted
between now and 2030 (by all commentators), with the
menacing problem of climate change and with the fact that
some fossil fuels are running out we have no option but to
190 The World in 2030
conserve energy aggressively and to use fuel in the most efcient
manner possible. Because we have previously been living in a
period of cheap energy and social carelessness there is huge
room for improvement in our current patterns of usage.
Most energy wastage occurs in the heating and cooling of
buildings and plastics have a major role to play in insulating
spaces against thermal transfer (either heat loss or cooling loss)
and in providing components for construction which are very
much more thermally efcient than traditional materials.
Energy efciency in construction is a major goal for the
international plastics industry, not least because plastics of
one sort or another have such a large role to play in saving
energy. The use of plastics to replace glass, to replace less
efcient insulating materials and to provide component parts
for construction is demonstrated in specially built homes
erected by the BASF chemicals and plastics company. In
the USA the company has built a near-zero energy house
362

in Paterson, New Jersey which has been donated to a local
housing trust while, in Germany, the company has built a
number of what it calls three litre houses in Ludwigshafens
Brunck district
363
. Annually, these super-efcient houses
use only three litres of oil per square metre to provide all
heating needs. These houses showcase the superb insulating
properties of plastic insulation and the energy saving
potential of plastic components for construction.
And the quest for energy efciency and environmental
friendliness reportedly played a large part in Britains
securing of the 2012 Olympic Games for London. As the
BBC reported:
The World in 2030 191
The environmental plan for the 2012 Summer
Olympic Games focuses on four areas: low-carbon
emissions, waste, biodiversity, and promoting envi-
ronmental awareness.
Below is a summary of how the Games organisers
intend to turn the aspiration to stage a One Planet
Olympics into a reality.
Venues and infrastructure: Minimise the Games car-
bon footprint during the design, construction and
operational stages. One way the team aims to achieve
this is by maximising the use of renewable energy
and providing the most efcient energy supply in the
new Olympic park.
Transport: The most carbon-efcient eet of vehicles
will be used to ferry ofcials and competitors to and
from venues. There will also be campaigns to encour-
age people to use public transport, cycle and walk to
events.
Offsetting emissions: Some aspects of staging the
Games will involve unavoidable emissions, such as
people ying into the UK from all over the world.
Organisers plan to offset these emissions by support-
ing and developing clean energy projects in develop-
ing nations.
364

The British plastics industry has been talking with the
organisers of the Games to stress the many positive ways
plastics can be used to increase energy efciency and to
192 The World in 2030
reduce the carbon footprint of the event and, if all goes to
plan, the 2012 Olympics will be a showcase of environmental
responsibility.
By 2030 preparations will be well ahead for the Olympic
Games of 2032 which will probably be held in Los Angeles
(2032 will be the centenary of when the Games last visited
the city). How much more carbon-efcient will those Games
be than the Games due to be held in London in a few years
time? Will near-to-zero energy loss have been achieved or will
the necessary evil of aviation (ying in all the competitors,
spectators and ofcials) ruin such efforts? Or will the jets of
2032 be running on biofuels?
Other areas where energy efciency can be vastly
improved include computing and IT, transport and, once
again, power generation and distribution. All areas have huge
potential for energy saving simply because after a century or
more of cheap energy, efciency has not been the foremost
design parameter when products or projects have been in
development.
In computing I.B.M. has made it clear that signicant
savings can be made:
I.B.M. is beginning a $1-billion-a-year investment
program intended to double the energy efciency of
its computer data centers and those of its corporate
customers.
Many technology companies are trying to curb the
runaway energy consumption of data centers, the
The World in 2030 193
modern engine rooms that power the Internet and
corporate computing.
By 2010, I.B.M. plans to double the computing ca-
pacity of its hundreds of data centers worldwide with-
out increasing power consumption, by using an array
of hardware, software and services. These include a
new cooling system that stores energy and chills the
data center only as needed; software to increase the
use of computers and automatically switch them to
standby mode when not needed; and 3-D modeling
and thermal engineering techniques to optimize the
air ow through data centers.
365
And a month or so after the I.B.M. announcement many
other major names in computing came together to form
The Climate Savers Computing Initiative.
366
This is a loose
association made up of companies such as Google Inc.,
Microsoft Corp., Intel Corp., Hewlett-Packard Co., Dell
Inc. and Sun Microsystems Inc., and it aims to improve the
efciency of power sources for computers and servers and
encourage end users to take advantage of under-used power
management techniques. At present, the Initiative claims,
only about 50 per cent of the electricity that leaves a power
outlet reaches a PC because todays inefcient power cables
leak energy.
The Climate Savers Initiative has dened a series of
standards for power supply efciency in servers and PCs
that it suggests member companies adopt between now and
July 2010. By 2010, the Climate Savers standard will dene a
power supply that is better than 95 per cent efcient (and as
194 The World in 2030
there will be more than two billion computers in the world
367

by 2010 the potential energy savings will be immense).
There is also scope for enormous improvement in goods
and passenger vehicle economy. The success of the hybrid
electric-petrol Toyota Prius car in both the USA and parts
of Europe indicates where vehicle design is heading.
XII
In
standard form the Prius returns about 50 miles to the US
gallon (3.92 litres per 100 kilometres), but it can easily be
tweaked to double its fuel efciency:
A car that doesnt need gas, or at least not much, is
getting slightly more realistic all the time.
A few small companies will start to offer services and
products for converting hybrid cars like the Toyota
Prius that currently get around 50 miles per gallon
into plug-in hybrids that rely more heavily on electri-
cal power and can get about 100 miles per gallon.
368

And there is even talk at the Sustainability Institute of using
plastics to design cars of the future that will be able to do 1,000
miles to the US gallon (0.23 litres per 100 kilometres):
In todays most efcient cars, only 15-20 per cent of
the energy in the gas gets to the wheels. Only about
2 per cent actually moves the driver; the rest hauls
the ton of metal around the driver. Because of that
XII
The Prius design also makes extensive use of Toyotas re-cycled Eco-Plastic. Toyotas results show
that when recycled materials are used, CO
2
emissions are reduced by approximately 52% compared
with new materials.
The World in 2030 195
ton of metal, engines have to be enormous. The key
to the Supercar is to make it 1) much lighter and 2)
much more aerodynamic, which would then allow it
to have 3) a much smaller, more efcient engine.
The lightness comes from getting rid of the steel. The
Supercar will be made of composite materials car-
bon-ber, berglas, and plastic specially designed to
absorb far more crash energy per pound than metal.
Youve watched these materials at work if youve ever
seen an Indy-500 driver hit a wall at 200 mph and
walk away. Race cars are made of carbon-ber. This
material can be reclaimed and recycled, by the way,
and it doesnt rust.
369
Power Generation and Distribution
One of the most serious areas of energy wastage in the world
is power generation and conversion. Most coal-red power
stations are only about 30 per cent efcient (70 per cent of
the energy in the fuel burned is wasted) and much power is
lost during long-distance transmission over wires (how much
depends on the distance and the wires).
Huge improvements in the efciency of power stations
370

are possible and are now being pursued vigorously. One idea
is to extract energy from the heated waste steam. Researchers
at the University of California (Berkeley) have discovered
how to produce electricity directly from heat using nano
molecules:
196 The World in 2030
Nano molecules produce electricity when heated.
Now, new research shows that certain organic mol-
ecules produce voltage when exposed to heat. Ulti-
mately, they could be much cheaper and thus more
practical to implement.
If all goes well, though, so-called thermoelectric de-
vices based on the molecules could prove to be an
important source of power and a way to reduce
greenhouse-gas emissions by making far more ef-
cient use of fossil fuel. Ninety per cent of the worlds
electricity is generated by thermal-mechanical means,
says Arun Majumdar, professor of mechanical engi-
neering at UC Berkeley and another researcher on
the project. And a lot of the heat is wasted. One and
a half times the power that is generated is actually
wasted.
371
And there may also be the potential for saving the energy
lost during power transmission. Referring to the pioneering
work done by Professor R.E. Smalley
372
of Rice University,
Ray Kurzweil writes:
Transmission of energy will also be made far more
efcient. A great deal of energy today is lost in trans-
mission due to the heat created in power lines and
inefciencies in the transportation of fuel, which
also represent a primary environmental assault.
Smalley, despite his critique of molecular na-
nomanufacturing, has nevertheless been a strong
advocate of new nanotechnology-based paradigms
The World in 2030 197
for creating and transmitting energy. He describes
new power transmission lines based on carbon
nanotubes woven into long wires that will be far
stronger, lighter, and most important, much more
energy efcient than conventional copper ones.
He also envisions using superconducting wires to
replace aluminium and copper wires in electric mo-
tors to provide greater efciency.
373

And George Monbiot identies the possible benets of
switching types of current in future power transmission lines
from alternating current (AC) to new types of plastic-based
direct current (DC) cable.
374
This, he claims, has the poten-
tial to make new forms of renewable energy more economic.
In Heat he writes:
Most importantly, though the initial electricity loss
on a DC line is higher, it does not increase with dis-
tance. On AC systems, by contrast, the longer the
line, the more you lose. There is no inherent limit on
the length of a DC cable.
High voltage DC, which can be run along the sea
bed, opens up any patch of sea shallower than 50
metres to wind turbines and pretty well all the con-
tinental shelf to wave power devices, which (because
they oat) can be anchored at greater depths. Since
wind speeds rise by around one metre per second
with every 100 kilometres from the shore, this means
that the cost of renewable power could actually fall
with distance from the coastYou can install wind
turbines which rotate faster (and are therefore both
198 The World in 2030
noisier and more efcient) without upsetting any-
one.
375
And, a couple of years after Monbiots important book was
published, The Economist newspaper explored an idea put
forward by the ISET Institute
376
at the University of Kassel,
in Germany, to create a European-wide DC power grid to
allow a free exchange of electricity across Europe. In an
article entitled Where the Wind Blows the Economists
correspondent pointed out that although wind turbine
generation is an erratic source of power, if a distribution grid
were sufciently large, power could be transferred across
Europe from areas where the wind is blowing to areas that
are becalmed. The article continued:
A group of Norwegian companies have already start-
ed building high-voltage DC lines between Scandi-
navia, the Netherlands and Germany, though these
are intended as much to sell the countrys power as to
accumulate other peoples. And Airtricity an Irish
wind-power company plans even more of them. It
proposes what it calls a Supergrid. This would link
offshore wind farms in the Atlantic ocean and the
Irish, North and Baltic seas with customers through-
out northern Europe.
Airtricity reckons that the rst stage of this project, a
2,000 turbine-strong farm in the North Sea, would cost
about 2 billion ($2.7 billion). That farm would gener-
ate 10 gigawatts. An equivalent amount of coal-red
capacity would cost around $2.3 billion so, adding in
the environmental benets, the project seems worth
The World in 2030 199
examining. Such offshore farms certainly work. Airtric-
ity already operates one in the Atlantic, and though it
currently has a capacity of only 25 megawatts, increas-
ing that merely means adding more turbines.
377
All of this leads us fairly neatly into a discussion about the
future of renewable and sustainable energy sources.
Renewable and Sustainable Energy Sources
All the forecasts about the mix of energy we will be using
in 2030 that I quoted earlier in this section are wrong. They
will be proved wrong because it is impossible to forecast how
energy generation and transmission technologies will develop
over the next quarter of a century. The one thing that all of
the worthy bodies making prognostications about future en-
ergy sources and use patterns miss (or ignore) is that joker in
the pack: accelerating, exponential technology development.
I think it likely, almost certain, that energy from renewable
and sustainable sources will be well on the way to providing
the world with the majority of its ever expanding energy
needs by 2030; after all, the energy is all around us in the
wind, the waves, the rocks and the sun. Enough energy falls
on the Earths surface from the sun in a single hour to meet
the worlds current energy needs for a year.
378
The process appears to be well under way. In a report
called Clean Energy Trends 2007, Clean Edge, a research
organisation, stated:
200 The World in 2030
We nd markets for our four benchmark technolo-
gies solar photovoltaics, wind power, biofuels, and
fuel cells continuing their healthy climb.
Annual revenue for these four technologies ramped
up nearly 39 per cent in one year from $40 billion
in 2005 to $55 billion in 2006. We forecast that they
will continue on this trajectory to become a $226 bil-
lion market by 2016.
A number of developments put clean energy deni-
tively on the map over the past year. These include a
near tripling in venture investments in energy tech-
nologies in the US to more than $2.4 billion; a new
level of commitment by US politicians at the region-
al, state, and federal levels; and signicant corporate
investments in clean energy acquisitions and expan-
sion initiatives.
379

Before looking at the type of technologies which might be
providing our clean power by 2030 it is worth dening the
difference between renewable and sustainable energy
sources, even though many commentators seem to use the
terms interchangeably.
Renewable
380
sources are those natural sources that
surround us and which are automatically renewed. These
include the suns radiation, wind power, wave power,
tidal movements, hydroelectric power and geothermal
power (heat trapped in rocks). Usually very little carbon
is emitted in the generation of power from renewable
sources.
The World in 2030 201
Sustainable
381
resources are crops and biomass that can
be used as a source of energy and which can be grown in
a way that is environmentally responsible. The cultivation
of sustainable fuel sources usually produces some carbon
emissions and these last two points are very important when
considering the advisability of the current energy policy of
the United States, the worlds worst polluter.
In an attempt to appear green (and to appease growing
public awareness of the dangers of climate change in the
United States) the George W. Bush White House has provided
new subsidies to boost the production of bioethanol,
382
a
biofuel
383
made from corn and, in warmer regions, sugarcane
(biofuel is a form of alcohol).
The reason that the existing oil industry smiles on this
biofuel initiative is that although the feedstock changes,
the methods of rening and distributing propellant energy
remain the same. The Big Oil infrastructure remains in
place and it is almost business as usual.
But there are many serious problems with Americas new
policy of boosting ethanol production to fuel motor transport.
Environmentalists are falling over themselves to point out
just how wrongheaded Bushs policy is on this topic. Even
non-aligned and much respected commentators point out the
mistakes, as The Economist commented in May 2007:
Corn-based ethanol is neither cheap nor especially
green: it requires a lot of energy to produce. Produc-
tion has been boosted by economically-questionable
help from state and federal governments, including
202 The World in 2030
subsidies, the promotion of mixing petrol with re-
newable fuels and a high tariff that keeps out foreign
ethanol.
384

The same journal also reported that by using high-quality
agricultural land to produce feedstock for ethanol, America
is, in fact, choosing to feed its cars rather than its people.
Americas use of corn (maize) to make ethanol biofu-
el, which can then be blended with petrol to reduce
the countrys dependence on foreign oil, has already
driven up the price of corn. As more land is used to
grow corn rather than other food crops, such as soy,
their prices also rise. And since corn is used as animal
feed, the price of meat goes up, too. The food supply,
in other words, is being diverted to feed Americas
hungry cars.
The automotive industry loves it, because it reckons
that switching to a green fuel will take the global-
warming heat off cars. The oil industry loves it be-
cause the use of ethanol as a fuel additive means it is
business as usual, at least for the time being. Politi-
cians love it because by subsidising it they can please
all those constituencies. Taxpayers seem not to have
noticed that they are footing the bill.
385
And to make the case against ethanol crystal clear, consider
the following analysis from [Link]:
Although FFVs (vehicles which can run on either
gasoline and ethanol) are hot sellers in the USA,
The World in 2030 203
most have never had a drop of E85 (ethanol fuel) in
their tank. They are only fueled with standard gaso-
line blends. There are over 6 million vehicles on the
US streets that could run E85. Most never have.
Most FFVs are oil guzzlers; fueled with E85, they are
corn guzzlers. In 2007 the best rated car running on
E85 was the Chevrolet Impala, with a United States
EPA mileage rating of 16 miles per gallon in the city
and 23 on the highway when fueled with E85. For a
typical US year of driving, the annual fuel cost would
be at $1,657 and 6 tons of CO
2
would be emitted by
this FFV when running on E85.
A big problem is that ethanol cuts miles per gallon
by about 27 per cent. The energy content of E85 is
83,000 BTU/gallon, instead of 114,000 BTU/gallon
for gasoline. Even by 2030, the US Energy Informa-
tion Administration (EIA) projects that only 1.4 per
cent of ethanol use will be E85. The vast majority will
be for small percentage blending with gasoline.
386
So, if ethanol is an unsuitable biofuel (except perhaps as a
basis for jet fuel see previous section) what type of biofuel
might have a role in the sustainable world of energy?
One solution is to re-use fats and oils which have already
been used for one purpose for transportation energy as the
McDonalds restaurants do in the UK. The companys 150
trucks are powered by the vegetable oil that has cooked their
popular hamburgers and fries.
387
204 The World in 2030
But leaving aside the fortuitous re-use of cooking oils,
general transport biofuels include diesel replacements
(biodiesel) and sources of such energy range from sugar
cane (the most efcient) to wood (at present, the least
efcient). All sorts of issues affect how carbon-efcient,
or inefcient, biofuels may be. These include the energy
and water used to grow the fuel feedstock, the quality
of agricultural land required for growing, the carbon
emitted to assist the growing (in the production and use
of fertilisers, for example) and the energy efciency of the
rened fuels themselves. For example, sugar cane provides
between eight and nine times the energy used in producing
them, while energy from rape seed oil and other similar
temperate crops produces only one to three times the
energy used in their cultivation.
388
Then there are the issues
of the energy used in converting specic crops into usable
energy and the energy consumed in transporting such fuels
to their nal destination. Also of vital importance is the
issue of giving land over to the production of biofuel (in
some cases leading to the destruction of forested areas or
the usurpation of food-producing land).
Because these issues are so complex many consumers
are, at present, unable to make a meaningful choice about
biofuels; far more information is needed on this topic and
governments will soon have to regulate to ensure that only
the most efcient and environmentally benign forms of fuel
make it onto the gas station forecourts. Environmentalists
have a useful rule of thumb on this topic. They say that a
biofuel must emit at least 50 per cent less carbon (during its
cultivation, transportation and consumption) than the fossil
fuel it will be replacing to make it a useful substitute.
The World in 2030 205
One biofuel that may have real potential is derived from
Jatropha Curcas
389
which has many other advantages over
existing crops. Principal among these advantages is that
jatropha has a high energy yield and it grows in marginal
land unsuited for other forms of agriculture. As it grows, it
converts the soil into better quality growing land. In June
2007 BP announced a 32 million investment
390
in the
production of jatropha as a biofuel.
Although the United Nations has long seen biofuels as
holding out huge potential for helping the worlds poorest
people out of poverty, the organisation recently warned
the world against widespread forest clearance for biofuels
production, pointing out the adverse consequences of large-
scale land clearance.
391

In general, biofuels are most useful for the small-scale
replacement of fossil fuels, as large-scale production demands
energy for fertilisation and occupies land which could either
have been left forested or used for food production. But
there are some countries the UK for one which has
underused, or set aside, agricultural land. For this reason the
UK government has boosted its support for certain types of
biofuel. The BBC ran the following story in 2004:
The UK is to encourage the production of biomass,
crops grown specially for use as environmentally
friendly fuels.
The government is setting up a task force to stimulate
biomass supply and demand, and offering a range of
grants.
206 The World in 2030
Ministers hope this will help the UK to meet its tar-
gets for using renewable energy, and that it will also
boost farming, forestry and the countryside.
Material like miscanthus (a tall, woody grass), willow,
poplar, sawdust, straw, and wood from forests are all
suitable.
392

But while domestic production of biofuel ramps up in the
UK, most oil derived from plants has to be imported. But
the UK government has not yet completed its analysis of
overseas biofuels sources so British consumers who wish to
burn biofuels are unable to distinguish between fuels from
good and bad sources.
393

Other forms of biofuel can also be produced from waste
products such as fat, cooking oil, sewage, manure and organic
waste and, although necessarily small-scale, such projects (if
properly handled) have a low environmental impact during
production and can contribute signicantly to the problems
of climate change when used to replace fossil fuels.
Several examples of successful small-scale biofuel
production projects can be found in the South Pacic
where islanders are turning coconuts into fuel. As the
[Link] website reports:
In the Pacic islands there are great opportunities to
use coconut oil as a fuel, according to Jan Cloin of
the South Pacic Applied Geoscience Commission.
Coconut oil can be blended with diesel fuel, and
under certain conditions totally replace it. Coconut
The World in 2030 207
oil in Pacic islands countries is increasingly used
in both transport and electricity generation through
its lower local cost. Other benets include the sup-
port to local agro-industries and a decrease in emis-
sions.
394
There are also some interesting ideas in the labs today
which may have become a practical reality by 2030. It may,
for example, be possible to produce clean oil from algae
(as Boeing suggests might be possible for aviation fuel). A
San Francisco-based start-up company called Solazyme
395
is
suggesting that this idea is practical, as reported in the San
Francisco Chronicle:
The algae beneath Harrison Dillons microscope
could one day fuel your car.
Dillons Menlo Park company, Solazyme, has
tweaked the algaes genes, turning the microscopic
plant into an oil-producing machine. If everything
works the way Dillon wants, vats of algae could cre-
ate substitutes for diesel and crude oil.
396

Wind Power
Windmills were rst invented to harness the winds energy
2,000 years ago and today, of all forms of renewable energy,
wind power
397
is the rst to deliver large quantities of
electrical power to national distribution systems.
208 The World in 2030
Because of recent increases in the price for fossil fuels,
wind power has, in some instances, become as cheap or even
cheaper than fossil fuel energy. There is now a great rush
in many parts of the world to install more farms of wind
turbines to capture more of this free energy.
Fuel-hungry United States is leading the rush, as The
Washington Post reported in March 2007:
Like mail-order brides, thousands of long-limbed
wind turbines are coming to the empty outback of
Washington and Oregon, where they are being mar-
ried off, via the electrical grid, to hulking old hydro-
electric dams.
The Pacic Northwest is hardly alone as it chases the
wind for clean power. Anxiety about climate change
and surging demand for electricity have triggered a
wind-power frenzy in much of the United States,
making it the fastest growing wind-energy market
in the world. Power-generating capacity from wind
jumped 27 per cent last year and is expected to do
the same this year.
398
And the cost of wind turbines has decreased dramatically
over the last thirty years while efciency has also improved
signicantly. In a June 2007 survey of renewable energy
sources, The Economist reported:
During the wind boom of the 1970s turbine blades
were around 5-10 metres long, and turbines pro-
duced no more than 200-300kW of energy each. The
The World in 2030 209
energy they produced cost around $2 per kWh. Now
the blades are up to 40 metres long and turbines pro-
duce up to 2.5MW each at a cost of 5-8 cents per
kWh, depending on location (coal-red electricity,
depending on the plant, costs 2-4 cents per kWh).
And there are even 5MW prototypes in existence,
with 62-metre blades.
399
But although naturally windy areas like coastlines (and
island nations like New Zealand, the UK and Ireland) are
able to take advantage of frequent strong winds, not all are
doing so. For example, whilst Britain has taken a signicant
lead in getting climate change onto the international policy
agenda, its domestic performance lags far behind the political
rhetoric. The UK generates only 1,353MW of power from
wind turbines compared with 18,428MW in Germany,
10,027MW in Spain and 3,122MW in Denmark.
400
Of course, wind is not a reliable force of nature and wind
power on its own cannot replace other sources of energy no
matter how many wind farms are built (even if the protests
of the anti-wind turbine campaigners can be overcome).
And electricity is a live commodity which must be used as
soon as it can be generated and distributed. No long-term
storage of electricity is currently economically possible. This
means that when the wind does not blow wind turbines can
produce no power.
But one invention tested on King Island in the Straits
of Tasmania, Australia does suggest that some limited long-
term local storage of electricity may become possible, which
increases the role that wind power generation may play in
210 The World in 2030
the future. The device used to store the power is called a
ow battery.
401
As the New Scientist reported:
For years wind turbines and solar generators have
been linked to back-up batteries that store energy in
chemical form. In the lead-acid batteries most com-
monly used, the chemicals that store the energy re-
main inside the battery. The difference with the in-
stallation on King Island is that when wind power is
plentiful the energy-rich chemicals are pumped out
of the battery and into storage tanks, allowing fresh
chemicals in to soak up more charge. To regenerate
the electricity the ow is simply reversed.
402
And such batteries may also be developed to store electricity
generated by other forms of renewable energy such as wave
and tidal power. But, for the present, most wind turbines
produce real time electricity which must immediately be
distributed and consumed.
Some environmentalists envisage a future in which wind
turbines are mounted on every house and any excess power
is sold back to the electricity distribution system. However,
George Monbiot, who is an enthusiast for the potential of
off-shore commercial wind farms, suggests that the whole
concept of domestic wind turbines for self-sufciency may
be faulty:
At an average wind speed of 4 metres per second, a
large micro turbine (1.75 metres in diameter is about
as big a device as you would wish to attach to your
home) will produce something like 5 per cent of the
The World in 2030 211
electricity used by an average household. The most
likely contribution micro wind will make to your en-
ergy problem is to infuriate everyone.
It will annoy people who have been fooled by the
claims of some of the companies selling them (that
they will supply half or even more of their annual
electricity needs). It will enrage the people who dis-
cover that their turbines have caused serious structur-
al damage to their homes. It will turn mild-mannered
neighbours, suffering from the noise of a yawing and
stalling windmill, into axe murders. If you wished to
destroy peoples enthusiasm for renewable energy, it
is hard to think of a better method.
403
But even if George Monbiots vision of a suburban hell
created by mushrooming, ineffective wind turbines, small
domestic wind power units (mostly made of lightweight
durable plastics) will succeed in providing power in rural
areas which enjoy plentiful wind. And the future for industrial
production of energy from wind power is very bright. As
The Economist reported in May 2007:
The wind business is growing by more than 30 per
cent a year worldwide, with America leading the
way. And when a solar incentive scheme took hold
in Germany in 2004-05, demand in Europe roughly
doubled, says Ron Kenedi of Sharp, the biggest solar-
cell maker.
Supply shortages will not ease quickly in either case.
Wind turbines are giant machines that require lots
212 The World in 2030
of parts. Several rms are building new factories:
Vestas has just announced its rst American plant,
which will make blades in Colorado. But new fac-
tories will take several years to get up to speed. In
the meantime, buyers are putting down deposits to
reserve their turbines. GE Energy, the largest turbine
installer in America, is already booked up until the
end of next year.
404
And George Monbiot makes the case for British
conversion to industrial-scale wind power very eloquently:
The wind, waves and sun are not going to run
out or not while we still occupy the planet. Neither
Mr Putin nor any other energy monopolist can
switch them off. No wind farm can ever melt down,
or present a useful target for terrorists. Decommis-
sioning is cheap and safe. The energy required to
build the machines on the market today is a small
fraction of the energy they will produce, and as soon
as that has been accounted for, they emit no carbon.
While renewable technologies can dominate a land-
scape this impact is surely less signicant than the
destruction of the biosphere
The United Kingdom islands surrounded by high
winds and rough seas has the best resources in
Europe.
405
Clearly, harnessing wind power on a global scale will be a
priority from now until 2030. Turbines will become more
efcient (with non-corrosive plastics playing a major part
406

The World in 2030 213
in the construction of offshore turbines) and better ways
of storing and conducting power will be developed. Wind
power will play an important role in the energy mix of 2030,
but it must not be developed to the exclusion of other
renewable energy source technologies, the most important
and exciting of which is solar power.
Solar Power
Unlike wind turbine technology, the development of solar
devices which convert the suns radiation into electricity (solar
photovoltaic) and devices which convert it into heat (solar
thermal) is complex. A great deal of further development in
terms of efciency (how much of the suns power can they
capture and convert) and in reducing the cost of the capture
and conversion devices is required.
In its survey of renewable energy sources The Economist
reviewed the progress that has been made in solar photovoltaic
cell development:
The efciency with which solar photovoltaic cells
convert sunlight to electricity has increased from 6%
when they were rst developed to 15% now. Their
cost has dropped from around $20 per watt of produc-
tion capacity in the 1970s to $2.70 in 2004 (though a
silicon shortage has pushed prices up since).
407
Although the wind blows very unevenly around the planet,
the suns radiation strikes our world in more predictable
214 The World in 2030
patterns with the most heat and light being delivered to
equatorial regions.
Clearly, solar technologies will have the greatest
application where there is the most sunlight areas which
also tend to be home to the worlds poorest communities.
In these areas more than 2.5 billion people, almost half of
the global population, still rely on wood, animal manure
and crop residue for their fuels.
408
In these equatorial regions
signicant progress has already been made in harnessing the
suns energy (and, in some cases, improving the lives of local
people).
I.M. Dharmadasa,
409
Professor of Electronic Materials
and Devices at the UKs Shefeld Hallam University (the
consulting referee on this section of my report), has been
pioneering the development and the deployment of solar
photovoltaic devices and systems for decades and has made
signicant breakthroughs
410
in increasing the efciency of
solar power devices.
Professor Dharmadasa was the key instigator behind
the formation of SAREP (South Asia Renewable Energy
Programme) and in his paper Use of Solar Energy For Social
Development And Reduction of Poverty he describes a
project in Sri Lanka which he and his colleagues initiated
and on which he consulted.
In most developing countries, only a small frac-
tion of the population has access to electricity from
their national grids. In Sri Lanka for example about
60 per cent of the population enjoys facilities with
The World in 2030 215
electricity but in some sub-Saharan countries, this
fraction is as low as 10 per cent.
Most of the rural communities use kerosene for light-
ing with its associated re hazards and ill health due
to the poor quality of breathing air. These kerosene
lamps provide low standard living conditions and
the governments of these countries are facing ever
increasing fuel import bills.
The main solution to this comes from stand-alone
home lighting systems, which are already available
on the market. The total cost of this system is about
Rs 50,000 (~300). When the cost is distributed to
pay during the rst eight years, the monthly payment
becomes less than the cost of kerosene oil used per
month. There are over 100,000 systems now success-
fully installed in Sri Lanka and the people are begin-
ning to experience their benets.
Monitoring of GCSE results in one of the villages
showed a substantial improvement after providing
the electricity for lighting, using these systems. In ad-
dition to these improvements in education, removal
of kerosene oil-lamp re hazards, health due to re-
duction of air pollution, the burden of fuel import
bills have completely been eliminated.
411
Professor Dharmadasa is now working with the World
Innovation Foundation and national governments to
replicate this model of low-cost solar energy systems for
rural environments on the Africa continent.
216 The World in 2030
It is increased efciency that will make solar panels (some
made of plastics
412
) of even greater use in sunny climes and of
practical use in higher, more temperate latitudes. Signicant
progress towards greater efciency is being made, as is revealed
by research now being undertaken at Boeing-Spectrolab.
413

Researchers at Boeing-Spectrolab have just succeeded
in building a multi-junction solar cell that achieves
an incredible 40.7% efciency, about twice that of
the reigning champ in this space.
To put this Department of Energy-backed break-
through in perspective, it was less than two months
ago that Silicon Valley-based SunPower announced a
22% efcient cell, and even that model was claimed
to produce 50% more power over a given space than
previous iterations.
414

It is heartening that many experts expect solar energy to be
fully mature by the year 2030. Under the headline Solar
energy has potential to dominate by 2030 [Link]
reported in November 2005:
Professor Andrew Blakers from The Centre for Sustain-
able Energy Systems at the Australian National Univer-
sity will today report to the Greenhouse 2000 Confer-
ence in Melbourne that photovoltaic (PV) solar energy
conversion can be cost-competitive with any low-emis-
sion electricity generation technology by 2030.
His paper describes how extrapolation of the huge
economic and technical gains made by photovoltaics
The World in 2030 217
over the last 15 years gives condence that a dramatic
shift in electricity generation technology over the next
quarter-century is possible.
415
Technological breakthroughs and exciting new develop-
ments in solar-generated power seem to be coming thick and
fast at present. For example, one award-winning British de-
velopment applies the properties of electrically-conducting
nanotechnology plastics to bring down the cost of producing
solar-driven energy generation systems. The announcement
of the 250,000 award made by the Royal Society describes
the technologys potential:
A proposal for developing tools to make energy-ef-
cient and low-cost solar panels and lighting sources
available to a wide market has won an award from
the Royal Society.
Professor Bradley and his colleagues made plans to
commercially develop two production processes for
plastic electronics.
Plastic electronics uses novel organic, carbon-based
semiconductors, instead of the traditional silicon,
gallium arsenide and related inorganic materials.
These new organic semiconductors combine solubil-
ity, allowing solution coating and printing to be used
in the fabrication of devices, and properties, such
as exibility and toughness, with the key functional
characteristics of traditional semiconductors.
218 The World in 2030
The team believes that the development of plastic
electronics can support the widespread adoption of
affordable, environmentally-friendly energy genera-
tion and lighting.
416

Another group of researchers at MIT takes a completely
different approach to reducing the cost of capturing and
harnessing solar energy:
Much more efcient solar cells may soon be possible
as a result of technology that more efciently captures
and uses light. StarSolar, a startup based in Cambridge,
MA, aims to capture and use photons that ordinarily
pass through solar cells without generating electricity.
The company, which is licensing technology developed
at MIT, claims that its designs could make it possible
to cut the cost of solar cells in half while maintaining
high efciency. This would make solar power about as
cheap as electricity from the electric grid.
417
It is clear that the development of solar technology is a eld
that is full of excitement and optimism, not least because
capturing the suns natural energy to provide energy for
our own needs will be the ultimate clean energy source.
And there are many large scale installations of solar power
generation systems already in place or under development.
As The Economist pointed out in March 2007 the worlds
leading high-tech companies are competing to lead the way
in solar power generation:
Last year Microsoft outtted its campus in Silicon
Valley with a solar system from SunPower, a local
The World in 2030 219
company that makes high-efciency (and, some say,
the worlds best-looking) solar panels. A few months
later Microsofts arch-rival, Google, began building
something on an even grander scale - one of the larg-
est corporate solar installations to date.
But all of this may yet be topped by Wal-Mart. In
December the retail giant solicited bids for placing
solar systems on the roofs of many of its supermar-
kets. Besides producing favourable publicity, the ap-
peal of using solar power is obvious. Unlike fossil fu-
els, which produce signicant amounts of pollution
and enormous amounts of greenhouse gases, the
suns energy is clean and its supply virtually limit-
less. In just one hour the Earth receives more energy
from the sun than human beings consume during an
entire year. According to Americas Department of
Energy, solar panels could, if placed on about 0.5 per
cent of the countrys mainland landmass, provide for
all of its current electricity needs.
418
And if fossil fuel energy prices remain high and solar
conversion technologies increase their efciency still further,
solar power may become one of the cheapest sources of
power available.
Futurologists and science ction writers have dreamed
of harnessing solar power on a large scale for many years
(in my 2005 novel Extinction
419
I covered the Earth-
facing side of the Moon with focusing mirrors to harness
the sunlight) and what was once nothing but speculation
is moving closer to reality. In Heat George Monbiot
220 The World in 2030
pondered the idea of using the worlds deserts as giant solar
capture regions:
For years, rogue environmentalists have been point-
ing out that solar electricity generated in the Sahara
could supply all of Europe, the Gobi could power
China and the Chihuahuan, Sonoran, Atacama and
the Great Victoria deserts could electrify their entire
continents. These people have been dismissed as nut-
ters. The development of cheap DC cables
420
sug-
gests that they might one day be proved right.
421
And two reports from the German Aerospace Centre
Concentrating Solar Power for the Mediterranean
422
and
Trans-Mediterranean Interconnection for Concentrating
Solar Power
423
investigate in practical terms how vast new
solar farms in the deserts of North Africa could potentially
solve Europes looming energy crisis and help slash the
continents carbon emissions.
But perhaps the most exciting application of solar energy
lies right above our heads; an average of 3kW of power is
potentially available from every rooftop
424
and this form of
distributed power generation would break the centralised
monopoly of power generation. Many people believe that
the generation of power from fossil fuels, energy that is then
distributed from a central supply, is a key factor in creating
the rich-poor divide in the world. A distributed model of
solar power generation would begin to solve this problem.
Finally in this section on solar energy devices, it is worth
noting that new low-cost spray on or print on plastic solar
The World in 2030 221
conductors have been developed at the New Jersey Institute
of Technology. As [Link] reported in July 2007:
Researchers at New Jersey Institute of Technology
have developed an inexpensive solar cell that can be
painted or printed on exible plastic sheets.
The process is simple, said lead researcher and au-
thor Somenath Mitra, PhD, professor and acting
chair of NJITs Department of Chemistry and En-
vironmental Sciences. Someday homeowners will
even be able to print sheets of these solar cells with
inexpensive home-based inkjet printers. Consumers
can then slap the nished product on a wall, roof or
billboard to create their own power stations.
425
And in the same month MIT Technology Review published
a story revealing that plastic solar cells are reaching record
levels of efciency:
A new process for printing plastic solar cells boosts
the power generated by the exible and cheap form
of photovoltaics. Initial solar cells made with the
technique can, according to a report in todays issue
of Science, capture solar energy with an efciency of
6.5 percent a new power record for photovoltaics
that employ conductive plastics to generate electric-
ity from sunlight. Most photovoltaics are made from
conventional inorganic semiconductors.
426
222 The World in 2030
Hydrogen Fuel
Of all the other renewable energy sources not yet discussed,
it is hydrogen (H
2
) that produces the most optimism for the
long-term prospects for the storage of clean energy produced
from electricity. Hydrogen is the most abundant element in
the universe (comprising 75 per cent of the mass and 90
per cent of its molecules
427
) and harnessing it as a carrier of
power would provide humanity with a virtually unlimited
way to store and carry energy.
Hydrogen is a totally clean fuel that can be produced
(by applying electricity and other means) from a number
of sources (including coal and water) and which, when
burnt, produces only water. Devices called fuel cells
428
(rst
described theoretically in Germany 1838 and rst built in the
UK in 1959) are used to extract energy stored in hydrogen
and there is great hope that hydrogen-powered fuel cells
will one day become a universal form of propulsion for all
forms of motor transport (and, perhaps, aviation) and that
households and businesses will be able to generate their
own power locally from solar/wind-powered hydrogen fuel
cells and will cease to be reliant of national-grid-type energy
distribution systems.
The French futurologist and science-ction writer Jules
Verne
429
knew about the potential for hydrogen as fuel storage
well over a century ago. In his 1874 novel The Mysterious
Island an engineer called Cyrus Harding suggests that
when coal has run out, mankind will burn water to generate
energy:
The World in 2030 223
Water decomposed into its primitive elements
and decomposed, doubtless, by electricity, which
will then have become a powerful and manageable
force Yes my friends, I believe that water will one
day be employed as fuel, that hydrogen and oxygen
which constitute it, used singly or together, will fur-
nish an inexhaustible source of heat and light, of an
intensity of which coal is not capable. Water will be
the coal of the future.
430
Jeremy Rifkin, whose book The Hydrogen Economy is
regarded as one of the great polemics for hydrogen energy,
suggests that not only does hydrogen have the potential
to provide us with carbon-free energy storage, but also has
the potential to allow us to re-design the worlds energy
distribution systems in such a way that will have far-reaching
effect in social organisation:
Were all individuals and communities in the world
to become the producers of their own energy, the re-
sult would be a dramatic shift in the conguration of
power: no longer from the top down but from the
bottom up. Local peoples would be less subject to the
will of far-off centers of power. Communities would be
able to produce many of their own goods and services
and consume the fruits of their own labour. But, be-
cause they would also be connected via the worldwide
communications and energy webs, they would be able
to share their unique commercial skills, products, and
services with other communities around the planet.
This kind of economic self-sufciency becomes the
starting point for global commercial interdependence
224 The World in 2030
and is a far different economic reality than that in
colonial regimes of the past, in which local peoples
were made subservient to and dependent on powerful
forces from the outside.
431
Essentially, Rifkin is arguing for nothing less than a complete
dismantling of centralised fossil-fuel-powered energy
supplies and their replacement with many small regional or
local hydrogen fuel-cell power generators powered locally,
something which Professor I.M. Dharmadasa also believes
to be the correct model for the future (although in his view
direct solar power will play a much larger role in the energy
mix). Professor Dharmadasa points out that only 1.23 volts
of DC electrical current is necessary to release hydrogen by
electrolysis (1.5 volts to allow for system losses) and these
voltages are available today from existing solar photovoltaic
sources.
432
He points out that large-scale production of H
2
is
already possible and it is only the lack of political will that is
holding back a switch to a hydrogen-powered economy.
These ideas about hydrogen as a fuel are more powerful
than they may at rst seem. Replacing state-delivered
or utility-delivered power with locally or domestically-
generated power also shifts political power. No longer
would it be possible for a government to articially boost
a nations economy by subsidising electricity prices and no
longer would it be possible for governments to restrain an
economy by applying price hikes. George Monbiot is also in
favour of moving from a centralised energy supply system
to a distributed energy generation model (an internet of
energy as he calls it) and it is clear that energy autonomy for
a household or locality would dramatically alter the balance
The World in 2030 225
of political power in the world. Rifkin also asserts that a
shift to a distributed energy production model would be
enormously benecial in the ght against climate change:
A wholesale shift away from centralized power gen-
eration using fossil-fuel energy to hydrogen-pow-
ered fuel cells operating on a distributed genera-
tion grid especially if the hydrogen is produced
by using solar, wind, hydro, and geothermal forms
of energy could more dramatically reduce CO
2

emission that could any other single development
currently being pursued.
433
But as desirable as distributed energy generation may seem,
hydrogen power is still at the beginning of its development.
Hydrogen as a fuel for automobiles and trucks is likely to
be the rst widespread application of the clean technology.
The environmental website [Link] is condent
about the benets of hydrogen as a fuel for transport:
The best pollution-free alternative to batteries while
still using clean electric motors is the hydrogen fuel
cell. Hydrogen-powered fuel cells hold enormous
promise as a power source for a future generation
of cars.
Hydrogen is consumed by a pollution-free chemical
reaction not combustion in a fuel cell. The fuel
cell simply combines hydrogen and oxygen chemi-
cally to produce electricity, water, and waste heat.
Nothing else.
434
226 The World in 2030
Ray Kurzweil is also characteristically condent about the
future for this fuel:
The emerging paradigm for energy storage will be
fuel cells, which will ultimately be widely distributed
throughout our infrastructure, another example of the
trend from inefcient and vulnerable centralized facil-
ities to an efcient and stable distributed system.
435
However there are considerable problems to be overcome in
the development of hydrogen fuel cell technology even if the
long-term benets are alluring. As James Canton describes
in The Extreme Future:
Hydrogen has problems other than (current) high
cost. It is unstable and needs to be controlled. The
manufacture of hydrogen requires other energy use
such as nuclear or oil (or geothermal). The technol-
ogy needed to store and pump hydrogen into vehi-
cles is still primitive and not yet adopted for wide
usage. But none of these obstacles is impossible to
overcome. Hydrogen will transform the future of en-
ergy and ensure a more secure and reliable source
of fuel for consumers, business, mass transportation
and even for space travel. Hydrogen is coming fast.
By 2035, or even sooner, hydrogen will be a viable
alternative to oil and gas, meeting as much as 35 per
cent of our energy needs.
436
Perhaps the real difculty in switching to hydrogen as the main
fuel for road transport is the lack of infrastructure. Hydrogen
The World in 2030 227
is difcult to distribute, difcult to store and difcult to
carry on board motor vehicles. Re-equipping petrol stations
to become hydrogen stations will be expensive and will take
a very long time, so much so that many experts doubt that
such a switch-over will have been wholly achieved by 2030.
Jeremy Rifkin lists the difculties that have to be overcome
before hydrogen can become a widely used fuel for vehicle
transportation in the USA:
The key question facing the automobile industry
during the transition to hydrogen-fuel-cell-powered
vehicles is how to produce, distribute, and store hy-
drogen cheaply enough to be competitive with gaso-
line at the pump. Some studies estimate that it would
cost more than $100 billion to create a national in-
frastructure for producing and distributing hydrogen
in bulk. The hydrogen question is the classic chick-
en-and-egg problem. The automobile companies are
reluctant to manufacture direct-hydrogen fuel-cell
cars for fear that the energy companies wont invest
sufcient funds to create thousands of hydrogen re-
fuelling stations. That is why the car companies are
hedging their bets by developing fuel cell cars with
on-board reformers that can convert gasoline and
natural gas to hydrogen. The energy companies, in
turn, are nervous about committing billions of dol-
lars to create a national infrastructure to support hy-
drogen refuelling stations if not enough direct-hydro-
gen fuel-cell vehicles are manufactured and sold.
437
The penultimate word on the future for hydrogen as a fuel for
transportation should go to George Monbiot who, despite
228 The World in 2030
an overall optimism about hydrogen in the long term, is
nothing but a bitter realist when it comes to acknowledging
the problems that will have to be overcome before hydrogen
can be in widespread use:
The most immediate problem is that hydrogen can-
not be bought in lling stations. The owners of fuel-
cell cars need to be sure that they can nd hydrogen
wherever they happen to run out. The lling stations
wont supply it until they have a market, and the
market cant develop until there are supplies.
This is compounded by the problem of storage,
which is not something the owners of stationary fuel
cells need to worry about unless they produce their
own hydrogen. Cars would need to take it with them.
Though the gas is three times as energy-dense as pet-
rol in terms of weight, it is only one tenth as dense in
terms of volume at pressures of 5,000 pounds per
square inch.
This means that a hydrogen powered vehicle would
need a high-pressure fuel tank ten times the size of a
petrol driven cars in order to travel as far. High-pres-
sure tanks would take a long time to ll, and could
be dangerous.
438
The nal word in this section on hydrogen energy for
transport has been saved for our old friend, the joker in the
pack, accelerating, exponential technology development.
Even as energy analysts and futurologists puzzle over how
cars and petrol stations could be converted to carry and
The World in 2030 229
store such a difcult gas (or liquid), a professor at Purdue
University in the USA has announced the development of
a new technique to generate hydrogen in real time (in a
continuous manner) from water via the use of aluminium. If
this announcement turns out to hold the potential suggested
(and although the concept has been patented that remains
a big if ), cars would only have to carry water, a supply
of aluminium pellets and a low-power electrical source to
produce their own hydrogen fuel as they travel:
Purdue University professor Jerry Woodall has dis-
covered a way to make hydrogen out of a reaction
of water and an alloy of aluminum and gallium. The
production technique eliminates the need to store
hydrogen, he said. Mixing water and pellets made
up of the alloy in a tank can produce fuel for a small
engine, or conceivably a car.
The process, along with other recent hydrogen devel-
opments, could work to dispel some of the criticism of
hydrogen as a fuel source in the coming decades.
439

Leaving aside the difculties of storing hydrogen within
vehicles and the problems of providing a re-fuelling
infrastructure, hydrogen as a fuel for domestic power
consumption especially when the electricity required to
produce the hydrogen comes form a renewable source such
as solar or wind-power has a remarkably bright future. As
Jeremy Rifkin explains:
The most important aspect of using renewable re-
sources to produce hydrogen is that the suns energy,
230 The World in 2030
and wind, hydro and geothermal energies, will be
convertible into stored energy that can be applied in
concentrated forms whenever and wherever needed,
and with zero CO
2
emissions. This point needs to be
emphasized. A renewable energy future is made far
more difcult, if not impossible, without using hy-
drogen as a means for energy storage. Thats because
when any form of energy is harnessed to produce
electricity, the electricity ows immediately. So if the
sun isnt shining, or the wind isnt blowing, or the
water isnt owing, or fossil fuels are not available
to burn, electricity cant be generated and economic
activity grinds to a halt. Hydrogen is one very attrac-
tive way to store energy to ensure an ongoing and
continuous supply of power for society.
440
Other Renewable and Sustainable Sources of Energy
It is for the sake of brevity rather than their lack of importance
that I am lumping together other forms of renewable and
sustainable energy in this section of my report.
I will start with the prospects for hydro energy. If full
consideration is given to the populations which must often
be displaced for hydro schemes and consideration given to
the environmental impact of building dams, hydroelectric
power is a fairly green source of energy, but one which,
unfortunately (or fortunately), is almost fully exploited in
Europe.
The World in 2030 231
It may seem surprising that I describe hydro-energy as only
being fairly green; this is because methane builds up on
the bottom of the reservoir created by a dam and, when the
water power is released to drive the turbine which produces
electricity, this methane (a very potent greenhouse gas) is
released into the atmosphere. Thankfully, researchers in
Brazil have recently developed a technique
441
which may
help to extract the methane from the bottom of dam basins
and use it for power generation.
Geothermal energy is completely green (harnessing heat
from rocks) but in Europe the only regions which have such
reachable underground heat in any quantity are Iceland and
Switzerland. As the Swiss government points out:
Switzerland is currently world leader when it comes
to the utilisation of geothermal sensors. No other
country in the world has so many in place in propor-
tion to its surface area!
Sources of hot water below the earths surface (aqui-
fers) can be tapped by drilling, and energy can be ob-
tained from dry rock layers with the aid of enhanced
geothermal systems technology. At temperatures
above 100C, these energy sources can be used for
electricity production, while the residual heat can be
utilised for heating purposes.
442
Iceland is planning to sell power produced from geothermal
heat to the UK and other European customers, as reported
in The Times in May 2007:
232 The World in 2030
The hot volcanic vents of Iceland may be harnessed
to bring electrical power to mainland Europe and
Britain if a plan to pipe geothermal energy under the
North Sea comes to fruition.
The same intense heat that causes the mud to bubble
and geysers to steam on Icelands moonlike surface
will be used to create steam to drive turbines, gen-
erating enough energy to power up to 1.5 million
homes in Europe.
443
Around the world both the USA and Australia have signicant
opportunities to exploit geothermal energy and as these coun-
tries are among the worst polluters with fossil fuel emissions,
they should be encouraged to ramp up exploitation of this
clean energy source. The Australian reported in March 2007:
The head of geothermal development company Geo-
dynamics, Adrian Williams, said yesterday that Aus-
tralias main geothermal resources were in the Cooper
Basin of South Australia. He said the rst big onshore
well to capture hot rock energy would be drilled later
this year, leading to the rst commercialisation of
technology a 40-megawatt power station by 2010.
Dr. Williams said Australia could have as much as
4500 MW of geothermal energy by 2030, or about
10 per cent of current demand.
444

Australian writer Tim Flannery estimates that Australia has
sufcient tappable geothermal energy to provide the nations
energy needs for a century.
445

The World in 2030 233
Power from the oceans (wave power and tidal power)
also offers some limited power generation opportunities
to nations with coastlines. In April 2007 The Economist
outlined future prospects for ocean power:
A fraction of the energy locked up in the oceans
could, in theory, meet the worlds entire elec tri-
city needs. Extracting hydropower from dammed-
up rivers is comparatively easy compared with
harvesting energy from offshore tides and waves,
and then putting it into the grid via underwater
cables. Only 14 countries now operate tidal or
wave-power stations, and most are tiny, experi-
mental and expensive.
446
In Scotland the worlds rst tidal stream energy
capture project was announced by The Scotsman in
March 2007:
Scotland is set to lead the world in harnessing a new
form of green energy by developing the rst com-
mercial tidal stream energy plant on the planet.
Lunar Energy, a leading Scottish renewables compa-
ny, has joined forces with [Link] UK, the company
which runs Powergen, to announce pioneering plans
to develop a subsea tidal stream power farm off the
west coast of Britain within the next two years.
The underwater power system will be capable of gen-
erating up to eight megawatts of electricity, enough
power to supply 5,000 homes.
447

234 The World in 2030
And in September 2007 planning permission was given in
the UK for Wave Hub, a 28 million project off the north
Cornish coast that will provide a sea oor socket allowing
wave-power generators to get their electricity back to shore.
Thirty wave-power generating machines will supply up to
twenty megawatts of power.
In Conclusion on the Future of Energy
Money is now pouring into what is called clean tech (energy
sources and production technologies which are carbon
free or carbon lite) at an unprecedented rate and, where
investment goes, progress follows. As the New York Times
reported in April 2007:
Money is owing into alternative energy compa-
nies so fast that the warning signs of a bubble are
appearing, according to a report on investment in
clean technology by a New York research rm, Lux
Research.
The report also suggests that companies that make
equipment to cleanse air or water, or that process
waste, have been overlooked by investors.
448
Some interesting and non-obvious developments in plastics
are occurring as scientists cast around for ways of harvesting
and recovering energy to head off the shortage that threatens
our future. For example this story appeared in June 2007 on
[Link]:
The World in 2030 235
In an effort to develop a new source of sustainable
energy, researchers at Polytechnic University, the
premier New York-based technology and engineering
higher education institution, have bioengineered a
fuel-latent plastic that can be converted into biodie-
sel. The Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency
has awarded the researchers $2.34 million to advance
this innovative technology and transfer it to indus-
try. The commercialization of the technology will
lead to a new source of green energy to households
worldwide.
449
And, at an individual level, humans are already proving
that energy self-sufciency is achievable, a lesson to which
we should all pay attention. As the following story on
[Link] makes clear, even hydrogen-powered cars
can be part of todays sustainable energy mix:
Mike Strizkis utility bill is zero, thanks to some crea-
tive thinking using renewable energy technologies.
By using solar panels, a hydrogen fuel cell, storage
tanks and an electrolyzer, he has enough electricity
even on the cloudiest days. And Strizki isnt a hermit
living in the dark off of snails and rainwater, either.
His 3,500 square foot house is located in central New
Jersey on 12 acres, with amenities youd see in any
21st century home, like a hot tub and big screen TV.
His renewable energy system even creates hydrogen
he uses to power his fuel-cell car.
450
There are even more radical technologies which hold out
the hope, if not the promise, of abundant clean and cheap
236 The World in 2030
technology in the longer-term future. The most famous (or
infamous) of these is cold fusion,
451
a theoretical concept
which suggests that fusion-power (the same nuclear reaction
process that fuels the sun) might be achievable at close to
room temperature. What was seemingly a false alarm about
such a process being achieved galvanised the scientic
community in 1989 and, since that attempt was proved a
failure, few scientists have wanted to admit they are working
in such a controversial eld.
However, in a 2001 book called The Scientist, The Madman,
The Thief and Their Lightbulb, author Keith Tutt
452
writes
the following about the cold fusion episode:
Was that really the end of the story, though? And was
it the true story? If so, why are laboratories in at least
eight countries still spending millions on cold fusion
research? And, if cold fusion is impossible, how can
it be that there are hundreds of documented experi-
ments which demonstrate that cold fusion effects are
real? How can it be that there is continually stronger
evidence that a small group of scientists have already
gone a long way towards a commercial, viable power
source? Is it possible that parts of the scientic es-
tablishment acted to stamp out a technology which
promised so much?
453
Leaving aside conspiracy theories about the (apparent)
failure of cold fusion, some highly respected scientic
organisations are now making well-publicised progress on
developing components for a full-scale, hot fusion-reactor.
Unlike todays nuclear power stations which produce power
The World in 2030 237
through nuclear ssion,
454
a nuclear fusion
455
power station
would produce no radioactivity and no CO
2
. In April 2007
Sandia National Laboratories (a research and development
organisation funded by the US government) announced an
important breakthrough on the road towards building an
experimental fusion reactor:
The concept of nuclear fusion power (not nuclear
ssion as used in todays nuclear reactors) is the
Holy Grail of energy researchers. Fusion is the atomic
process that powers the Sun and if it were to become
possible to reproduce that process here on Earth hu-
manity would have a safe, clean, limitless supply of
energy (no radioactivity risk, no carbon output).
On April 24th Sandia National Laboratories an-
nounced it had developed an electrical circuit that
should carry enough power to produce the long-
sought goal of controlled high-yield nuclear fusion
and, equally important, do so every 10 seconds. The
device has undergone extensive preliminary experi-
ments and computer simulations at Sandia National
Laboratories Z machine facility.
Fired repeatedly, the machine could be the fusion en-
gine that could form the basis of an electricity gener-
ating plant by the mid 2020s.
456
By 2030 clean fusion power is likely to be a reality and will be
providing the blueprint for how we will generate our power
for later in the century. In 2005 agreement was reached and
multi-national funds were committed to build the worlds
238 The World in 2030
rst fusion reactor in France. As the BBC reported at the
time:
A decision has nally been made to site the 10bn-
euro (6.6bn) Iter nuclear fusion reactor at Cadarache
in France. The announcement in June 2005 brought
to an end months of argument between the project
partners the EU, the US, Japan, Russia, China and
South Korea. India has since also joined the project.
Iter is an experimental reactor that will attempt to
reproduce on Earth the nuclear reactions that power
the Sun and other stars. It will consolidate all that has
been learnt over many decades of study. If it works,
and the technologies are proven to be practical, the
international community will then build a prototype
commercial reactor, dubbed Demo. The nal step
would be to roll out fusion technology across the
globe.
457
It seems that, as always, human ingenuity and technology
development will solve the looming energy crisis that faces
humankind. What matters is how quickly we are able to
replace carbon-emitting fossil fuels with cleaner, more
environmentally friendly sources of energy. My guess is that
by 2030 more than 50 per cent of our energy (in all forms)
will come from such sources.
The World in 2030 239
Section Four
Daily life in 2030
In many ways, daily life in the year 2030 will have been
transformed to the point that if we could magically teleport
ourselves from today to the start of the fourth decade of
the 21st century we would nd life in the developed world
almost unrecognisable.
By 2030 all cars travelling on major roads will be under
the control of satellite and roadside control systems and
many cars will be driving themselves. Apart from the
need to reduce the present appalling death toll from road
accidents
XIII
and the need to squeeze many more cars onto
crowded roads automated vehicle and trafc systems will
make it safer to travel through the extreme weather systems
that we are likely to be suffering constantly in twenty-ve
years time.
All road vehicles (except licensed vintage and classic
vehicles) will produce very low or zero carbon emissions.
Most large cities will operate congestion charging systems
and, in countries with severe trafc congestion, road pricing
will be widespread.
XIII
Almost 1.2 million people are killed each year and 20-50 million are injured or disabled, although
most people are unaware that road trafc injuries are a leading cause of death and disability.
242 The World in 2030
In our homes, schools, factories, shops and leisure
facilities robots with varying degrees of intelligence (and
made largely of plastic) will be our contented slaves,
manufacturing wealth, easing our lives, caring for our needs
and overseeing our security. Software personalities will be
our friends and assistants.
Our energy will be supplied from a mixture of low-carbon
fossil fuel sources, renewable energy sources and individual
consumer-based energy generation from wind-power, solar
power, biofuels and hydrogen fuel cells.
By 2030 we will be constantly connected to what, today, we
can only think of as a super-web and that connection will, for
those of us who chose to make the transition, be a bio-digital
interface. At the very least our senses will be connected to the
super-web by microphones and mini-projectors and, perhaps,
some of us will have direct neural connections between our
own brains and the global brain which is what the super-web
will have become. Our communications and entertainment
will be wholly immersory, multi-media, multi-sensory, 3D,
holographic and fully tactile, telekinetic and olfactory.
By 2030 we will all have alter egos who live out parallel
lives in virtual worlds. You may not yet have your avatar (a
graphic representation of your chosen personality) wandering
around Second Life (a virtual, parallel world) but in a few
years time you will wonder how we all managed before we
had our spaces in online parallel worlds.
I have long been convinced that humans are primarily
virtual creatures. Language itself is virtual a collection of
The World in 2030 243
arbitrary sounds that a community agreed to bestow with
meaning. Painting, writing, money and music are all virtual
technologies for expressing the world around us, for the
generation of pleasure, for the storing of knowledge and the
storing of value. Even the colours around us dont exist in
their own right; it is our brains that provide the hues of
red, green and blue and all of the subtle combinations that
we perceive. Outside of our heads there are only varying
wavelengths of light.
We are so virtual that I believe our species would be better
described as homo virtualis rather than homo sapiens and it is
precisely for this evolutionary reason that I am so sure that
we will all spend much of our lives in parallel virtual worlds;
it is our natural habitat.
Writing in 2002 Jeremy Rifkin clearly saw this trend
emerging amongst the young:
Whereas previous generations dened freedom in
terms of autonomy and exclusivity each person is a
self-contained island the children of the Web have
grown up in a very different technological environ-
ment, in which autonomy is thought of (if at all) as
isolation and death, and in which freedom is more
likely to be viewed as the right to be included in
multiple relationships. Their identities are far more
bound up in the networks to which they afliate. For
them, time is virtually simultaneous, and distances
hardly matter. They are increasingly connected to
everyone and everything by way of an electroni-
cally mediated central nervous system that spans the
244 The World in 2030
whole of the Earth and seeks to encompass virtually
everything in it. And, with each passing day, they be-
come more deeply embedded in a larger social organ-
ism, in which notions of personal autonomy make
little sense and the feeling of unlimited mobility is
circumscribed by the sheer density and interactivity
that bind everyone so tightly together.
458
If you dont yet have an account with Second Life,
459

MySpace,
460
[Link],
461
Facebook
462
or any of the other sites
which offer both ctional and non-ction alternative
worlds, I will bet that your children do. It is a generational
thing. If you want to know the future, watch your children.
Just in case you are wholly unfamiliar with Second Life,
here is a short description provided by MIT Technology
Review:
Second Life, which started out four years ago as a
1-square-kilometer patch with 500 residents, has
grown into almost 600 square kilometers
463
of terri-
tory spread over three minicontinents, with 6.9 mil-
lion registered users and 30,000 to 40,000 residents
online at any moment. Its a world with birdsong,
rippling water, shopping malls, property taxes, and
realistic physics.
And life inside is almost as varied as it is outside.
I help out new citizens, I rent some houses on some
spare land I have, I socialize, says a longtime Sec-
ond Lifer whose avatar goes by the name Alan Cyr. I
dance far better than I do in real life. I watch sunsets
The World in 2030 245
and sunrises, go swimming, exploring, riding my Sec-
ond Life Segway. I do a lot of random stuff.
464
And, only a few months later, a correspondent from The
Guardian wrote in July 2007:
It is a boom-town like no other in history. In less
than four years, Second Life, the virtual metropolis
where anyone can become a cyber citizen simply
by logging on, has grown from nothing to a city four
times the area of Manhattan, frequented by nearly
eight million people. Its population is spiralling and
real-estate prices are going through the roof as its vir-
tual land is sold to users for Linden dollars, which
can now actually be exchanged for US dollars.
465
I am now certain that virtual worlds will play a major role
not just in social life, but also in business, politics and all
other spheres of human activity.
I.B.M. regularly holds meetings
466
with clients in Second
Life, meetings which the company claims are far more
productive than conventional videoconferences. Whats
more, the company has observed that after a meeting in
Second Life participant avatars often hang around talking
afterwards, just as they would do in real world meetings.
XIV
By 2030 there will be a plethora of alternative worlds, all
of them multi-sensory, 3-dimensional and even holographic.
XIV
And the Roman Catholic Church has already sent Jesuit Missionaries into the parallel world of Sec-
ond Life in the hope of saving virtual souls.
246 The World in 2030
It will be almost impossible to tell the difference between a
real world experience and a virtual experience and many of
us will be engaged with the real world and several virtual
worlds (and other versions of ourselves) at one and the same
time.
On our way towards our virtual lives of the future we
will be able to understand, and to speak and write, in all
languages, as super-intelligent computers on our body and
in the networks translate speech and the written word in real
time.
XV
On the other hand, some aspects of daily life in 2030 will
seem very similar to today. We will still live in houses and
apartments as we do today (although even older properties
will have been upgraded to maximum energy efciency),
children will still go to school (the interpersonal dynamic
between teachers and children and between children
and their peers is a vital part of learning that cannot be
replaced wholly by virtual communications) and we will,
it is to be hoped, still have all of the political, legal and
social institutions which make the developed economies
civilised; parliaments, the law, police, free media, hospitals,
universities and so on.
As the noted American futurist John Naisbitt remarks in
his 2006 book, Mind Set! Reset Your Thinking and See The
Future:
XV
Ford Motor Co. began using machine translation software in 1998 and has so far translated 5 million
automobile assembly instructions into Spanish, German, Portuguese and Mexican Spanish. Assembly
manuals are updated in English every day, and their translations some 5,000 pages a day are
beamed overnight to plants around the world.
The World in 2030 247
Whether cell phones can display television and calls
are made via the Internet, your bathtub lled by tak-
ing off your clothes, or your refrigerator opened by
a rumble in your stomach, these are just other ways
of doing what we do easier, faster, further, more
and longer and not the substance of our lives. We
go to school, get married, and have kids and send
them to school. Home, family, and work are the great
constants.
467
But even if these great constants are still holding true by
2030 (and they wont be a little later on in the century) it is
hard to imagine the quiddity of life in almost a quarter of a
centurys time. Futurologists often use the trick of looking
backwards to help them imagine the future and, by thinking
back to life in the early 1980s we can assess how different life
is today compared with the era of big hair, padded shoulders
and the hits of Tears For Fears, Spandau Ballet and Orchestral
Manoeuvres In The Dark.
How many emails did you send in 1982 (and what sort of
computer did you have)? What sort of mobile phone were
you using back then, and how many channels were available
on your TV set (and how large and at was its screen and
how many DVDs did you buy or rent)? How many airbags
were in your car, which Sat-Nav system did you use and how
often did you ll your car with unleaded petrol (or diesel)?
How many no-frills, low-cost ights did you make a
year? How many digital photographs did you take and how
much did you spend online each year? How much of your
food was certied as organic and how many of your friends
248 The World in 2030
and family smoked cigarettes? How much consideration did
you give to climate change, the environment and recycling?
And what percentage of your consumer goods and items of
clothing were made locally and how many were imported
from low-cost economies?
Most people would agree that in the developed world there
has been very substantial technological and social change in
the last twenty-ve years and, in our attempt to imagine what
life might be like in 2030 we have to remind ourselves about
accelerating, exponential technology development. This
phenomenon means that we will enjoy (or suffer, depending
on your point of view) as much technological development
in the next eight years as we have seen in the last twenty
years. And because exponential means exponential, we will
see as much change again in the next four to ve years and
as much change again in the next two to three years.
So by the time we get to 2030 (no doubt exhausted and
out of breath, but perhaps also exhilarated and excited) we
will have seen as much new technological development and
progress as we saw in the whole of the 20
th
century. And
during the 21
st
century as a whole we will see the equivalent
to 20,000 years worth
468
of technological development and
progress at todays (2007) rate of technological progress.
I am often asked why I am an optimist about the future
when so many indicators suggest that major problems
threaten to overtake the world. Why dont I factor for a
backlash occurring within the communist regime in China,
a backlash against capitalism and consumerism that could
completely destabilise the worlds stock markets and lead
The World in 2030 249
to a massive global recession? Why dont I consider the
likelihood that secular and modernising Turkey might go into
reverse and nd itself being ruled by Islamic fundamentalists,
a move that could alter the entire balance of power in the
Middle East? And why dont I worry about the possibility
that Iran (or North Korea) may be well advanced with the
development of nuclear weapons, weapons that it may very
likely use?
The answer is that I do consider all of these things,
and some of them may indeed happen, but the long view
of human history is one of consistent and substantial
improvement in living conditions, a trend so clear that it is
unarguable. As John Naisbitt observes:
The history of civilization is that things get better.
Life expectancy, living conditions, and freedom of
choice have improved over the millennia, despite all
setbacks and shortcomings.
469
It is for this reason, and in particular because such substantial
improvements in poverty reduction, healthcare and wealth
generation from business efciency have been made in the
last half century, that I view the immediate future with a
rm but realistic optimism. Any of the dire events I mention
above (and there are many other potential problems I did
not list) may occur, and there will undoubtedly be major
setbacks to world progress in the 21
st
century, just as there
have been in previous centuries. But futurologists are trend
spotters; we identify the most powerful trends occurring in
the present and the immediate past and extrapolate their
likely path forward into the future. Todays most dominant
250 The World in 2030
trend is accelerating, exponential technology development
and it is this phenomenon that will do most to shape our
lives in a generations time.
The Surveillance Society
Life in 2030 will be pursued within surveillance societies,
470

at least in the developed world. If this seemingly-Orwellian
prediction appears chilling to you, it is necessary to separate
the notion of Big Brothers agenda from the use of cameras
for improved security. In the ght between the need for
individual personal privacy and societys need for increased
security, the battles have all been going securitys way.
In 2001, in the wake of the September 11
th
terrorist
atrocity in New York, Wired magazine was advising its
readers to stop worrying about public-space surveillance and
learn to live with it:
Cell phones that pinpoint your location. Cameras
that track your every move. Subway cards that re-
member. We routinely sacrice privacy for conve-
nience and security. So stop worrying. And get ready
for your close-up.
The terrorist assault on America shifted the balance
between privacy and security. What was considered
Orwellian one week seemed perfectly reasonable -
even necessary the next. Politicians who routinely
clash were marching in lockstep.
471
The World in 2030 251
But despite the need for increased security in our terrorist-
threatened world, the growth of cameras in city centres,
shopping malls, highways, airports, rail stations and other
frequently populated spots will certainly threaten our
civil liberties and will give rise to some potentially serious
problems.
The reason that most people are sanguine about the
proliferation of surveillance technology (not just cameras)
is that they suspect that not only is no one looking at the
millions of images and mountains of data generated (unless a
problem occurs), but Big Brother (i.e. the State) has turned
out to be more like a benevolent moron than a sinister
manipulator of individual lives. The failure of our police to
track and apprehend so many criminals (despite all of the
technology available) indicates how low the current threat
to individual rights and liberties remains.
But this could change nothing can be ruled out when
politics is considered. For this reason long before we get to
2030 we must strengthen our national and federal laws to
control who has access to such surveillance information and
we must develop much stricter rules about how it can be used.
When you consider that your mobile phone is transmitting
its location to its cellular network 800 times every second, it
becomes clear that details about all of our public movements
are available, should anyone have the power of access and
wish to look. Equally, RFID payment systems such as the
plastic Oyster Card used in Londons public transport
network, generate a complete database of your movements
on the system. By 2030 personal, local, national and global
networks will be recording your every move.
252 The World in 2030
However, by 2030, we too will be part of Big Brothers
surveillance team. We ourselves will be videoing our
surroundings every moment we are outside of our homes.
This is not because we will have become so self-absorbed
that we want to watch endless playbacks or ourselves taking
the kids to school, or meeting business clients; it will be for
the purposes of personal and family security.
XVI

The cost of digital data storage has collapsed in recent
years and the amount of memory storage available has grown
in accordance with the law of accelerating, exponential
technology development. By 2030 computer storage systems
will offer so much storage space, and cost so little, that the
price of capturing everything will be almost too small to
measure.
As a result we will use small cameras and microphones
woven into our clothes (or worn as lapel pins, broaches
or jewellery) to constantly record all of our surroundings,
sending back the images wirelessly to a remote storage
system via the super-web, or pervasive internet of the air,
a network of networks that will be available as freely, if
not quite as cheaply, as oxygen. We will only ever review
this date-and-time-stamped imagery if there is an incident
(and every potential criminal will know that every citizen
is constantly capturing and transmitting events in their
immediate surroundings).
XVI
The UK is the most advanced surveillance society in the world with 4.2 million CCTV cameras de-
ployed and British police and parking wardens are already videoing everything on a continuous basis
during shifts of duty. Other law enforcement agencies around the world will follow suit.
The World in 2030 253
If we have a car accident (whilst travelling on an
unautomated back road), our 360 degree video capturing
systems will provide rm evidence of who was at fault. If
we nd ourselves in a threatening situation we will have
the comfort of knowing that we are transmitting to base.
These vast pools of data, the majority of which will never be
retrieved, will also be available (under strict legal controls) to
supplement information captured about our environment
by the police and security services.
Family surveillance systems for the increased security of
our children, and of the vulnerable in society, will be another
powerful driver as we begin to video and store all of our
activities outside our homes. While at their desks (or on the
shop oor or in the factory) working parents are frequently
anxious about the safety of their children and web cams in
nurseries
472
are a trend which reveals just how we will be
monitoring our children long before 2030. Children will all
be given devices which will include GPS navigation systems,
mobile phones and video cameras we dont yet have a
good name for such devices, even though they already exist
in some mobile phones. Tracking a childs whereabouts
(and systems that automatically report back to a service
which monitors that a child is where he or she should be
at a given time) will remove much anxiety from working
parents lives.
Similar systems will track and oversee the vulnerable in
society, the elderly, the sick and the frail, bringing greater
security and comfort to them and to those who care for
them. As I describe in the next section, Human Health
and Longevity, these systems will also monitor their users
254 The World in 2030
vital signs and may well provide front line interventionist
medical care.
Another huge driver of continuous personal environmental
data capture will be businesss need to record its activities for
legal protection but, even more importantly, for a new form
of wealth generation that I call Business Process Intellectual
Capital. This clumsy phrase (necessary because we do not
yet have appropriate language for this new concept) refers to
companies recording how they do what they do. For example,
as a company builds a new factory in Mexico, every meeting
with government ofcials, planners, builders, architects,
environmentalists, labour unions and all other involved
parties will be captured and stored in the company network
of databases. Every component used in the manufacture of
the factory will be communicating its position and condition
to the same databases and every drawing, email, phone call,
text message, etc. will also be stored (all interactively linked
with semantic encoding
473
and automatic updating).
When the project is completed the new factory may have
cost $600 million dollars. But what would be the potential
value of all of that data captured during the building project
to another similar company planning to build a new factory
in Mexico? Clearly there will be a substantial value in such
data and accountancy regulators are now working out how
to value and maintain such Business Process Intellectual
Capital before allowing this entirely new form of wealth to
appear on corporate balance sheets.
Such new forms of value will be generated by almost
all organisations, whether they design golf courses,
The World in 2030 255
produce plastic products or install congestion charging
schemes inside cities. If all of the efforts to design and
install the congestion charging scheme for London had
been captured in such a database (all the failures as well
as the successes along the way), imagine how valuable
that data might be to all of the other cities now planning
to introduce their own congestion charging schemes.
London taxpayers would have earned some additional
return from their large investment.
So, partly driven by our need for increased security, and
partly driven by businesses capturing new forms of wealth,
we will all become used to living in an always on, always
connected society which is permanently recording. We will
all have access to the off switch in 2030, but only in our
private surroundings.
Work and Leisure
Fifty years ago it was widely predicted that technological
automation would produce so much wealth and leisure time
that by the year 2000, people in the developed world would
only be working a couple of days a week (at maximum).
Those predictions were inuenced by Kurt Vonneguts
474

rst novel, Player Piano
475
which was published in 1952.
His story was about a future world where computers and
automation have so improved the efciency of production
that very few people need to work, yet all of the goods that
anyone could want are easily produced.
256 The World in 2030
But although Kurt Vonnegut made it clear in his book
that people were unhappy because they had not yet adapted
to a life without work, pundits and journalists seized on
his top-line ideas and regurgitated them over the next two
decades without any such qualication.
Their predictions have been proved wrong, as we all
know now from our own experience. As Tom Forester, Senior
Lecturer, School of Computing & Information Technology,
Grifth University, Australia points out:
The vast majority who are in the workforce appear
to be working harder than ever. There is very little
sign of the leisure society having arrived yet! Ac-
cording to one survey, the amount of leisure time
enjoyed by the average US citizen shrunk by a stag-
gering 37 per cent between 1973 and 1989. Over the
same period, the average working week, including
travel-to-work time, grew from under 41 hours to
nearly 47 hours a far cry from the 22 hours some-
one predicted in 1967!
476

The element missing from those predictions about a coming
leisure society is the human need to work, to contribute,
for a person to constantly improve his or her own lot, and
that of the family. Even when substantial wealth has been
amassed most people continue in some form of work. This
is not greed; it is the evolutionary imperative that ensures
the survival of the human species.
As the Danish futurist Rolf Jensen puts it in The Dream
Society:
The World in 2030 257
In the rich countries we have made a collective deci-
sion to have a limited amount of spare time on our
hands, getting more money to spend during this time
in return. Had we chosen to benet from our advanc-
es in technology by increasing spare time instead of
increasing afuence we might have worked 20-hour
weeks today. We have elected not to go for this op-
tion we would have had too little money to spend
in all this spare time and, besides, work has become
more interesting, enough to rival our spare time.
477
In 2030 well be working just as hard as today, although
the ways in which we work will have changed, and well be
playing hard, just as so many successful people do today
(although our leisure pursuits will also have changed).
Lets take work rst. The developed world is outsourcing
its manufacturing and some of its services to the developing
world e.g. China, India and Thailand. This trend will
continue until the populations of those countries become
so wealthy that local wage costs no longer offer competitive
advantage for global corporations to base manufacturing or
service operations there. After that probably by around 2030
we will outsource such work to robots and software agents.
In The Hydrogen Economy Jeremy Rifkin writes:
Within a matter of a few decades, the cheapest work-
ers in the world will not be as cheap as the intelligent
technologies that will replace them, from the factory
oor to the front ofce. By the middle decades of
the 21
st
century, we will likely be able to produce
258 The World in 2030
goods and services for everyone on Earth with only
a small fraction of the human workforce we now em-
ploy. This will force us to rethink what human beings
will do when they are no longer needed to labour in
the marketplace.
478
In the developed world an information economy has already
replaced the locally-based manufacturing economy (except
in some exceptional cases such as plastics manufacture
where the weight-to-volume ratio of the end products make
a nonsense of shipping raw material around the globe) and
the information economy will morph into what, for want of
a better term, might be called a content economy. Instead
of processing information, we will be creating it (or editing,
designing or criticising content).
Attached almost permanently to the super-web, the
trend for people to work independently of central ofces
and locations will have continued, but there will still be a
need for regular physical meetings of work colleagues a
requirement that the British management writer Charles
Handy
479
calls the need for an ofce clubhouse because
only regular personal, physical contact can create team spirit
and a shared culture.
Many people will be working alongside robots (see
below), especially in the caring and security professions and,
by 2030, it will have become a common sight to see robots
driving cars (not a robot seated at a steering wheel, but the
cars themselves performing as robots), serving in shops,
working on building sites, ghting res and standing behind
immigration ofcers at ports and airports.
The World in 2030 259
Our physical interface to the tools of work will nally have
changed and by 2030 the keyboard, mouse and screen display
of todays computers will have largely but not completely
disappeared. Speech recognition, retinal displays and auto-
projection displays will have replaced todays interfaces but,
for those who still require it keyboards (virtual and physical)
will still be available on command. Just as we see today, many
people on the streets will appear to be talking to themselves
as they communicate with their software assistants and with
other humans both locally and at long distance.
Leisure
Our leisure activities in 2030 will be similar to todays but
our time spent in virtual leisure (watching movies, playing
games, chatting with each other, exchanging videos, etc.) will
be a lot more intense.
The multi-media, multi-sensory experience offered by
the ultra-high bandwidth super-web of 2030 will produce
sensations almost indistinguishable from reality. Soon after
our timeline of 2030 humans will begin to attach their senses
directly to the super-web and, at that point, virtual experience
will be identical to physical experience (which is translated
for our brains by our own internal sensory apparatus).
We will join more parallel worlds on the super-web (as
young people are doing today), we will earn money in these
alternative worlds and, for many, the line between playing
and working in such spheres will become completely blurred.
260 The World in 2030
By 2030 you may very well meet a property developer who
doesnt own a single property in the real world, but is busy
developing a virtual real estate (as some pioneers are doing
today).
480
We will fall in love on the super-web and we will have sex
in the same space. We will make rm long-term friends who
we never physically meet and, for many, the online world
(what a quaint term!) will become far more important in
their lives than the physical world.
The nature of retailing and of shopping in general is
undergoing great change and there are strong trends to
be seen which suggest that for most of us the activity of
shopping will have been divided into two new discrete
activities by 2030.
Utilities shopping buying repeat and routine items will
mostly be done online and will, in some instances, become
automated as your smart home environment senses the need
for milk, eggs, tissues, washing power and other everyday
items. These will be ordered from your preferred supplier and
either delivered to your door or left for your collection.
Discretionary shopping the shopping that you choose
to do will have become retail experiences in which
shoppers will take pleasure in the leisure pursuit of selecting
clothes, high-end cars, organic fresh food, furniture, etc. To
maintain prot margins within their physical outlets retailers
are already designing themed shops and it is likely that in
twenty-ve years high-end retail parks will have become a
holiday destination in themselves (like todays Dubai).
The World in 2030 261
Even as shopping develops into a leisure pursuit, smart
materials will be changing the nature of the physical
world around us. The coming marriage of molecular-
nanotechnology and the plastics industry promises to
deliver astonishing environments for our lives in 2030. This
prediction comes from the [Link] website:
Picture, if you will, a chair that automatically adjusts
its shape and temperature for each user, walls that
change color and texture at your whim, and a display
screen where objects come out of its at surface and
toward you.
Its nanoplastics the theoretical fusion of traditional
plastics and the developing eld of nanotechnology,
in which microscopic machines and other objects are
constructed atom by atom.
The hypothetical eld of nanoplastics represents a
new conceptual landscape for product design in the
home one in which the home of tomorrow is a
system of truly intelligent, adaptive, self-organizing
products.
Computers the size of a blood cell would be con-
tained within nanoplastic materials, giving objects
enormous processing power (intelligence). Sen-
sors and emitters would be constructed to absorb
and transmit pressure, sound, and nearly the entire
electromagnetic spectrum. These would provide
nanoplastic materials with the ability to sense their
surroundings and to respond with physical change
262 The World in 2030
or the transmission of sound, light, heat, or other
emissions.
481
But in the rst decade of the 21
st
century we dont have to
rely entirely on speculation about the various sorts of super
plastic which will be in use by 2030. Although not based on
nanotechnology, an announcement made in June 2007 by
researchers at the University of Illinois caught the worlds
headlines. Under the strap-line Plastic That Heals Itself the
MIT Technology review reported:
Researchers at the University of Illinois at Urbana-
Champaign (UIUC) have made a polymer material
that can heal itself repeatedly when it cracks. Its a sig-
nicant advance toward self-healing medical implants
and self-repairing materials for use in airplanes and
spacecraft. It could also be used for cooling microproc-
essors and electronic circuits, and it could pave the way
toward plastic coatings that regenerate themselves.
Modeled on human skin, the new material that heals
itself multiple times is made of two layers. The poly-
mer coating on top contains tiny catalyst pieces scat-
tered throughout. The substrate contains a network
of microchannels carrying a liquid healing agent.
When the coating cracks, the cracks spread down-
ward and reach the underlying channels, which ooze
out healing agent. The agent mixes with the catalyst
and forms a polymer, lling in the cracks.
482
And completely new methods of producing plastic will
mean that biomass (rather than oil) becomes another
The World in 2030 263
source of raw material. The UKs Royal Society of Chemists
points out:
Today the interest in plastics based on renewable
raw materials has increased considerably. The aim
here is to move away from petroleum-based plas-
tics towards renewable raw materials, whilst at the
same time trying to synthesize new products with
special, desirable properties. For example, sugars
are used as the alcohol components in the pro-
duction of polyurethanes, and scientists are trying
to better exploit raw materials, such as cellulose,
which are available in large amounts. Products
which are biologically degradable, i.e. which can
easily be disposed of after use, are also gaining
considerable interest.
483
And under the headline Plastic That Grows On Trees
the website [Link] reported in June 2007:
It has been an elusive goal for the legion of chem-
ists trying to pull it off: replace crude oil as the root
source for plastic, fuels and scores of other industrial
and household chemicals with inexpensive, nonpol-
luting renewable plant matter.
Scientists took a giant step closer to the biorenery
today, reporting in the journal Science that they have
directly converted sugars ubiquitous in nature to an
alternative source for those products that make oil
so valuable, with very little of the residual impurities
that have made the quest so daunting.
484
264 The World in 2030
And yet another astonishing development in plastics, one
that promises to make our environment both more beautiful
and safer, was detailed in The Economist in August 2007
under the heading Opal Fruits:
A group of researchers from the University of South-
ampton, in England, and the German Plastics Insti-
tute in Darmstadt, led by Jeremy Baumberg, have dis-
covered how to create a plastic with the gemstones
iridescent properties. Their invention could be used
to make a sparkling substitute for paint, banknotes
that are hard to counterfeit and chemical sensors that
can act as visible sell-by dates.
Dr. Baumberg has built his opalescent material
from scratch. He and his team grew tiny polystyrene
spheres until they were some 200 nanometres across,
before hardening them with a blast of heat. They
then coated the spheres with a sticky polymer before
heating them again. As the mixture was baked, the
spheres moved naturally into a face-centred cubic
structure.
To use the lm to detect food spoilage, Dr. Baum-
berg proposes adding a sprinkle of carbon particles
even smaller than the polystyrene spheres. These
would nestle in the spaces between the spheres and
cause the material to scatter light from even more an-
gles, making it yet more iridescent. This arrangement
could be tuned to react to specic toxic chemicals.
Food packaging made from such a material would
thus change colour as the rot set in.
The World in 2030 265
Such packaging need not be expensive. The poly-
mer spheres and carbon particles arrange themselves
spontaneously into the correct crystal structure when
encouraged by a little heat, so manufacturing opales-
cent lm should be easy. Indeed Merck, a German
chemical company that was a partner in the research,
has already produced rolls of the stuff a metre wide
and 100 metres long. Perfect for wallpaper.
485
Because so much of our time will be spent on the super-
web it is likely that the present trend towards increased
sporting activity and increased public support for sports will
be even stronger by 2030 (although the arrival of genetic
enhancements for sports competitors will make the policing
of fair competition a nightmare and why is it considered fair
today for Tiger Woods to compete in golf tournaments when
his vision has been enhanced to 20/15
486
by laser surgery?).
In entertainment, the current strong trend to the visual,
away from the written word, will accelerate as visual forms
of entertainment and interactivity become more and more
appealing (despite the fact that book sales are increasing year
on year; this is the effect of overall economic growth and,
in comparative terms, book sales are falling behind the sales
of faster-growing visual entertainment and information). As
a life-long career writer, I nd it painful to write these words
but I am certain of the decline of my chosen medium.
In Mind Set! John Naisbitt observes:
In a triumphal march, movies, TV, videos, and DVDs
are replacing storytellers and books. It is a visual
266 The World in 2030
culture embedded from childhood, and this cul-
ture is taking over the world at the expense of the
written word. With it, the novel, the cradle of fan-
tasy, is not dead as has been announced so many
times but it is losing blood at an alarming rate.
And Naisbitt goes on to list eight social developments which
underscore the demise of the written word in favour of visual
communication. These are:
1. The slow death of the newspaper culture
2. Advertising back to a picture is worth
thousands of words
3. Upscale design for common goods
4. Architecture as visual art
5. Fashion, architecture and art
6. Music, video and lm
7. The changing role of photography
8. The democratization of the American art
museum
487
And to this list I would add two further elements that are
hastening the decline of the written word:
9. The arrival of low-cost software tools for home
photo editing and video production
10. The emergence of the web as a medium in
which anyone can publish and distribute
visual (and written) material
The World in 2030 267
Virtual Assistants
Perhaps one of the developments that will be of most
importance to our future lives will be the arrival of software
personalities who become our personal assistants, our
companions and our intimates. These companions will
organise our leisure time as well as helping in our work
activities.
In a section below I discuss the ethical and moral issues
we will face as human-like intelligence emerges within our
machines, but here I want to describe how we may rst get
to know the software personalities who will become our
permanent and untiring assistants.
Initially, robot pets and companions will be endowed
with human-like characteristics and a simulacrum of
emotional response (once this arrives our powerful drive to
anthropomorphise non-human creatures will do the rest).
An early example of such work in robotics was described by
MIT Technology Review in mid-2007:
Scientists in the Netherlands are endowing a robotic
cat with a set of logical rules for emotions. They be-
lieve that by introducing emotional variables to the
decision-making process, they should be able to cre-
ate more-natural human and computer interactions.
The hardware for the robot, called iCAT,
488
was de-
veloped by the Dutch research rm Philips and de-
signed to be a generic companion robotic platform.
268 The World in 2030
By enabling the robot to form facial expressions
using its eyebrows, eyelids, mouth, and head posi-
tion, the researchers are aiming to let it show if it
is confused, for example, when interacting with its
human user. The long-term goal is to use Dastanis
emotional-logic software to assist in human and ro-
bot interaction, but for now, the researchers intend
to use the iCAT to display internal emotional states
as it makes decisions.
489
And American scientists are also working hard to develop
responses in robots that might be described as emotional
or as feelings. As The Daily Telegraph reported in
February 2007:
At present, commercially available robots such as au-
tomatic vacuum cleaners are little more than drones
capable of carrying out only one task. However,
speaking at the American Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science in San Francisco yesterday, a
panel of robotics experts said robots capable of mul-
tiple domestic tasks, that can also provide compan-
ionship for their owners, will be available within 10
years. And the scientists claim it is already possible to
give robots such feelings.
A number of groups around the world are now de-
veloping robots that have basic emotions in a bid to
motivate the machines.
If a robot feels happy after it has cleaned a dirty car-
pet particularly well, then it will apparently seek out
The World in 2030 269
more dirt to do the same. Similarly, if the robot feels
guilt or sadness at having failed at a task, it will try
harder next time.
490
Now, imagine it is the year 2015. The device formerly
known as a mobile phone has been getting ever more stylish
and ever more capable while its networks have undergone
similar upgrades to become ultra-band, multi-media and
multi-sensory. Your network provider offers you an upgrade
to a new device (what will we call it?) and included with it is
a software agent a personality and the software invites
you to specify a gender and a name for your new assistant.
Moving on imagine it is now the year 2030, and imagine
that I was the person who fteen years ago had named my
new phone-inhabiting assistant. I called her Maria.
Well, at rst Maria wasnt very capable. She could dial
numbers for me when I told her to dial Mum or to call my
brother, but even though she knew what news resources I
liked to access on my mobile device, and which stocks and
shares I was keeping my eye on, she couldnt do much more
to help me. Oh, but she did manage the digital money I kept
on my phone.
But the software agent I called my Maria was upgraded
regularly and automatically over the networks and, as I
changed and upgraded my mobile device every year or so,
Maria itted wirelessly over to inhabit the new, ever more
capable models. And, as the years passed, Maria learned a
lot about me. With her increasing intuition, ingenuity and
intelligence Maria came to learn that I didnt always mean
270 The World in 2030
precisely what I said and that my instructions were often
confusing. Maria learned how to second-guess me (Google
was the rst articial intelligence able to do this way back in
2007) and, sometime around 2020 I found myself talking to
Maria as if she were a close human friend. As I had complete
control over Maria, and could mute her with a command,
I felt no insecurity about pouring out my most intimate
doubts and fears, nor any hesitation about sometimes
boasting shamelessly. And in all these exchanges Maria
was interested, supportive and understanding completely
without competitive ego. She was also outrageously funny
and some of her wicked observations about my friends were
priceless.
Today Maria still lives in my mobile access device,
although she talks to me through a tiny earpiece that I wear
all of my waking hours. The earpiece allows all ambient sound
through at the normal levels and only focuses on electronic
signals when I am making a call, joining a videoconference
or talking to Maria. Maria projects all video signals onto my
retinas from the cool and very stylish spectacles that we
all wear these days and that many of us call viewpers (or
viewps for short).
I suspect that Maria has been a lot more intelligent than
me for some time, but she is clever enough not to let me
know it. Today, Maria arranges everything in my life every
meeting, every form of travel and even my social diary.
She conducts all of the necessary admin and arranges all
payments without me being aware of her activities. Every
day we have our meeting during which time she gives
me a full account of everything that has happened in the
The World in 2030 271
last twenty-four hours and I am able to make any changes
to the arrangements that she has made although I rarely
have to.
Soon, Maria is going to live inside my head. I was visiting
my plastic surgeon the other day to discuss what will be
done in my next ve-year cosmetic body upgrade when
he suggested that I might like to take the opportunity of
upgrading Maria as well. He asked if I would be interested
in transferring Marias personality to one of the new plastic
nano-scale implants that will interface directly with the
visual and auditory circuits in my brain.
Now, back in the real world of 2007, I will admit that
the last paragraph sounds so fanciful that many readers will
regard it as pure science ction. But it is already possible to
control video games with neural output, as The Economist
reported in March 2007 under the heading, Brain-controlled
games and other devices should soon be on sale.
How would you like to rearrange the famous sarsens
of Stonehenge just by thinking about it? Or improve
your virtual golf by focusing your attention on the
ball for a few moments before taking your next putt
on the green-on-the-screen? Those are the promises
of, respectively, Emotiv Systems and NeuroSky, two
young companies based in California, that plan to
transport the measurement of brain waves from the
medical sphere into the realm of computer games. If
all goes well, their rst products should be on the mar-
ket next year. People will then be able to tell a com-
puter what they want it to do just by thinking about
272 The World in 2030
it. Tedious ddling about with mice and joysticks will
become irritants of the past.
491

I am convinced that from 2030 onwards humans will not
only be controlling computers directly from their brain
output but we will also be implanting software assistants
into our bodies and beginning to communicate with them
via neural interfaces.
Wealth
We, in the developed world, are all going to be substantially
better off in 2030 as information technology continues to
suck uncertainty and friction out of business processes,
commercial transactions and daily life. Friction in this
context is a lack of knowledge about where the best price for
a product or service can be obtained, a lack of knowledge
about the real-time structural integrity of a bridge or the
precise whereabouts of a particular item of cargo. Friction
is when a supermarket shopping cart doesnt know what it
contains, nor what the prices of those goods are. Friction
is when you cant read your emails on a subway train or
in an airliner. Friction is when you glance at a restaurant
in a town strange to you and you dont automatically see
the establishments menu, prices and a number of reviews
swimming before your eyes. Friction is when a business has
no way of capturing and storing its business processes for
nancial valuation. Friction is when we have to stop our
work or leisure activity to do something that produces no
product or economic output (like cleaning a house see
The World in 2030 273
the section on robots below). Friction is not knowing which
items in your household are using how much electricity or
gas minute by minute.
In the developing world information technology is also
sucking friction out of daily life at an amazing rate and, in
comparative terms, it has a bigger effect on those under-
developed economies than on our own more advanced
economies. Using a cell-phone shared between all residents
492

of a village in Bangladesh, one phone call can save what
would otherwise have been a wasted days walk to see a
doctor who has been called away. Another call can save a
half days fruitless walk to nd that a market did not have
the seeds required.
Fishermen off the coast of Goa
493
cant afford to buy
marine radios but cheap pay-as-you-go mobile phones now
enable them to communicate when they are out at night
looking for sh. When one boat nds a large school of sh,
all of the other boats can be alerted. When shing is complete
the phones allow the shermen to discover which market
along the coast will offer the best price for their catch.
And, as the Economist reported in June 2007 life in
Kenya is being transformed by the mobile phone:
In 2000 some 300,000 people used mobile phones;
now, in a country of 35m-plus, nearly 9m do. As a
result, the lives of millions, especially the poor rural
majority, have been sharply improved, because they
can get round many of the obstacles posed by the
decrepitude of the state-run infrastructure: of the
274 The World in 2030
300,000-odd land-lines in the country, probably two-
thirds are usually on the blink.
494
But even though the effect of reducing friction will have
a dramatic impact on the living standards of those in the
developing world, the gap between the richest nations and
poorest is likely to grow between now and 2030. This is not
because the developed world will decrease its philanthropy
and aid indeed I believe that will be substantially increased
(although more effectively applied) but it is because that
in addition to the wealth-generating removal of friction
from our business and social processes we will also have
the benet of the enormous new amount of wealth that
will be created for us by super-intelligent machines and
manufacturing robots.
Within our societies inequality will continue to increase,
as it is increasing today. Even though the poorest groups
in developed societies have become much better off over
the last twenty-ve years (and will be very much better off
comparatively by 2030) the wealth of the richest in our
society has grown far faster. This trend will continue and
although the middle-classes will continue to expand and
become more afuent, the super-rich will become mega-rich
and then hyper-rich. And there will be many more hyper-
rich people in the world of 2030.
Will an elite emerge by 2030 that will separate itself
from the rest of us? It already has. There have been elites
in every society and today the mega-millionaires and the
billionaires live lives which are almost completely detached
from ordinary society.
The World in 2030 275
By 2030 the super-rich will have access to therapies
and technologies that will allow them to extend their lives
signicantly; they will have the ability to rejuvenate their
bodies and to enhance both their minds and their physiques.
Will they take these opportunities? Of course they will and,
over time, a new form of super-human elite will emerge. But
they wont nd that they have exclusivity. The ever growing
middle-classes will also be able to afford these treatments.
And then there are other forms of sentient being who will
soon be sharing the planet with us.
Robots
Since the 1950s lm-makers, science-ction writers and
futurologists (not the good ones) have constantly predicted
that intelligent human-like androids are just about to arrive
and become our willing slaves. But it just did not happen
and, today, few people populate their imaginary future
with robots.
But after what has seemed like an interminably-long
gestation period, robots are soon about to enter our society
in force. We are getting so close that governments have even
started to consider whether robots will need rights in the
way that humans do. Should robots have the right to exist,
to privacy and other rights that humans take for granted?
Should robots be allowed to marry and should human-
robot partnerships be given legal status? Such proleptic
thinking has been criticised, as The Guardian reported in
April 2007:
276 The World in 2030
Scientists have criticised a government report which
advocated a debate on granting rights to super-intel-
ligent robots in the future as a distraction. They say
the public should instead be consulted over the use
of robots by the military and police, as carers for the
elderly and as sex toys.
The robotics experts were commenting on a report
published by the Ofce of Science and Innovations
Horizon Scanning Centre in December. The authors
of Robo-rights: Utopian dream or rise of the ma-
chines? wrote: If articial intelligence is achieved
and widely deployed (or if they can reproduce and
improve themselves) calls may be made for human
rights to be extended to robots.
495
So where are we now in the development of intelligent
robots and how long will it be before you really are able to
buy the longed-for robot butler of popular imagination?
Understanding the complexities of human movement
(especially walking) and translating that into algorithms
that could control motors and servos within robots was
a lot more difcult and took much longer than many
roboticists rst imagined it would. But nally, the
problems of movement and articulation are being solved,
as the ubiquitous TV adverts for Hondas stair-climbing
Asimo
496
reveal.
But one of the biggest problems in robotics is ensuring that
whatever happens, robots cant deliberately or accidentally
cause damage to humans. Infallible and unbreakable control
The World in 2030 277
systems are required to ensure human safety. Once you give
a machine physical power and autonomy of action, there is
truly an immoral force in the world.
But robots that are deliberately designed to hurt humans
have already been created and are in use. One example was
revealed in 2006 when the technology website Engadget
reported:
South Korea has unveiled the latest piece of evidence
that the future is nally upon us: its supplement-
ing its soldiers manning the border with North Ko-
rea with gun-toting sentries that can detect baddies
and kill them. Or as Lee Jae-Hoon, deputy minister
of commerce, industry and energy told the Agence
France Press: The Intelligent Surveillance and Guard
Robot has surveillance, tracking, ring, and voice rec-
ognition systems built into a single unit. The South
Korean government is expected to buy 1,000 of these
robots at the cost of $200,000 apiece and will deploy
them along its northern border, coastal regions and
military airelds.
497
Robots are already used routinely by military forces for
bomb disposal, surveillance and other duties and, for
obvious reasons, a great deal of robotic development is
being undertaken for military purposes. At the beginning
of this section I referred to robotic cars driving us along
our highways of the future. The American Defense
Advanced Projects Agency (DARPA) has been sponsoring a
competition
498
to build such wholly autonomous vehicles in
the last few years.
278 The World in 2030
But it is in the general world that the most attention to
robot behaviour and safety will have to be applied between
now and 2030. As The Economist reported in 2006:
With robots now poised to emerge from their in-
dustrial cages and to move into homes and work-
places, roboticists are concerned about the safety
implications beyond the factory oor. To address
these concerns, leading robot experts have come
together to try to nd ways to prevent robots from
harming people. Inspired by the Pugwash Confer-
ences an international group of scientists, aca-
demics and activists founded in 1957 to campaign
for the non-proliferation of nuclear weapons the
new group of robo-ethicists met earlier this year in
Genoa, Italy, and announced their initial ndings
in March at the European Robotics Symposium in
Palermo, Sicily.
499
And robots will have to be taught how to behave when they
are around humans in essence, they have to be taught
manners. In September of 2006 the robotics department
of the University of Hertfordshire
500
held a conference to
discuss the development of future robots.
Having established a robot house in Hertfordshire
researchers told The Guardian
501
that they had come
to the conclusion that domestic robots should not be
given names as this can cause gender issues which are
undesirable. The researchers also said that robots have
to be taught how to approach people in ways that do not
startle humans.
The World in 2030 279
I have had some contact with robots and I cant say I
agree with these conclusions. We will anthropomorphise
our robots and we will adapt to their presence long
before they adapt to ours. As a result we humans will
have some very complex questions to answer as real
intelligence begins to emerge within machines and starts
to forge relationships with us. Our human societies have
developed moral and ethical codes for inter-personal
behaviour over many millennia and, as well as teaching
these to robots and other intelligent machines, careful
software programming and thorough legislation will be
required to protect humans.
The earliest forms of the emergence of cognition have
already been seen in the science of robotics. Already a robot
has been built which can recognise himself in a mirror (a
classic test of cognitive development). New Scientist reported
this impressive feat in May 2007:
Nico gazes into the mirror in front of him. Looking
back is his reected self, wearing a grey Yale Univer-
sity sweatshirt and a baseball cap cocked at a jaunty
angle. When Nico raises an arm, he recognises the
arm moving in the mirror as his own.
It may not sound like much of a feat, but Nico is a
humanoid robot. He has just become the rst of his
kind to recognise his own reection in a mirror.
502

Of course, intelligence in a robot may not be located
within its physical frame. As we ourselves are becoming
increasingly creatures of the networks, so we must expect
280 The World in 2030
that our robots of 2030 will have powerful network
capabilities, and may even be wholly network-dependent
(as some humans already feel today). Perhaps some
elements of their cognitive powers will reside within the
networks; perhaps they will be communicating with other
robots around the world to carry out coordinated or
collaborative tasks. This networking ability, inter-robot
communication and even self-replication could become
the dening characteristics of robot life. As the physorg.
com website reported in February 2007, robots are already
constructing themselves:
In one of the latest studies on autonomous ro-
bots, scientists sat back and watched as their robot
created itself out of smaller robotic modules. The
result, called swarm-bot, comes in many variet-
ies, depending on the assigned task and available
components. As the current state of the art in au-
tonomous self-assembly, swarm-bots offer insight
into the potential versatility and robustness that
robots may possess to perform missions beyond
human abilities.
503

In 2030 I think that each family in the developed world
will have many inexpensive robots around the home and in
their vehicles. Robots are going to become our companions,
our watchdogs and our health monitors. They will provide
companionship for the lonely and, at last, we will all have
someone to talk to.
Perhaps the last word on robots should be given to
Professor Marvin Minsky
504
of M.I.T. who is regarded by
The World in 2030 281
many (including me) as the father of articial intelligence.
In 1994 he wrote (paraphrasing Alan Turing):
Will robots inherit the Earth? Yes, but they will be
our children.
505
Section Five
Human Health and Longevity
Do you want to live forever? When you are older would
you like to receive rejuvenation therapy to ensure that your
skin, hair and internal organs regenerate themselves (and
then continue to regenerate themselves repeatedly) so that
they never reach a biological age greater than thirty or forty?
Would you like to have your personal DNA decoded so that
any predispositions to disease or malady can be treated before
such conditions occur?
All of the seemingly preposterous propositions in the
paragraph above will have become possible, or will be about
to become possible, by the time we reach 2030. The reason
is that accelerating, exponential technological development
applies to the eld of medicine as it does to all other scientic
disciplines.
Already, personal genomes are being analysed which
will provide enormous help for doctors seeking the best
way to treat an individuals disease (or prevent it). The New
York Times reported in June 2007 that the rst human to
be handed a copy of his personal genetic code was a very
appropriate recipient:
James D. Watson, who helped crack the DNA code
half a century ago, last week became the rst person
286 The World in 2030
handed the full text of his own DNA on a small com-
puter disk. But he wont be the last.
Soon enough, scientists say, we will all be able to
decipher our own genomes the six billion letters of
genetic code containing the complete inventory of
the traits we inherited from our parents for as little
as $1,000.
506

Some futurists are convinced that if they can live long
enough to reach 2030 or 2040 medical science will have
advanced sufciently to enable them to both rejuvenate
their aged carcases and then to go on living in a constantly
rejuvenated form for an indenite period.
The American futurist Ray Kurzweil is probably the best-
known exponent of this idea. With his medical collaborator
Dr Terry Grossman,
507
Kurzweil wrote a book in 2004 called
Fantastic Voyage Live Long Enough To Live For Ever.
In what amounts to a manifesto, the authors detail their
research into emerging medical technologies which, they
believe, will soon enable them to, as they say, live forever.
Within a couple of decades we will have the
knowledge to revitalize our health, expand our expe-
riences such as full-immersion virtual reality in-
corporating all of the senses, augmented reality, and
enhanced human intelligence and capability and
expand our horizons.
As we peer even further into the 21
st
Century, nan-
otechnology will enable us to rebuild and extend our
The World in 2030 287
bodies and brains and create virtually any product
from mere information, resulting in remarkable gains
in prosperity. We will develop means to expand our
physical and mental capabilities vastly by directly in-
terfacing our biological systems with human-created
technology
Another important line of attack is to regrow our
cells, tissues, and even whole organs, and introduce
them into our bodies without surgery. One major
benet of therapeutic cloning is that we will be able
to create these new tissues and organs from versions
of our cells that have also been made younger the
emerging eld of rejuvenation medicine.
508
And, three years after that book was rst published, Ray
Kurzweil is now predicting immortality medicine will
arrive even sooner than he rst suggested. Reporting on
a conference called Transvision 2007 Reason Magazine
reported:
Kurzweil believes that humanity will accelerate it-
self to utopia (immortality, ubiquitous AI, nanotech
abundance) in the next 20 to 30 years. For example,
he noted that average life expectancy increases by
about 3 months every year. Kurzweil then claimed
that longevity trends are accelerating so fast that
the life expectancy will increase more than one year
for each year that passes in about 15 years. In other
words, if you can hang on another 15 years, your life
expectancy could be indenitely long.
509
288 The World in 2030
Before considering the possibilities of being able to live for-
ever if we can only make it to the year 2022, it is worth
asking a moral question about the ambition for extreme
longevity. I began this report with the observation that the
worlds greatest problem is the massively increased popula-
tion that the planet will have to carry later in the century
probably a total of between nine and twelve billion by 2050
and the idea of wealthy, successful individuals in the rich
world (not Ray Kurzweil or Dr. Grossman specically) who
are now plotting to extend their lives indenitely seems, at
rst glance, somewhat selsh. But individual human rights
dictate that we are all free to strive for both our health and
for the maximum lifespan (if we are able to afford to do so)
and it will certainly be true that the pioneers in the eld of
human longevity will show the rest of us whats possible. It
will be those demonstrations (if successful) that will inspire
others to follow their lead.
Ray Kurzweil is now 59 years old and he claims that by
taking what he calls aggressive supplementation and living
a particular and quite rigorous lifestyle he was able to cure
himself of diabetes without medication. He also claims that
his medically-checked biological age is closer to 40, rather
than to 60 years old.
Kurzweil takes 250 supplements a day
510
(vitamins, anti-
toxicants and other substances, some intravenously, that
are believed to promote health and ght off ageing) and he
receives two blood transfusions a week all in an attempt to
remain as youthful as possible. Is he yet another American
crackpot on a personal quest for immortality or a well-
informed, scientically-educated futurist who has glimpsed
The World in 2030 289
that if he can just remain healthy for another fteen years
he may arrive at a point at which science can offer him age
reversal and a greatly extended youthful life?
Kurzweil and his writing partner Dr. Grossman are not
alone in believing that human longevity is soon going to
be extended signicantly. James Canton is another noted
American futurist who sees dramatic possibilities being
offered by medicine of the future. Writing in his book The
Extreme Future he predicts:
Longevity scientists that I have met are unlocking the
secrets of age embedded in our genes, and as organ
replacement and stem-cell research frontiers are be-
ing crossed, I forecast that the era of longer living,
beyond one hundred years of age, will become com-
mon within ten years and be considered a birthright
by 2025, due to Longevity Medicine.
511
These projections sound almost too fantastic to be true but,
after weighing the science and reviewing all available evidence,
I too have come to the conclusion that both rejuvenation
therapies and life extension will become possible for humans
in the 21
st
century. But I am not convinced by the timescale
suggested by Mssrs. Kurzweil, Grossman and Canton, nor
by the simplistic dream of wanting to live forever.
Futurologists study trends and it is clear that human
longevity has steadily, but quite signicantly, begun to
increase without the help of specic rejuvenation treatments.
In a paper entitled Emergence of Super Centenarians in Low
Mortality Countries, Dr. Jean-Marie Robine of INSERM,
290 The World in 2030
France and Professor James W. Vaupel of the Max Planck
Institute, Germany, wrote:
Although the exponential increase in the number of
centenarians which started just after World War II is
today well documented in Europe and Japan, this is
still not the case for extremely old persons having
reached the age of 105 years the semi super cente-
narians or even of 110 years the super centenar-
ians.
The rst cases of validated super centenarians ap-
peared in the 1960s but their numbers have steadily
increased since the mid 1980s. The current preva-
lence of known super-centenarians in low mortal-
ity countries involved in the International Database
on Longevity (IDL) is approximately 10 times more
than in the mid 1970s.
In roughly twenty years, from 1980 to 2000, the
maximum reported age at death, assumed to indicate
the maximum life span of the human species and
itself seen as a quite stable characteristic of our spe-
cies, has increased by about 10 years from 112 to 122
years.
512

And in July 2007 The Financial Times reported:
The cost of providing pensions and annuities could
soar by billions of pounds after the actuarial profes-
sion and its regulator warned that life expectancy was
increasing at a rapid rate and estimates of how long
The World in 2030 291
people were likely to live in retirement had failed to
grasp the pace of change.
A one-year increase in life expectancy could increase
the total UK private sector pensions bill by as much
as 30bn to 40bn. It could also force life insurers
to add as much as 3bn-4bn to their reserves. The
projections could wipe out gains in pension scheme
solvency that have come about through rising mar-
kets and increased provision.
Widely-used forecasts assume that life expectancy
after 65 has either stopped climbing or is increasing
slower than a decade ago. But the data show it is ris-
ing more sharply. Data last year showed a man born
in 1950 who lived to be 65 will on average live to be
nearly 90.
513
By 2030 I think humans will be pushing maximum life
boundaries to 130 years and beyond. It is almost certain that
both genuine and effective rejuvenation and life extension
therapies will be available and in widespread use, although
I doubt that indenite life extension will be achievable at
that point.
The biggest question I have about the notion of living
forever is whether human beings are psychologically prepared
for very extended life spans. This question is something that
has never been contemplated before in the whole of human
evolution. We have never previously had to consider the
likely attitude of a 100 year-old mind (or, more accurately,
a biologically youthful mind with 100 years of experience)
292 The World in 2030
inhabiting the body of a 30 year-old. Will the mind be as
young, as energetic and as lustful for life as the body? Or is
there an upper psychological limit to human experience, a
point of world weariness at which the psyche itself becomes
exhausted? We dont know, but by 2030 we will be well on
our way to nding out.
Technology, Patient Power and the Medical Profession
Until very recently, healthcare meant sickness care.
When patients became ill doctors tried to nd a cure or
a treatment for their malady. But this began to change
in the mid-1990s when the healthcare profession began
to recognise that preventive treatments for diseases and
conditions that threatened to emerge were more efcient
(and more economical) than treating those conditions after
they had manifested themselves. Perhaps the best example
of such preventive medical practice is the widespread use of
Lipitor,
514
the worlds most widely prescribed cholesterol-
lowering drug. Raised cholesterol is an important indicator
of potential cardio-vascular problems and Lipitor and similar
drugs reduce the build up of cholesterol and thus reduce the
likelihood of cardio-vascular disease developing.
Over the next twenty-ve years technology itself and
technology-driven developments in medical science will
push medicine more and more towards the preventive
model. The role of the patient and the role of the healthcare
professional will also change, as technology causes more
power to be transferred to the patient.
The World in 2030 293
Even today the internet has given the inquiring patient
instant access to a large body of medical information
previously available only to doctors. While making the
important caveat that information on the internet is not to
be trusted automatically, and with the important observation
that the interpretation of medical information may be
impossible without medical training, it is now clear that
the internet is empowering non-medics to the point that
many doctors are intimidated by patients who arrive in their
surgeries with internet print-outs under their arm.
With common sense and caution it is now possible for a
patient to review the worlds literature about specic drugs
or treatments, it is possible to instantly link up with others
who suffer, for example, from breast cancer, sarcoidosis
or tennis elbow. Specic treatments (and specic doctors
and specic hospitals) can be discussed and compared with
thousands of fellow patients both locally and all around the
world. It is no longer possible for a doctor to assume that
he or she has exclusive access to medical knowledge and to
the experiences of others suffering a common ailment. The
inquiring patient has suddenly and comprehensively been
empowered (and has been given important new sources of
support).
My own general practitioner is particularly internet-savvy
and he is unashamed to Google for medical information
while I am sitting in his ofce, even going so far as to guide
me to websites which offer the most trustworthy medical
information. He and I have formed a partnership; I do my
best to remain healthy, he does his best to support me.
Medicine is changing rapidly and, despite prevailing medical
294 The World in 2030
attitudes that wish to pathologise every condition (identify
a category or syndrome to which a condition can belong
before delivering treatment), new technology, new drugs,
new diagnostic tools and new therapies will turn medicine
into a science focused on prevent and extend.
Monitoring our Health
As inexpensive technology makes it possible for us to take
more responsibility for maintaining our own health we will
start to monitor our bodys real-time performance, even when
we are not ill. Such monitoring will include self-administered
regular checks of blood pressure, blood-glucose level and
cholesterol level. Today such home checks are carried out
using off-the-shelf test kits and blood-pressure machines.
Soon we will be wearing technology that monitors our health
for us and which communicates via the super-web to store
medical data in case any retrospective analysis is needed in
the future. In the slightly longer-term technology worn on
our bodies will automatically call for assistance and will even
administer emergency treatments if we suffer a heart attack,
stroke or other serious and life-threatening ailment. These
are not new ideas.
In 1986 I set up a company in the UK to design, develop
and manufacture wrist watches which would also act as
health monitors (a business intended to be a complimentary
sideline to my writing and futurology). I imagined stylish
timepieces that could check the wearers blood pressure, test
the levels of glucose and insulin in the body (from perspiration
The World in 2030 295
analysis) and which would eventually be developed to carry
small doses of adrenaline, insulin and other chemicals and
drugs which, if administered early enough, can save a life. I
imagined a time when wearing such a watch would not only
be a cultural and fashion norm, but would be a requirement
laid down by medical insurers.
Of course, there is a yawning gap between imagination
and practicality and I eventually came to the reluctant
conclusion that the electronics and physiological testing
systems of 1986 could not be integrated and scaled down
into a single device small enough to be worn anywhere
on the body. After some months of expensive research I
reluctantly put the idea aside.
Now, twenty-one years later, wrist blood pressure monitors
exist
515
and these models have been successfully tested for
accuracy by the medical authorities. These devices still look
like medical equipment, however, but as we all start to take
more responsibility for maintaining our own health, we can
expect to see more multiple-function wrist devices being
developed which are also stylish and fashion-conscious.
And others are also working to make these health-
monitoring ideas a reality. As Ray Kurzweil and Dr. Terry
Grossman announced in Fantastic Voyage:
Within several years, we will have the means of
continually monitoring the status of our bodies to
ne-tune our health programmes as well as provide
early warning of emergencies such as heart attacks.
The authors are working on this type of system with
296 The World in 2030
biomedical company United Therapeutics,
516
using
miniaturized sensors, computers, and wireless com-
munication. Researchers at Edinburgh University
are developing spray-on nanocomputers for health
monitoring. Their goal: a device the size of a grain of
sand that combines a computer, a wireless commu-
nication system, and sensors for heat, pressure, light,
magnetic elds, and electric currents.
517

And as we connect ourselves and the most intimate parts of
our physiology to the always-on, always-connected super-
web, telemedicine
518
will begin to play a much larger role
in our healthcare. Telemedicine means medical services
delivered from afar and although there will be many
instances in which an in-person physical examination will
remain vital, many routine interactions between patients
and care providers will be provided across the networks.
Telemedicine will become more and more effective as our
bodies become more wired and more physical information
about our bodies performance is uploaded for expert analysis.
Telesurgery, particularly in partnership with robotics, is
already a reality with the rst trans-Atlantic teleoperation
being carried out in 2001 as the BBC reported:
The rst major trans-Atlantic telesurgical operation
has been carried out. Doctors in the United States re-
moved a gall bladder from a patient in eastern France
by remotely operating a surgical robot arm.
The procedure could make it possible for a surgeon
to perform an operation on a patient anywhere in
the world.
519

The World in 2030 297
By 2030, humans will be receiving a signicant part of their
healthcare via telemedicine and the networks (with adequate
security over private data) will provide storage for your
personal medical data and records which you, or a medical
professional who has your approval, can access at any time
from anywhere in the world.
Plastics and Healthcare
Plastics of one sort or another already play a major role
in healthcare bringing their inherent advantages of low
cost, light weight, durability and sterility. But some new
applications of plastics in healthcare are non-obvious. As a
BBC story revealed in May 2007:
Scientists have developed an articial plastic blood
which could act as a substitute in emergencies.
Researchers at Shefeld University said their creation
could be a huge advantage in war zones.
They say that the articial blood is light to carry, does
not need to be kept cool and can be kept for longer.
The new blood is made up of plastic molecules that
have an iron atom at their core, like haemoglobin,
that can carry oxygen through the body.
520
And, as we begin to monitor our own physiology on a semi-
permanent and permanent basis, plastics will be used for
298 The World in 2030
the construction of ever smaller and ever lighter monitoring
devices. Even today patients with heart conditions are able
to wear lightweight ECG equipment for long periods to
provide ambulatory data (data collected as the patient goes
about daily life).
521

Eventually smart plastics will start to interface directly
with our bodies. In 2005 New Scientist reported:
Scientists are building a new bionic ear coated in a
smart plastic that boosts the growth of nerve cells in
the inner ear when its zapped with electricity.
The technology, which also has potential for healing
spinal cord injuries, is being developed at the Aus-
tralian Centre for Medical Bionics and Hearing Sci-
ence, part of Melbournes Bionic Ear Institute.
522
Collaborator, Professor Gordon Wallace of the In-
telligent Polymer Research Institute at the Univer-
sity of Wollongong, says the polymer polypyrrole is
unusual because unlike most plastics, it can conduct
electricity.
523
Plastics also have a signicant role to play in creating casings
for the delivery of powerful drugs to sites deep within
patients bodies. As this announcement by the University of
Wisconsin-Madison, USA spelled out:
Working in the emerging eld of nanomedicine,
University of Wisconsin-Madison pharmacy profes-
sor Glen Kwon
524
aims to improve the delivery of
The World in 2030 299
drugs by targeting them more selectively to tumors
and boosting their solubility in water.
Besides being safer and easier to administer, polymer-
ic micelles maintain anti-cancer drugs like rapamycin
in blood plasma for longer periods than do stand-
ard formulations, Kwon has found. Its a promising
result that could give the drugs a greater chance of
accumulating at tumor sites.
Polymeric micelles may also make it easier to mix
stronger cancer-ghting cocktails containing more
than one chemotherapeutic agent. Doing so now is
a challenge because hydrophobic drugs in solution
together tend to crash out, says Kwon, becoming
particulate, aggregated and useless.
525

And plastics are being used alongside carbon nanotubes to
help ght HIV, as the New Scientist reported in March 2007:
Carbon nanotubes have been used to smuggle HIV-
blocking molecules into human cells. Although pre-
liminary, the discovery could lead to new treatments
for the deadly virus. A complex chemical trick was
used to attach the siRNA to the carbon nanotubes.
Carbon-hydrogen chains, which bind tightly to na-
notubes, were connected with a polymer called poly-
ethylene glycol (PEG). This was then xed to siRNA
via two sulphur atoms.
526
In addition plastic robots are already helping surgeons to
operate in conditions unsuitable for conventional surgery.
300 The World in 2030
Under the headline Plastic Robot Allows Remote Surgery
With Live Imaging, the newsletter of the John Hopkins
Hospital in Baltimore, USA explains:
Technologies like magnetic resonance imaging (MRI)
have made possible a revolution in diagnostic medi-
cine. But the revolution stops there, because MRIs,
which are basically huge magnets, are incompatible
with surgical tools.
As a result, doctors can look at a tumor, but they can-
not operate on it under an MRI. That barrier might
have been broken by a new robot without any metal
or electrical parts.
The robot also uses light for ber optic encoding, an
extremely reliable method of transmitting light infor-
mation without any signicant loss along its path. The
purpose of the ber optic component is that it can
function as a circuit, detecting and monitoring the
motion of the robot without using any electricity.
When the plastic gears rotate, their motion disrupts
the ber optic light source, acting as a signal and al-
lowing the system to know its location and status.
The nished motor was designed in two sizes to al-
low for variation in step magnitude. Amazingly the
motors width still measures less than the length of
a pen.
527

Plastics are already playing a central role in healthcare
technology, a role that will increase in the coming decades.
The World in 2030 301
Paying for our Healthcare
But before I get ahead of myself in this survey of medical
wonders yet to come (plastic or otherwise), it is necessary
to understand that we face an extremely difcult future
for healthcare services in the developed world. I promised
earlier that I would not commit the solecism of taking
a Panglossian view of the future and for that reason it is
necessary to point out that the Baby Boomer generation
in North America, Europe, and some parts of Asia will soon
start to retire and, inevitably, will eventually fall victim to
the maladies of old age (relatively few will have early access
to rejuvenation treatments). This is the largest group of
people in the population demographic and they are going
to start making heavy demands on health services just as
their generation is becoming economically unproductive
(and therefore able to contribute less in taxes to fund the
health services). How good or bad healthcare services will
be in caring for these millions of old people depends on
political decisions and national cultures as much as a nations
economic performance. As is revealed below, future energy
security is not the only sector in which the United States has
got itself into a mess.
In his 2007 book, Future, Inc, Washington D.C.-based
futurist Eric Garland
528
wrote of the American healthcare
system:
The most important thing driving the future of
health care is something you probably do not need
to be told it is phenomenally costly. The United
302 The World in 2030
States, just one example, spends approximately $1.9
trillion on its health care system. That gure is larger
than the entire economy of nearly every country on
Earth. The cost of health care is rising an average of
8 per cent annually, outpacing growth in wages every
year for the last ve. Moreover, as the Baby Boom-
ers begin to age that number is expected to double.
America alone could be spending $4 trillion a year
on health care. Given that the United States devotes
18 cents of every dollar to health care, the idea of
doubling that number is daunting, especially because
recent studies show we dont seem to be any health-
ier than those in other developed countries, like the
UK, which spends considerably less.
529
And although scientic breakthroughs and new, more
effective treatments and forms of preventive medicine are
wonderful, such developments also push up the cost of
healthcare and at an alarming rate. Just at the time when
millions of newly elderly people will be placing demands
on the developed worlds health services, new technologies,
treatments and drugs will be offering new and sometimes
very expensive, forms of treatment.
Every nation has its own solution to public healthcare
provision and some countries do it very much better than
others. And while it is true that the new wealth generated
from the accelerating, exponential development of general
technologies will be considerable, it is clear to me that for
the poor and less well-off in our societies medical rationing
will be the norm in many countries (as it is today). Some of
the more advanced technological treatments will be available
The World in 2030 303
only to those who are able to pay for them, over and above
any contributions that they may have already made to fund
their healthcare services. In most countries, the wealthy will
be the healthy.
Beautiful, Clever You
But in our increasingly rich developed world there will
be plenty of people able to pay for healthcare and health
treatments and there will be more than enough of them
to ensure that research into new drugs and new forms of
treatments will not suddenly dry up as state-provided health
services crumble under the weight of the baby boomers
retirement maladies.
By 2030 private medicine will be offering the much-
enlarged wealthy classes opportunities to change themselves
in some very dramatic ways. This trend is already well
developed as rich people pay for cosmetic surgery to enhance
or rejuvenate their looks and replace their age-discoloured
teeth with dazzling Hollywood smiles. Soon grey hair may
even be restored to its natural colour without the use of
dyes, or you may even be able to alter the colour of your hair
from inside your hair follicles. As New Scientist reported in
March 2007:
The particular gene variants that make our hair black,
brown or blonde remain elusive, but we do at least
have a better handle on a most vexing aspect of hair
colour its tendency to go away. David Fishers team
304 The World in 2030
at Harvard Medical School has recently shown that
melanocyte stem cells near the top of the hair follicle
disappear just before a hair turns white. This means
the mature melanocytes at the base of the follicle are
not replaced when the hair falls out and a new one
begins to form (Science, vol 307, p 720).
Greyness could be reversible. In fact, an existing can-
cer drug seems to occasionally restore pigmentation,
and more reliable, safer methods are on the horizon.
For instance, AntiCancer of San Diego, California,
has developed ways of delivering drugs or genes to
hair follicles in fatty sacs. The payload could include
genes that restore melanin production, says compa-
ny president Robert Hoffman. The problem is get-
ting high enough gene expression in all the cells, he
says, to avoid producing streaky, partially pigmented
hair.
530
And male baldness, a most troubling debilitation for many
men, may soon be nothing but a bad memory. So far this
has been a condition that has refused to yield to medical
science. Hair transplants have been regularly carried out since
the 1970s but few patients have sufcient donor follicles to
make the treatment really effective. Now, however, it nally
seems that a permanent cure may be on the way (and will
almost certainly be widely available by 2030). In May 2007
Medical News Today reported:
US scientists have found a way to make the skin of
laboratory mice gives rise to new fully working hair
follicles complete with new hair by using a protein
The World in 2030 305
that stimulates follicle generating genes in skin cells
under wound conditions. They hope this discovery
may one day lead to treatments for baldness and ab-
normal hair growth.
Dr. George Cotsarelis and colleagues from the De-
partment of Dermatology, Kligman Laboratories,
University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine, in
Philadelphia, US, found that when skin is wounded,
the cells of the epidermis take on the properties of
stem cells and generate new hair follicles that are ca-
pable of growing new shafts of hair.
So far the results have only been achieved in mice,
but the hope is the same is true of human skin.
531
But it wont only be treatments for troubling but minor
conditions that will be available in 2030. By that point
medicine will be able to offer patients specic enhancements
to their physiology. At this point it is important to put the
notion of human enhancement into social context. In his
2006 paper Cognitive Enhancement: Methods, Ethics,
Regulatory Challenges, Dr. Nick Bostrom provides some
perspective:
Most efforts to enhance cognition are of a rather
mundane nature, and some have been practiced for
thousands of years. The prime example is educa-
tion and training, where the goal is often not only
to impart specic skills or information, but also to
improve general mental faculties such as concentra-
tion, memory, and critical thinking. Other forms of
306 The World in 2030
mental training, such as yoga, martial arts, medita-
tion, and creativity courses are also in common use.
Caffeine is widely used to improve alertness. Herbal
extracts reputed to improve memory are popular,
with sales of Ginko biloba alone in the order of several
hundred million dollars annually in the US. In an
ordinary supermarket we nd a staggering number of
energy drinks on display, vying for consumers hop-
ing to turbo-charge their brains.
532

But by 2030 wealthy people will be expecting far more than
just cosmetic improvements from their doctors and the
enhancements available from education and zzy drinks. The
genetic manipulation of proteins and molecules, sometimes
referred to as genetic engineering or germline engineering,
holds some extreme promises for the treatment of disease
and even the enhancement, physically and intellectually, of
individual humans.
Writing in his 2006 book Mind Set! Reset Your Thinking
And See The Future, the Vienna-based futurist John Naisbitt
describes some of the hopes for germline engineering and
warns of its implications:
The great dilemma of the twenty-rst century will be
that although germline engineering will allow us to
treat and eventually eliminate diseases and disorders
such as Alzheimers, Downs syndrome, and Parkin-
sons, the very same technology will allow us to make
people taller, stronger, smarter, more beautiful. In
short, we will be able to create a perfect race. This of
course falls under the long shadow of eugenics, the
The World in 2030 307
perfection of the human race. Hitler had the idea, but
he did not have the science. Here comes the science.
Once the rst step is made, we will be on a path
of no return. Dispute over this matter will lead to
a huge confrontation between science and religion,
between feasibility and humanity. It is a confronta-
tion shaking up basic beliefs and values as during the
times of Galileo and Darwin.
533
And his fellow American futurist Jeremy Rifkin also warns
of the implications of genetic engineering is his 2002 book,
The Hydrogen Economy:
Physics and chemistry, which have dominated the era
just passing, inuencing every aspect of our existence,
including the smallest particulars of our way of life,
are making room for the age of biology. The map-
ping and manipulation of human, animal and plant
genomes open the door to a new era in which life
itself becomes the ultimate manipulable commodity.
The biotech era is beginning to raise fundamental
questions about the nature of human nature, and the
public is quickly being swept up in a great debate
between those who view the new age as a biological
renaissance and others who warn of the coming of a
commercial eugenics civilization.
534
The key question is: will the rich people of 2030 consider
using genetic engineering when planning to have a child?
And I dont just mean young wealthy people I also mean
older wealthy people. Rejuvenation techniques will make
308 The World in 2030
the 70 year-olds of 2030 look like 30 year-olds and, with a
much-extended life expectancy. And with medical advances
already allowing mothers to give birth in their sixties,
535
how
many older couples will start to plan new families?
At rst prospective parents will have their embryos
screened to weed out any which carry genes predictive of
future disease and they will almost certainly select the sex of
their unborn child in this way. The ethicist and philosopher
Nick Bostrom considered this matter in his 2006 paper
Cognitive Enhancement: Methods, Ethics, Regulatory
Challenges,:
Some enhancements do not increase the capacity
of any existing being but rather cause a new person
to come into existence with greater capacities than
some other possible person would have had who
could have come into existence instead. This is what
happens in embryo selection. At present, preimplan-
tation genetic diagnosis is used mainly to select out
embryos with genetic disease, and occasionally for
the purpose of sex selection. In the future, however,
it might become possible to test for a variety of genes
known to correlate with desirable attributes, includ-
ing cognitive capacity. Genetic engineering might
also be used to remove or insert genes into a zygote
or an early embryo. In some cases, it might be un-
clear whether the outcome is a new individual or the
same individual with a genetic modication.
536
The problem comes when medicine starts to offer the
possibility of genetic manipulation to make the prospective
The World in 2030 309
child grow taller, be more handsome or beautiful, more
musically gifted or have a greater intellect. This is not yet
possible in 2007, but by 2030 it almost certainly will be
and whether or not such treatment is being offered in the
developed world will depend upon each nations legislation
and regulation of the science.
It is tempting to believe that todays widespread natural
repugnance at the concept of designer babies will still be
the cultural norm in twenty-ve years time. But futurologists
learn that public opinion can sometimes change quickly,
dramatically and in unexpected ways. For example, I recall
describing what we now know as the surveillance society to
a British audience in the early 1980s. There was uproar and,
almost to a person, the audience members were appalled
at such a Big Brother idea and all were certain that such a
thing would never be tolerated in the UK. Today, although
there are many vociferous critics of our mushrooming
surveillance infrastructure, the vast majority of people in
Britain are entirely content to be watched over. It is not even
an issue for any of the major political parties.
So it could be with genetic engineering and human
enhancements. At rst the science will show the huge benets
in eradicating disease and preventing it from occurring. The
advantages offered will be clear and the procedure simple.
For example, as The Times reported in 2007:
A pill that can correct a wide range of faulty genes
which cause crippling illnesses should be available
within three years, promising a revolution in the
treatment of thousands of conditions.
310 The World in 2030
The drug, known as PTC124, has already had en-
couraging results in patients with Duchenne muscu-
lar dystrophy and cystic brosis. The nal phase of
clinical trials is to begin this year, and it could be
licensed as early as 2009.
537

As such gene-based and gene-focused treatments become
accepted across society doctors, parents and scientists may
begin introducing improvements to the germline that society
perceives as benecial for example, one study has shown
the increase in income from only a single additional IQ point
to be 2.1 per cent for men and 3.6 per cent for women!
538

So even relatively small increases in mental performance
will have a huge impact on how well a child will do in life,
and if a nation state were to consider the economic impact
of a collective rise in national IQs well, thankfully, thats
something only a totalitarian state would contemplate.
More mundanely these enhancements could also include
screening embryos against colour blindness, tone deafness
and other defects not normally considered diseases. From
there it is a small step to making human enhancements.
Imagine two successful painters visual artists planning
to have their rst child, a girl. Shall we improve her colour
vision, darling? would be a very hard suggestion to turn
down. And, as research published in March 2007 suggests,
an almost instantaneous upgrade to human perception of
colour may become available:
Although mice, like most mammals, typically view
the world with a limited color palette similar to
The World in 2030 311
what some people with red-green color blindness
see scientists have now transformed their vision
by introducing a single human gene into a mouse
chromosome. The human gene codes for a light
sensor that mice do not normally possess, and its
insertion allowed the mice to distinguish colors as
never before.
539
Because genetic manipulation of the embryo affects the
rights of unborn children, legislation and regulation will
ensure that these rights are protected. It is impossible to
know what these laws will mandate in 2030 but, whether or
not genetic enhancement of embryos is banned in a given
country, some prospective parents will use other, less strict,
jurisdictions to design babies to their liking. It is human
nature.
Nick Bostrom explains how a future society might regard
the whole issue of human enhancement:
For example, in addition to the gap between the
rich and the poor, there is also a gap between the
cognitively gifted and the cognitively decient. One
scenario might be that the wealth gap increases at
the same time as the talent gap decreases because it
is generally easier to enhance individuals at the low
end of the performance spectrum than those at the
high end (whose brains are already functioning close
to their biological optimum). This could add a de-
gree of complexity that is often overlooked in the
ethical literature on inequality. One should also have
to consider under what conditions society might
312 The World in 2030
have an obligation to ensure universal access to in-
terventions that improve cognitive performance. An
analogy might be drawn to public libraries and basic
education.
540

Rejuvenation and Longevity
If the unborn children of 2030 will be protected from
genetic enhancement by law, there will be nothing to stop
consenting adults from seeking to medically enhance or
rejuvenate themselves.
By 2030 stem cell medicine
541
will be mature and widely
practised. A stem cell is an early stage human cell which
retains the ability to grow into any type of human cell a
heart cell, a brain cell, a skin cell, etc. These properties are
now being exploited to grow replacement parts and organs
for humans.
In Extreme Future James Canton listed some of the
benets expected from stem cell medicine by 2030:
New organs, including hearts and lungs
New bone growth for legs, arms and backs
New sensory functions and optic nerves to restore
eyesight
New cancer treatments
New nerves to heal muscles and to restore move-
ment
New cells to offset the aging brain
542
The World in 2030 313
Signicant progress in stem cell medicine is already being
made and development is increasingly rapid. As MIT
Technology Review reported in May 2007:
An efcient new method to generate what appears
to be a novel type of stem cell could be a boon to
diseases linked to lack of blood ow. Scientists in
Massachusetts and Florida have developed a way to
coax embryonic stem cells into a more adult form
of stem cell that has the potential to form blood
vessels. The new type of cells helped repair tissue
in animals that had had heart attacks or eye damage
due to diabetes.
543
And in July 2007 The Toronto Star carried the following
story:
A landmark discovery by researchers at McMaster
University could radically alter the way scientists can
use embryonic stem cells to grow replacement tissues
and treat cancer.
In a surprise revelation, a McMaster study found that
human embryonic stem cells the great grandmoth-
ers of all the other cells in our bodies build them-
selves a nurturing cocoon that feeds them and directs
their ability to transform into other types of tissues.
And by manipulating the products of this tiny, cel-
lular placenta, it may be possible for scientists to
prompt the stem cells to grow into desired tissues and
organs, or to switch off tumour growth in cancers.
544
314 The World in 2030
It is the potential of stem cell medicine (coupled with
the potential of molecular nanotechnology) that turns
some otherwise quite level-headed futurists into the
modern equivalent of ancient Egyptian Pharaohs lusting
for immortality. For example, the developing ability to
practise medicine at the nano-scale
545
coupled with stem
cell technology holds out amazing promise. As The Project
on Emerging Nanotechnologies (a partnership between the
Woodrow Wilson International Center for Scholars and the
Pew Charitable Trusts) suggests on its website:
Imagine a world where damaged organs in your body
kidneys, liver, heart can be stimulated to heal
themselves. Envision people tragically paralyzed
whose injured spinal cords can be repaired. Think
about individuals suffering from the debilitating ef-
fects of Parkinsons or Alzheimers relieved of their
symptoms completely and permanently.
In a dramatic demonstration of what nanotechnology
might achieve in regenerative medicine, paralyzed lab
mice with spinal cord injuries have regained the abil-
ity to walk using their hind limbs six weeks after a sim-
ple injection of a purpose-designed nanomaterial.
546
Nanomedicine and stem cell treatments hold out huge hope
for the disabled as well as for those less needy individuals
who seek to extend their natural life-spans. It is to be hoped
that the money being spent by those who wish to rejuvenate
themselves and live forever drives forward the research that
develops cures for the paralysed and those suffering from
what in 2007 are still intractable diseases.
The World in 2030 315
Mans Transhuman Future
As I suggested in the previous section, Daily Life in
2030, within twenty-ve years humans will be connecting
themselves directly to the super-web via neural interfaces,
body-mounted nano-scale computers and monitoring
systems. Many of us will have virtual assistants software
personalities who are our constant companions and
helpmates.
But even as we take technology onto and into our
bodies we will have begun to alter our own biology using
genetic engineering, stem cell research and nanomedicine
changing what it means to be human. Transhuman
and transhumanism are the terms that have already been
proposed to describe the new type of augmented and
enhanced human that will begin to emerge well before the
year 2030. Wikipedia explains the concept as follows:
Transhumanism (sometimes abbreviated >H or H+)
is an international intellectual and cultural move-
ment supporting the use of new sciences and tech-
nologies to enhance human mental and physical
abilities and aptitudes, and ameliorate what it regards
as undesirable and unnecessary aspects of the human
condition, such as stupidity, suffering, disease, age-
ing and involuntary death.
547
Of course, these increasingly enhanced and augmented
transhumans will be occupying a planet on which super-
intelligent machines will recently have emerged. The two
316 The World in 2030
new forms of entity are almost certain to get together and
some futurists are already talking about sexual and romantic
attachments between humans and computer personalities.
Whatever the relationships between augmented humans
and their robot companions, it is clear that much longer
life-spans are almost certain for us and, particularly, for our
children. In his 1993 paper The Coming Technological
Singularity: How to Survive in the Post-Human Era Vernor
Vinge makes the following observation about extreme-
longevity:
A mind that stays at the same capacity cannot live
forever; after a few thousand years it would look
more like a repeating tape loop than a person. To
live indenitely long, the mind itself must grow ...
and when it becomes great enough, and looks back
... what fellow-feeling can it have with the soul that
it was originally? Certainly the later being would
be everything the original was, but so much vastly
more.
548

But before peering into the longer-distance future it is
worth taking a reality check about the likely nature of life
in 2030. The vast majority of people in the world at that
time will still be struggling to make a living and feed their
families. Technology development and globalisation (if that
globalisation has been ethically and sustainably pursued)
will have lifted many additional millions of people out of
abject poverty, but for most humans on the planet life will
be conducted much as it is today, albeit it with far better
communications and improved healthcare.
The World in 2030 317
Beyond The Singularity (which is likely to occur at
some point around 2030), however, life will be very different
for wealthy people in the developed nations. It is virtually
impossible to predict what might be possible once we have
computers that are substantially cleverer than human beings
(and once they start demanding rights for themselves).
In his 2007 book Beyond AI: Creating the Conscience of
the Machine, Dr. Storrs Hall makes an attempt at predicting
some of the capabilities that such an articial intelligence (AI)
would have (an epihuman is a machine with a capability just
above human level, a hyperhuman is an articial intelligence
signicantly smarter than human level):
Imagine an AI that is a thousand epihuman AIs, all
tightly integrated together. Such an intellect would
be capable of substantially outstripping the hu-
man scientic community at any given task and of
comprehending the entirety of scientic knowledge
as a unied whole. A hyperhuman AI would soon
begin to improve itself signicantly faster than hu-
mans could. It could spot the gaps in science and
engineering where there was low-hanging fruit and
instigate rapid increases in technological capability
across the board.
It is as yet poorly understood even in the scientic
community just how much headroom remains for im-
provement with respect to the capabilities of current
physical technology. A mature nanotechnology, for
example, could replace the entire capital stock all the
factories, buildings, roads, cars, trucks, airplanes, and
318 The World in 2030
other machines of the United States in a week. And
thats just using currently understood science, with a
dollop of engineering development thrown in.
549
How might humans react to the arrival of such intelligence,
such super-capability on Earth? Quite simply, we dont and
cant know.
In the longer term I suspect, as I have for over forty
years, that enhanced human beings and super-computer
intelligence will merge to become a new species that will
become our successors, a new non-biological species which
will nally be able to spread out and colonise the solar
system and, eventually, the universe.
I dont see the super-intelligent computer personalities of
the future as being terrifyingly alien beings, but as a natural
product and extension of ourselves. They will indeed be our
children.
The World in 2030 319
1 [Link]
2 [Link]
3 [Link]
working-paper_nal.PDF
4 [Link]
5 [Link]
6 [Link]
dp/0525949380
7 [Link]
[Link]
8 [Link]
344%3AAATWFC%[Link]%3B2-Y&size=LARGE&origin=JSTOR-
enlargePage
9 [Link]
10 [Link]
11 [Link]
12 [Link]
13 [Link]
14 [Link]
html
15 [Link]
David/2007/07/23/[Link]
16 [Link]
95&language=1
17 [Link]
References
320 The World in 2030
18 [Link]
DO=DO_TOPIC&URL_SECTION=[Link]
19 [Link]
David/2007/07/23/[Link]
20 [Link]
&m=March&x=20070316120637lcnirellep0.8339044
21 [Link]
human_pop/human_pop.html
22 [Link]
ho&refer=germany
23 [Link]
24 [Link]
25 [Link]
26 [Link]
population_increase.html?siteSect=105&sid=7756322&cKey=
1177585930000
27 [Link]
28 [Link]
29 [Link]
30 [Link]
[Link]
31 [Link]
32 [Link]
33 [Link]
34 [Link]
35 [Link]
[Link]
36 [Link]
DAA0894DF404482
37 [Link]
38 [Link]
39 [Link]
The World in 2030 321
40 [Link]
html
41 [Link]
ABCA2570030000808E?open
42 [Link]
43 [Link]
44 [Link]
45 [Link]
RRRDRJD
46 [Link]
html
47 [Link]
48 [Link]
49 [Link]
50 [Link]
51 [Link]
dp/0446356816
52 [Link]
dp/0061136883
53 [Link]
54 [Link]
55 [Link]
075380848X/ref=pd_bbs_sr_1/002-0570675-0140800?ie=UTF8&s=books&
qid=1183559887&sr=1-1
56 [Link]
dp/1585420824/ref=pd_bbs_sr_1/002-0570675-0140800?ie=UTF8&s=boo
ks&qid=1183560065&sr=1-1
57 [Link]
dp/1585422541
58 [Link]
EXTDECPROSPECTS/GEPEXT/EXTGEP2007/0,,menuPK:3016160~
pagePK:64167702~piPK:64167676~theSitePK:3016125,[Link]
322 The World in 2030
59 [Link]
dp/0525949380
60 [Link]
dp/0195311450
61 [Link]
62 [Link]
dp/0195311450
63 [Link]
64 [Link]
dp/0195311450
65 [Link]
66 [Link]
67 [Link]
68 [Link]
shtml
69 [Link]
[Link]
70 [Link]
[Link]
71 [Link]
72 [Link]
73 [Link]
html
74 [Link]
[Link]
75 [Link]
76 [Link]
[Link]
77 [Link]
78 [Link]
79 [Link]
80 [Link]
The World in 2030 323
81 [Link]
82 [Link]
83 [Link]
84 [Link]
85 [Link]
organs/[Link]
86 [Link]
87 [Link]
99DF-3FD9B26203EA60CD
88 [Link]
dp/0525949380
89 [Link]
90 [Link]
91 [Link]
92 [Link]
93 [Link]
94 [Link]
95 [Link]
96 [Link]
97 [Link]
dp/0670033847
98 [Link]
00008848/
99 [Link]
100 [Link]
dp/0061136883
101 [Link]
102 [Link]
[Link]&hw=Scientists+look+high+in+the+sky+for+po
wer&sn=001&sc=1000
103 [Link]
[Link]
324 The World in 2030
104 [Link]
105 [Link]
106 [Link]
[Link]
107 [Link]
108 [Link]
109 [Link]
110 [Link]
111 [Link]
112 [Link]
113 [Link]
114 [Link]
dp/078611181X
115 [Link]
nal+Supercomputers&Search.x=32&Search.y=11
116 [Link]
RSRTQPV
117 [Link]
118 [Link]
[Link]/pub/cstr/reports/csl/tr/82/232/[Link]+micropr
ocessor+design+plastic&hl=en&ct=clnk&cd=5&gl=uk&client=refox-a
119 [Link]
Basic&articleId=9013921&intsrc=hm_list
120 [Link]
121 [Link]
122 [Link]
123 [Link]
00-1008_3-[Link]?tag=[Link]
124 [Link]
125 [Link]
126 [Link]
127 [Link]
The World in 2030 325
128 [Link]
129 [Link]
JDRDDNQ
130 [Link]
131 [Link]
story/0,10801,92806,[Link]
132 [Link]
dp/1585422541
133 [Link]
rodent-prevention/mouse-radar/[Link]
134 [Link]
135 [Link]
136 [Link]
137 [Link]
138 [Link]
business
139 [Link]
140 [Link]
141 [Link]
142 [Link]
143 [Link]
Intelligence/dp/0743276639
144 [Link]
145 [Link]
146 [Link]
147 [Link]
148 [Link]
149 [Link]
html?
150 [Link]
dp/0670033847
151 [Link]
326 The World in 2030
152 [Link]
153 [Link]
154 [Link]
155 [Link]
156 [Link]
157 [Link]
dp/0306473887
158 [Link]
159 [Link]
dp/1591025117
160 [Link]
161 [Link]
162 [Link]
163 [Link]
164 [Link]
165 [Link]
166 [Link]
167 [Link]
plastic_071603.html
168 [Link]
169 [Link]
170 [Link]
171 [Link]
172 [Link]
173 [Link]
174 [Link]
dp/0525949380
175 [Link]
176 [Link]
[Link]
177 [Link]
178 [Link]
The World in 2030 327
179 [Link]
180 [Link]
181 [Link]
182 [Link]
[Link]
183 [Link]
184 [Link]
185 [Link]
dp/0670033847
186 [Link]
187 [Link]
188 [Link]
189 [Link]
190 [Link]
191 [Link]
192 [Link]
html
193 [Link]
194 [Link]
195 [Link]
[Link]
196 [Link]
[Link]
197 [Link]
198 [Link]
199 [Link]
Depletion/[Link]
200 [Link]
201 [Link]
202 [Link]
203 [Link]
dp/0525949380
328 The World in 2030
204 [Link]
205 [Link]
ShowPage&c=Page&cid=1078995903270&aid=1097485779120
206 [Link]
economics_climate_change/stern_review_report.cfm
207 [Link]
208 [Link]
html
209 [Link]
210 [Link]
211 [Link]
212 [Link]
[Link]
213 [Link]
214 [Link]
215 [Link]
216 [Link]
217 [Link]
218 [Link]
[Link]
219 [Link]
220 [Link]
f=slogin&ref=science&pagewanted=print
221 [Link]
222 [Link]
dp/0691121648
223 [Link]
224 [Link]
r=1&hp&oref=slogin
225 [Link]
226 [Link]
72&language=1
The World in 2030 329
227 [Link]
228 [Link]
[Link]
229 [Link]
230 [Link]
231 [Link]
232 [Link]
233 [Link]
[Link]
234 [Link]
235 [Link]
236 [Link]
development
237 [Link]
238 [Link]
mid=622&language=1
239 [Link]
RSRTQQQ
240 [Link]
241 [Link]
242 [Link]
243 [Link]
244 [Link]
245 [Link]
246 [Link]
dp/0713999233
247 [Link]
248 [Link]
249 [Link]
dp/0713999233
250 [Link]
251 [Link]
330 The World in 2030
252 [Link]
html#report
253 [Link]
254 [Link]
dp/0713999233
255 [Link]
[Link]
256 [Link]
257 [Link]
258 [Link]
259 [Link]
260 Time 1988, v131n23, Jun 6, p. 62
261 [Link]
262 [Link]
[Link]?i=16440&t=0
263 [Link]
264 [Link]
265 [Link]
id=9283709
266 [Link]
267 [Link]
268 [Link]
20On%20Green%20Jet%20Technology&y=9&aje=true&x=20&id=07061
5000078&location=http%3A%2F%[Link]%2FftArticle%3Fquery
Text%3DAirbus+Call+To+Boeing+On+Green+Jet+Technology%26y%3
D9%26aje%3Dtrue%26x%3D20%26id%3D070615000078&referer=http%
3A%2F%[Link]%2Fsearch%3FqueryText%3DAirbus+Call+To+
Boeing+On+Green+Jet+Technology
269 [Link]
270 [Link]
tysupplement
271 [Link]
The World in 2030 331
272 [Link]
273 [Link]
[Link]
274 [Link]
275 [Link]
276 [Link]
277 [Link]
278 [Link]
279 Alistair Darling, Secretary of State for Energy, House of Commons May
23rd, 2007
280 [Link]
281 [Link]
[Link]
282 [Link]
dp/0713999233
283 [Link]
buildings/article-163297
284 [Link]
285 David Strong, presentation to the Resource 05 conference, Building
Research Establishment, Watford 15 September 2005.
286 House of Lords Select Committee on Science and Technology, Energy
Efciency 5 July 2005, para 6.25.
287 [Link]
[Link];jsessionid=IBPOAKDBADLF
288 [Link]
289 [Link]
290 [Link]
291 [Link]
c_03082007.html
292 [Link]
293 [Link]
id=E1_JTVPVGJ
332 The World in 2030
294 [Link]
295 [Link]
NEWS/702190331
296 [Link]
297 [Link]
298 U.S. Department of Energy 2005, the American Institute of Chemistry 2007
299 [Link]
300 [Link]
301 [Link]
302 [Link]
303 [Link]
304 [Link]
305 [Link]
306 [Link]
307 [Link]
4031&no=51360031&mnSBrand=core&me=A2BO0OYVBKIQJM
308 [Link]
[Link]
309 [Link]
[Link]
310 [Link]
311 PlasticsEurope General Assembly June 14 2007
312 [Link]
[Link]
313 [Link]
[Link]
314 [Link]
315 [Link]
316 [Link]
317 [Link]
318 [Link]
[Link]
The World in 2030 333
319 [Link]
dp/1585421936
320 [Link]
321 [Link]
322 [Link]
dp/0143037889/ref=pd_bbs_sr_1/104-7962606-9738369?ie=UTF8&s=
books&qid=1179331027&sr=1-1
323 [Link]
324 [Link]
325 [Link]
dp/0199270740/ref=pd_bbs_sr_1/203-3942085-9388709?ie=UTF8&s=
books&qid=1179222638&sr=8-1
326 Professor Dieter Helm interview of BBC Radio 4s News At 6pm May
14th 2007.
327 Private communication between a member of the EU Energy Commission
and the author
328 [Link]
JDDJDQT
329 [Link]
330 [Link]
dp/0525949380
331 [Link]
332 [Link]
333 [Link]
334 [Link]
335 [Link]
336 [Link]
337 [Link]
[Link]
338 James Canton The Extreme Future
339 [Link]
05145530152C685861
334 The World in 2030
340 [Link]
341 [Link]
342 [Link]
343 [Link]
344 [Link]
energ_22052007.html
345 [Link]
[Link]
346 [Link]
347 [Link]
348 [Link]
349 [Link]
350 [Link]
351 [Link]
352 [Link]
353 [Link]
[Link]
354 [Link]
[Link]
355 [Link]
[Link]
356 [Link]
357 [Link]
[Link]/custom/nyt-com/html-companyprole.
asp&symb=CVX
358 [Link]
carbonfootprints
359 [Link]
carbonfootprints
360 [Link]
361 [Link]
567&version=1&template_id=48&parent_id=28
The World in 2030 335
362 [Link]
363 [Link]
[Link]?pmid=2632&id=V00-UL.NeAT1Tbcp3gc
364 [Link]
365 [Link]
366 [Link]
Basic&taxonomyId=14&articleId=9024451&intsrc=hm_topic
367 [Link]
368 [Link]
gallon/2100-11389_3-[Link]
369 [Link]
article=vn560supercared
370 [Link]
stations-evolution-prospects/article-154672
371 [Link]
372 [Link]
373 [Link]
dp/0143037889/ref=pd_bbs_sr_1/104-7962606-9738369?ie=UTF8&s=boo
ks&qid=1179331027&sr=1-1
374 [Link]
375 [Link]
dp/0713999233
376 [Link]
menu?p_lang=ger
377 [Link]
378 [Link]
RSGGDQV
379 [Link]
380 [Link]
381 [Link]
382 [Link]
383 [Link]
336 The World in 2030
384 [Link]
JTQJRRN
385 [Link]
RJGDQTN
386 [Link]
387 [Link]
388 Costing The Earth, BBC Radio 4, May 18, 2007
389 [Link]
390 [Link]
391 [Link]
392 [Link]
393 Costing The Earth, BBC Radio 4, May 18, 2007
394 [Link]
395 [Link]
396 [Link]
[Link]&type=printable
397 [Link]
398 [Link]
[Link]
399 [Link]
400 [Link]
401 [Link]
402 [Link]
5861.400;jsessionid=JAPAGBJLNPAP
403 [Link]
dp/0713999233
404 [Link]
RJPVDNT
405 [Link]
dp/0713999233
406 [Link]
407 [Link]
The World in 2030 337
408 [Link]
Civilizations/dp/0312069871/ref=ed_oe_h/105-2923417-8413202
409 [Link]
410 [Link]
411 [Link]
412 [Link]
[Link]
413 [Link]
efciency-achieved/
414 [Link]
efciency-achieved/
415 [Link]
416 [Link]
[Link]
417 [Link]
418 [Link]
RSGGDQV
419 [Link]
420 [Link]
umber=10685
421 [Link]
dp/0713999233
422 [Link]
Projektbeschreibung_MED-CSP/Final_Report_PDF/MED-CSP_Full_
report_nal.pdf
423 [Link]
424 Professor I.M. Dharmadasa in a note to the author
425 [Link]
426 [Link]
427 [Link]
dp/0787650153
428 [Link]
338 The World in 2030
429 [Link]
430 [Link]
431 [Link]
dp/1585422541
432 Professor I.M. Dharmadasa in a note to the author
433 [Link]
dp/1585422541
434 [Link]
435 [Link]
dp/0143037889/ref=pd_bbs_sr_1/104-7962606-9738369?ie=UTF8&s=boo
ks&qid=1179331027&sr=1-1
436 [Link]
dp/0525949380
437 [Link]
dp/1585422541
438 [Link]
dp/0713999233
439 [Link]
metal/2100-11392_3-[Link]
440 [Link]
dp/1585422541
441 [Link]
d=604&language=1
442 [Link]
443 [Link]
444 [Link]
445 [Link]
446 [Link]
cfm?story_id=9086536
447 [Link]
448 [Link]
business&oref=slogin&oref=slogin
The World in 2030 339
449 [Link]
450 [Link]
free_in_rst_solar_hydrogen_house
451 [Link]
452 [Link]
515049&instanceid=1943106
453 [Link]
dp/0743449762
454 [Link]
455 [Link]
456 [Link]
457 [Link]
458 [Link]
dp/1585422541
459 [Link]
460 [Link]
461 [Link]/
462 [Link]
463 [Link]
464 [Link]
465 [Link]
466 [Link]
tor+launch/2100-1014_3-[Link]
467 [Link]
dp/0061136883
468 [Link]
dp/1579549543
469 [Link]
dp/0061136883
470 [Link]
471 [Link]
472 [Link]
340 The World in 2030
473 [Link]
474 [Link]
475 [Link]
476 [Link]
477 [Link]
478 [Link]
dp/1585422541
479 [Link]
480 [Link]
rewards/2006/11/27/[Link]
481 [Link]
research/[Link]
482 [Link]
483 [Link]
484 [Link]
485 [Link]
486 [Link]
487 [Link]
dp/0061136883
488 [Link]
html
489 [Link]
490 [Link]
=&xml=/connected/2007/02/18/[Link]
491 [Link]
RRQSRQG
492 [Link]
493 [Link]
[Link]
494 [Link]
id=9304146
495 [Link]
The World in 2030 341
496 [Link]
497 [Link]
to-protect-serve/
498 [Link]
499 [Link]
500 [Link]
501 [Link]
502 [Link]
[Link]
503 [Link]
504 [Link]
505 [Link]
506 [Link]
ef=science&oref=slogin&oref=slogin
507 [Link]
508 [Link]
509 [Link]
510 [Link]
511 [Link]
dp/0525949380
512 [Link]
513 [Link]
514 [Link]
515 [Link]
blood_pressure_monitors/omron_rx3.htm
516 [Link]
517 [Link]
518 [Link]
519 [Link]
520 [Link]
521 [Link]
522 [Link]
342 The World in 2030
523 [Link]
524 [Link]
525 [Link]
526 [Link]
[Link]
527 [Link]
news/2007/04/12/Science/[Link].
[Link]
528 [Link]
529 [Link]
dp/0814408974
530 [Link]
[Link];jsessionid=HGILLDPALHMD
531 [Link]
532 [Link]
533 [Link]
534 [Link]
dp/1585422541
535 [Link]
536 [Link]
537 [Link]
538 [Link]
st_uids=8603652&dopt=Abstract
539 [Link]
540 [Link]
541 [Link]
542 [Link]
dp/0525949380
543 [Link]
544 [Link]
545 [Link]
[Link]
The World in 2030 343
546 [Link]
547 [Link]
548 [Link]
549 [Link]
dp/1591025117